THE
BIOLOGICAL BULLETIN
AUGUST 1999
Editor
Associate Editors
Section Editor
Online Editors
Editorial Board
Editorial Office
MICHAEL J. GREENBERG
Louis E. BURNETT
R. ANDREW CAMERON
CHARLES D. DERBY
MICHAEL LABARBERA
SHINYA INDUE, Imaging and Microscopy
JAMES A. BLAKE, Keys to Marine
Invertebrates of the Woods Hole Region
WILLIAM D. COHEN, Marine Models
Electronic Record and Compendia
PETER B. ARMSTRONG
ERNEST S. CHANG
THOMAS H. DIETZ
RICHARD B. EMLET
DAVID EPEL
GREGORY HINKLE
MAKOTO KOBAYASHI
DONAL T. MANAHAN
MARGARET MCFALL-NGAI
MARK W. MILLER
TATSUO MOTOKAWA
YOSHITAKA NAGAHAMA
SHERRY D. PAINTER
J. HERBERT WAITE
RICHARD K. ZIMMER
PAMELA CLAPP HINKLE
VICTORIA R. GIBSON
CAROL SCHACHINGER
PATRICIA BURNS
The Whitney Laboratory, University of Florida
Grice Marine Biological Laboratory. College of Charleston
California Institute of Technology
Georgia State University
University of Chicago
Marine Biological Laboratory
ENSR Marine & Coastal Center, Woods Hole
Hunter College, City University of New York
University of California, Davis
Bodega Marine Lab., University of California. Davis
Louisiana State University
Oregon Institute of Marine Biology, LIniv. of Oregon
Hopkins Marine Station, Stanford University
Cereon Genomics. Cambridge. Massachusetts
Hiroshima University of Economics, Japan
University of Southern California
Kewalo Marine Laboratory, University of Hawaii
Institute of Neurobiology, University of Puerto Rico
Tokyo Institute of Technology, Japan
National Institute for Basic Biology, Japan
Marine Biomed. Inst.. Univ. of Texas Medical Branch
University of California, Santa Barbara
University of California, Los Angeles
Managing Editor
Staff Editor
Editorial Assistant
Subscription & Advertising Secretary
Published by
MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY
WOODS HOLE, MASSACHUSETTS
Cover
The ascoglossan sea slug, Elysia chlorotica
(Gould), shown on the cover (photograph by S. K.
Pierce), seeks out and specifically eats a chromo-
phytic alga, Vancheria litorea. Like certain other
species of sea slugs, E. chlorotica has developed the
ability to acquire the chloroplasts from its algal
foodstuff and to utilize them for nutrition. The
plastids are usually engulfed by particular epithelial
cells in the digestive gland where they photosyn-
thesize and, in some species, provide sufficient nu-
trients to sustain life and reproduction even when
no other food is available.
In E. chlorotica, the function of the captured chlo-
roplasts is maintained for up to 8 months a surpris-
ingly long period, surpassing similar chloroplast sym-
bioses by many months. Throughout this period,
furthermore, plastid proteins are continuously synthe-
sized, and some of the proteins appear to be encoded
by the slug genome. Another remarkable feature of
these slug populations is the abrupt end of the annual
life cycle all of the animals dying synchronously,
whether in the laboratory or in the field.
In this issue. Skip Pierce and his colleagues (p. 1 )
report a widespread viral infection of the slug pop-
ulation; this phenomenon also occurs annually and
is coincident with the mass mortality. The viruses
(see inset) seem to be endogenous and have many
characteristics in common with retroviruses. The
report suggests that the viruses may not only be
involved in the regulation of the slug's life cycle,
but may be the means by which algal genes are
transferred to the slug genome.
CONTENTS
VOLUME 197, No I: AUGUST 1999
RESEARCH NOTES
Pierce, Sidney K., Timothy K. Maugel, Mary E.
Rumpho, Jeffrey J. Hanteii, and William L. Mondy
Annual viral expression in a sea slug population: life
cycle control and symbiotic chloroplast maintenance . 1
Thomas, Florence I.M., Kristen A. Edwards, Toby F.
Bolton, Mary A. Sewell, and Jill M. Zande
Mechanical resistance to shear stress: the role of
echinoderm egg extracellular layers 7
Rinkevich, B., S. Ben-Yakir, and R. Ben-Yakir
Regeneration of amputated avian bone by a coral
skeletal implant 11
ECOLOGY AND EVOLUTION
Miner, Benjamin G., Eric Sanford, Richard R. Strath-
mann, Bruno Fernet, and Richard B. Emlet
Functional and evolutionary implications of opposed
bands, big mouths, and extensive oral ciliation in
larval opheliids and echiurids (Annelida) 14
Johnsen, Sonke, Elizabeth J. Balser, Erin C. Fisher, and
Edith A. Widder
Bioluminescence in the deep-sea cirrate octopod
Staurotnithis syitensis Verrill (Mollusca: Cephalopoda) . 26
NEUROBIOLOGY AND BEHAVIOR
Ganter, Geoffrey K., Ralf Heinrich, Richard P. Bunge,
and Edward A. Kravitz
Long-term culture of lobster central ganglia; expres-
sion of foreign genes in identified neurons 40
Hanlon, Roger T., Michael R. Maxwell, Nadav Shashar,
Ellis R. Loew, and Kim-Laura Boyle
An ethogram of body patterning behavior in the
biomedicallv and commercially valuable squid Loligo
/mild off Cape Cod, Massachusetts 49
Bushmann, Paul J.
Concurrent signals and behavioral plasticity in blue
crab (Callinectr* uipidiu Rathbun) courtship 63
PHYSIOLOGY
Engebretson, Hilary P., and Gisele Muller-Parker
Translocation of photosynthetic carbon from two
algal symbionts to the sea anemone Anthopleura
elegantissima 72
DEVELOPMENT AND REPRODUCTION
Grabowski, Gregory M., John G. Blackburn, and Eric R.
Lacy
Morphology and epithelial ion transport of the alka-
line gland in the Atlantic stingray (Dasyatis sabina) ... 82
Krug, Patrick J., and Adriana E. Manzi
Waterborne and surface-associated carbohydrates as
settlement cues for larvae of the specialist marine
herbivore Ahitri/i moritsta 94
Chaparro, O.R., R.J. Thompson, and C.J. Emerson
The velar ciliature in the brooded larva of the Chil-
ean oyster Ostrea cltiltnsis (Philippi, 1845) 104
Annual Report of the Marine Biological Laboratory .... R 1
THE BIOLOGICAL BULLETIN
THE BIOLOGICAL BULLETIN is published six limes a year by the Marine Biological Laboratory, 7 MBL Street,
Woods Hole, Massachusetts 02543.
Subscriptions and similar matter should be addressed to Subscription Manager, THE BIOLOGICAL BULLETIN,
Marine Biological Laboratory, 7 MBL Street, Woods Hole. Massachusetts 02543. Subscription per year (six
issues, two volumes): $205 tor libraries; $95 for individuals. Subscription per volume (three issues): $102.50 for
libraries; $47.50 for individuals. Back and single issues (subject to availability): $40 for libranes; $20 for
individuals.
Communications relative to manuscripts should be sent to Michael J. Greenberg, Editor-in-Chief, or Pamela
Clapp Hinkle. Managing Editor, at the Marine Biological Laboratory, 7 MBL Street. Woods Hole. Massachusetts
02543. Telephone: (508) 289-7428. FAX: 508-457-1924. E-mail: pclapp@mbl.edu.
http://www.mbl.edu/BiologicalBulletin/
The home page for the electronic companion to THE BIOLOGICAL BULLETIN the Marine Models Electronic
Record and other BIOLOGICAL BULLETIN publications is available on the World Wide Web at the address shown
above.
THE BIOLOGICAL BULLETIN is indexed in bibliographic services including Index Medicus and MEDL1NE,
Chemical Abstracts, Current Contemn, Elsevier BIOBASE/Current Awareness in Biological Sciences, and Geo
Abstracts.
Printed on acid free paper,
effective with Volume ISO, Issue 1, 1991.
POSTMASTER: Send address changes to THE BIOLOGICAL BULLETIN, Marine Biological Laboratory,
7 MBL Street, Woods Hole. MA 02543.
Copyright 1999. by the Marine Biological Laboratory
Periodicals postage paid at Woods Hole. MA, and additional mailing offices.
ISSN 0006-3185
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
The Biological Bulletin accepts outstanding original research
reports of general interest to biologists throughout the world.
Papers are usually of intermediate length (10-40 manuscript
pages). A limited number of solicited review papers may be
accepted after formal review. A paper will usually appear within
four months after its acceptance.
Very short, especially topical papers (less than 9 manuscript
pages including tables, figures, and bibliography) will be published
in a separate section entitled "Research Notes." A Research Note
in The Biological Bulletin follows the format of similar notes in
Nature. It should open with a summary paragraph of 150 to 200
words comprising the introduction and the conclusions. The rest of
the text should continue on without subheadings, and there should
be no more than 30 references. References should be referred to in
the text by number, and listed in the Literature Cited section in the
order that they appear in the text. Unlike references in Nature,
references in the Research Notes section should conform in
punctuation and arrangement to the style of recent issues of The
Biological Bulletin. Materials and Methods should be incorpo-
rated into appropriate figure legends. See the article by Loh-
iTumn et al. (October 1990. Vol. 179: 2I4-2IX) for sample
style. A Research Note will usually appear within two months
after its acceptance.
The Editorial Board requests that regular manuscripts con-
form to the requirements set below; those manuscripts that do
not conform will be returned to authors for correction before
review.
1. Manuscripts. Manuscripts, including figures, should be
submitted in quadruplicate, with the originals clearly marked.
(Xerox copies of photographs are not acceptable for review pur-
poses.) The submission letter accompanying the manuscript should
include a telephone number, a FAX number, and (if possible) an
E-mail address for the corresponding author. The original manu-
script must be typed in no smaller than 12 pitch or 10 point, using
double spacing (including figure legends, footnotes, bibliography,
etc.) on one side of 16- or 20-lb. bond paper, 8 by 1 1 inches.
Please, no right justification. Manuscripts should be proofread
carefully and errors corrected legibly in black ink. Pages should be
numbered consecutively. Margins on all sides should be at least 1
inch (2.5 cm). Manuscripts should conform to the Council of
Biology Editors Style Manual. 5th Edition (Council of Biology
Editors, 1983) and to American spelling. Unusual abbreviations
should be kept to a minimum and should be spelled out on first
reference as well as defined in a footnote on the title page.
Manuscripts should be divided into the following components:
Title page. Abstract (of no more than 200 words), Introduction,
Materials and Methods, Results, Discussion, Acknowledgments,
Literature Cited, Tables, and Figure Legends. In addition, authors
should supply a list of words and phrases under which the article
should be indexed.
2. Title page. The title page consists of a condensed title or
running head of no more than 35 letters and spaces, the manuscript
title, authors' names and appropriate addresses, and footnotes
listing present addresses, acknowledgments or contribution num-
bers, and explanation of unusual abbreviations.
3. Figures. The dimensions of the printed page. 7 by 9
inches, should be kept in mind in preparing figures for publication.
We recommend that figures be about 1 times the linear dimensions
of the final printing desired, and that the ratio of the largest to the
smallest letter or number and of the thickest to the thinnest line not
exceed 1:1.5. Explanatory matter generally should be included in
legends, although axes should always be identified on the illustra-
tion itself. Figures should be prepared for reproduction as either
line cuts or halftones. Figures to be reproduced as line cuts should
be unmounted glossy photographic reproductions or drawn in
black ink on white paper, good-quality tracing cloth or plastic, or
blue-lined coordinate paper. Those to be reproduced as halftones
should be mounted on board, with both designating numbers or
letters and scale bars affixed directly to the figures. All figures
should be numbered in consecutive order, with no distinction
between text and plate figures and cited, in order, in the text. The
author's name and an arrow indicating orientation should appear
on the reverse side of all figures.
Color: The Biological Bulletin will publish color figures and
plates, but must bill authors for the actual additional cost of
printing in color. The process is expensive, so authors with more
than one color image should consistent with editorial concerns,
especially citation of figures in order combine them into a single
plate to reduce the expense. On request, when supplied with a copy
of a color illustration, the editorial staff will provide a pre-publi-
cation estimate of the printing cost.
4. Tables, footnotes, figure legends, etc. Authors should
follow the style in a recent issue of The Biological Bulletin in
preparing table headings, figure legends, and the like. Because of
the high cost of setting tabular material in type, authors are asked
to limit such material as much as possible. Tables, with their
headings and footnotes, should be typed on separate sheets, num-
bered with consecutive Roman numerals, and placed after the
Literature Cited. Figure legends should contain enough informa-
tion to make the figure intelligible separate from the text. Legends
should be typed double spaced, with consecutive Arabic numbers,
on a separate sheet at the end of the paper. Footnotes should be
limited to authors' current addresses, acknowledgments or contri-
bution numbers, and explanation of unusual abbreviations. All
such footnotes should appear on the title page. Footnotes are not
normally permitted in the body of the text.
5. Literature cited. In the text, literature should be cited by
the Harvard system, with papers by more than two authors cited as
Jones et al.. 1980. Personal communications and material in prep-
aration or in press should be cited in the text only, with author's
initials and institutions, unless the material has been formally
accepted and a volume number can be supplied. The list of
references following the text should be headed Literature Cited,
and must be typed double spaced on separate pages, conforming in
punctuation and arrangement to the style of recent issues of The
Biological Bulletin. Citations should include complete titles and
inclusive pagination. Journal abbreviations should normally follow
those of the U. S. A. Standards Institute (USASII. as adopted by
BIOLOGICAL ABSTRACTS and CHEMICAL ABSTRACTS, with the minor
differences set out below. The most generally useful list of bio-
logical journal titles is that published each year by BIOLOGICAL
ABSTRACTS (BIOSIS List of Serials; the most recent issue). Foreign
authors, and others who are accustomed to using THE WORLD LIST
OF SCIENTIFIC PERIODICALS, may find a booklet published by the
Biological Council of the U.K. (obtainable from the Institute of
Biology, 41 Queen's Gate, London. S.W.7. England, U.K.) useful,
since it sets out the WORLD LIST abbreviations for most biological
journals with notes of the USASI abbreviations where these differ.
CHEMICAL ABSTRACTS publishes quarterly supplements of addi-
tional abbreviations. The following points of reference style for
THE BIOLOGICAL BULLETIN differ from USASI (or modified WORLD
LIST) usage:
A. Journal abbreviations, and book titles, all underlined (for
italics)
B. All components of abbreviations with initial capitals (not
as European usage in WORLD LIST e.g.. J. Cell. Comp. Physiol.
NOT J. cell. comp. Physiol. )
C. All abbreviated components must be followed by a period,
whole word components must not (i.e.. J. Cancer Res.)
D. Space between all components (e.g.. J. Cell. Comp.
Physio/., not J. Cell. Comp. Physiol.}
E. Unusual words in journal titles should be spelled out in
full, rather than employing new abbreviations invented by the
author. For example, use Rit Visindafjelags Islendinga without
abbreviation.
F. All single word journal titles in full (e.g., Veliger, Ecol-
ogy. Brain).
G. The order of abbreviated components should be the same
as the word order of the complete title (i.e., Proc. and Trans.
placed where they appear, not transposed as in some BIOLOGICAL
ABSTRACTS listings).
H. A few well-known international journals in their preferred
forms rather than WORLD LIST or USASI usage (e.g.. Nature.
Science, Evolution NOT Nature. Land., Science, N.Y.; Evolution,
Lancaster. Pa.)
6. Reprints, page proofs, and charges. Authors of articles
in black and white (no color figures) receive their first 50 reprints
(without covers) free of charge. Color reprints and additional
black-and-white reprints may be purchased; authors will receive
order forms. Reprints normally will be delivered about 2 to 3
months after the issue date. Authors (or delegates for foreign
authors) will receive page proofs of articles shortly before publi-
cation. They will be charged the current cost of printers' time for
corrections to these (other than corrections of printers' or editors'
errors). Other than these charges for authors' alterations. The
Biological Bulletin does not have page charges.
Reference: Biol. Bull. 197: 1-6. (August 1999)
Annual Viral Expression in a Sea Slug Population:
Life Cycle Control and Symbiotic Chloroplast
Maintenance
SIDNEY K. PIERCE 1 *, TIMOTHY K. MAUGEL 1 . MARY E. RUMPHO 2 .
JEFFREY J. HANTEN 1 , AND WILLIAM L. MONDY 1
Department of Biologv. University of Man-land, College Park, Maryland 20742: and 2 Department of
Horticultural Sciences, Texas A & M University, College Station, Texas 77843
In a few well-known cases, animal population dynamics
are regulated by cyclical infections of protists, bacteria, or
viruses. In most of these cases, the pathogen persists in the
environment, where it continues to infect some percentage
of successive generations of the host organism. This persis-
tent re-infection causes a long-lived decline, in either pop-
ulation size or cycle, to a level that depends upon pathogen
density and infection level (1-4). We have discovered, on
the basis of 9 years of observation, an annual viral expres-
sion in Elysia chlorotica, an ascoglossan sea slug, that
coincides with the yearly, synchronized death of all the
adults in the population. This coincidence of viral expres-
sion and mass death is ubiquitous, and it occurs in the
laboratory as well as in the field. Our evidence also sug-
gests that the viruses do not re-infect subsequent genera-
tions from an external pathogen pool, but are endogenous
to the slug. We are led, finally, to the hypothesis that the
viruses may be involved in the maintenance of symbiotic
chloroplasts within the molluscan cells.
Populations of the ascoglossan sea slug Elysia chlorotica
occur in salt marshes from the Chesapeake Bay to Nova
Scotia. The life cycle of the slug lasts about 10 months. The
hermaphroditic adults lay egg masses in the spring of each
year, and all of the adults die shortly afterward (5, 6). A
week or so after the egg deposition, veliger larvae hatch.
These larvae spend a few weeks in the plankton and, it
filaments of the chromophytic alga Vaucheria litorea are
present, each veliger homes in on one of them and attaches
to it. During the next 24 h, the larva metamorphoses into a
Received 1 June 1999; accepted 17 June 1999.
* To whom correspondence should be addressed: E-mail: sp30@
umail.umd.edu
juvenile slug while still attached to the algal filament. If the
algal filaments are not present, metamorphosis rarely oc-
curs, at least not in laboratory cultures (5. 6). Vaucheria is
the only alga that E. chlorotica eats, and it is the source of
the symbiotic chloroplasts that are acquired during feeding.
The juvenile slug immediately begins eating the algal fila-
ments and taking on its first load of chloroplasts, which are
sequestered by specialized cells in the epithelium lining the
digestive diverticula (5, 6). During the next several months.
the slugs continue to eat Vaucheria and grow, until winter
temperatures cause them to become inactive. As the salt
marshes warm in the spring, the slugs become active again,
begin laying egg masses, and then die. By the time the egg
masses have hatched in May. all the adults are gone. This
mass mortality occurs synchronously in the laboratory as
well as in the field and regardless of the time of year that the
slugs were collected.
Symbioses in which chloroplasts usually from a partic-
ular species of alga are taken up and retained within the
cytoplasm of an animal cell occur in several phyla, but they
are most commonly encountered in molluscan sea slugs,
particularly in the order Ascoglossa ( = Sacoglossa) (Opis-
thobranchia). Certain of the molluscan cells can capture
chloroplasts from algal food (usually from a specific species
of either Rhodophyceae or Chlorophyceae), and these or-
ganelles retain some degree of photosynthetic function for a
time (e.g.. 7, 8, 9). Whether this intracellular association is
a symbiosis in the strict sense is debatable; some authors
prefer terms like chloroplast symbiosis, chloroplast reten-
tion, or kleptoplasty (7. 9, 11, 12, 13), which indicate that
the benefit of the association is entirely to the animal.
The duration of the association between the molluscan
cell and the algal plastid varies from species to species.
S. K. PIERCE ET AL
Some associations last less than a week [e.g., Hermaea
hifida and Elysia hedgpethi (see 14)]; and although the
plastids are initially functional, photosynthesis stops or is
greatly reduced after a week of starvation. In contrast,
plastid function continues for more than a week in starved
specimens of several species, most belonging to the asco-
glossan family Elysiidae (e.g., 7, 10, 15, 16). In the species
with the longer duration symbioses, the algal chloroplasts
within the molluscan cells fix I4 CO : , and the I4 C appears in
a variety of compounds in the animal tissues ( 15, 17. 18, 19,
20, 21). Thus, there is no doubt that the captured chloro-
plasts are photosynthetically active within the molluscan
cell cytoplasm, and that the products of the synthesis are
utilized by the host animal. Indeed, once the symbiosis is
established, the species with the longer-lived chloroplast
associations can be starved and, as long as light is provided,
will maintain or actually gain body weight until the chlo-
roplast function finally fails (7).
In plant cells, continued photosynthetic activity requires
continuous synthesis of chloroplast proteins because several
proteins, including those used in light harvesting, are rap-
idly turned-over during the process and must be replaced
(22, 23, 24). But, several of these photosynthetic proteins
(or their subunits) are encoded in the nucleus, so plastid
protein synthesis requires the integration of two distinct
genomes, that of the chloroplast and that of the plant cell
nucleus (reviewed in 25). Because normal plastid photosyn-
thetic function is dependent upon major nuclear and cyto-
plasmic support, the ultimate failure of photosynthesis by
the symbiotic chloroplasts within the molluscan cells is not
surprising. But the symbiotic plastids of E. chlorotica stay
photosynthetically functional for 8-9 months (5, 26)
many months longer than those of any other species yet
described. This remarkable persistence of chloroplast func-
tion during starvation indicates that replacement of at least
the essential photosynthetic proteins must be occurring
within the plastid while it is housed in the molluscan cyto-
plasm; and indeed, synthesis of plastid proteins, primarily
those associated with photosynthesis, occurs in the E. chlo-
rotica plastids (26. 27. 28).
The plastid proteins synthesized within the cells of E.
chlorotica are of two pharmacologically distinguishable
sorts: those whose synthesis is blocked by chloramphenicol,
and those blocked by cycloheximide (26). Protein synthesis
on pltistul ribosomes is blocked by chloramphenicol,
whereas synthesis on cytoplasmic ribosomes, usually di-
rected by nuclear genes, is blocked by cycloheximide.
These results suggest strongly that some plastid proteins are
synthesized upon slug cell ribosomes (26). If this is the case,
the genetic information coding for these proteins must
somehow be present in the molluscan DNA or must be
acquired by all the slugs from the alga in every generation.
Our findings presented below suggest a vehicle for this
transfer of genetic information from the alga to the slug.
In 1990, as part of an ongoing ultrastructural study of
morphological changes in the fine structure of the dying
slugs from a population on Martha's Vineyard, Massachu-
setts, we discovered viruses in digestive cells and hemo-
cytes (29; also Fig. 1). Every year since then, every animal
examined near the end of the life cycle has had viruses
present, whether it was fixed within hours of collection from
the field or maintained for months in our aquarium. No
evidence of viruses has been found in any slug earlier in the
year, except occasionally within the confines of the plastid
(Fig. IE, see below).
Viruses in the spring slugs are present in the nucleus and
cytoplasm of several cell types. They appear to be assem-
bled in the nucleus, then move into the cytoplasm, and
finally bud out either into the extracellular space or into a
vacuole (Fig. 1A). The diameters of the icosahedral viral
capsids in the nuclei average 89 nm (1.0); but in the
cytoplasm, after they have picked up an envelope, they are
109 nm (1.6) (Fig. IB). The shapes and sizes of the
capsids and envelopes are very similar to those in the
Retroviridae, but other viral types have similar dimensions,
and known retroviruses are not assembled in the nucleus
(30, 31). In addition to these larger viruses, some chloro-
plasts within the cells of spring slugs contain structures
(diameter = 20 nm 0.4) that could either be smaller
viruses or viral cores. These particles occur loosely col-
lected in areas between the plastid membranes (Fig. 1C).
They also occur as particle clumps in the cytoplasm (Fig.
ID), sometimes near material that could be the remnants of
chloroplasts. In some instances, in a few fall animals, these
particles are present in crystalline arrays (Fig. IE). Ribu-
lose-l,5-bisphosphate-carboxylase oxygenase (RuBisCO)
occurs in crystalline form in some plant plastids fixed under
hyperosmotic conditions (32, 33). However, the particles in
such RuBisCO crystals are much smaller and usually lack a
visual substructure (32, 33), whereas the array particles in
the symbiotic plastids in Elysia clearly have a substructure
(Fig. IE). The particle arrays in the E. chlorotica plastids
are more reminiscent of mosaic viruses in plants (34),
although almost nothing is known about such crystals in the
viruses and plastids of algae. In summary, the morphology
suggests that either more than one viral type is present in the
slug cell and captured plastids, or we have found several
stages of a single viral type.
In addition to the morphology, we have some biochemi-
cal information about the identity of the viruses. Using
differential and sucrose-gradient centrifugation, we have
isolated a fraction from slug homogenates at a density of
1.18 g/ml that has reverse transcriptase (RT) activity. This
activity, which is considered diagnostic for retroviruses, is
two orders of magnitude higher in spring slugs than in slugs
tested in the fall (Fig. 2). In addition, the RT activity of fall
animals, but not spring animals, is inhibited by rifampicin
(Fig. 3). This inhibition indicates that the activity measured
SEA SLUGS, PLASTIDS. AND VIRUSES
Figure 1. Electron micrographs of viruses in Elysiu chlorulica. (A) Viral particles in various stages of
maturation are present in the nucleus (n) and cytoplasm of a hemocyte from a dying slug (magnification =
33,750 X, scale bar = 1 /urn). (B) Higher magnification ( 85.000 x, scale bar = 0.? /j.m) of viruses budding into
cytoplasmic vacuoles. Icosahedral shape and double envelopes of the mature virus are apparent. (C) Viral
aggregates (arrows) within the symbiotic chloroplast of a spring Elysiu (magnification = 16,880, scale bar = 1.0
fim). (D) Viral particles very similar in appearance to those in (C) located in the cytoplasm of a chloroplast
(cp)-containing digestive cell of a spring slug. The diffuse, gray areas in the cytoplasm are lipid produced by the
plastid (magnification = 27,000, scale bar = 1 .0 /j.m). (E) Viral crystal contained in a symbiotic chloroplast from
a fall slug (magnification = 54,000, scale bar = 0.5 jim).
3.
E
15(1(1(111-1
100000-
50000-
A-fall animals
S. K. PIERCE ET AL.
150000-
100000-
50000-
B-spring animals
i i i I i i i i i i i i i i
1.12 1 12 I 14 118 I 18 1 18 I 19 1 19 1.19 I 20 1.20 1.21 121 1 22
~1 I I I I I 1 I I I I I 1 I I
106 1.10 I 12 I 14 I 15 1 17 1 17 1 18 I 18 1 IS I 19 1.19 1.19 120 1.20
Gradient fractions (gm/ml)
Figure 2. Comparison of reverse transcriptase activity in sucrose-gradient fractions from a typical extract of
fall slugs (A) and spring slugs (B). The results are essentially the same whether the animals were freshly
collected in the spring or collected in the fall and overwintered in aquaria.
in the fall animals is due to DNA dependent-RNA polymer-
ase (which utilizes the same substrates in the RT assay)
rather than RT, and confirms the absence of viruses in the
fall animals. Taken together, the morphology, the buoyancy,
and the presence of RT all suggest that a retro-like virus is
present in the cells of the dying slugs.
150-1
100-
3
50-
O- 1
Fall
Spring
Figure 3. Rilampicin inhibits reverse transcriptase activity. Enzyme
activity was assayed in pooled gradient fractions with densities from 1.16
to 1.18 g/ml prepared from fall and spring slugs. The effect of the inhibitor
is expressed as a percentage of control values.
The relationships between the nuclear, cytoplasmic, and
plastid viruses are not known at present. However, for the
last 9 years, the viruses have been found in every dying slug
examined. Since some of the slugs had been maintained in
the laboratory, in aquaria containing artificial seawater and
with no access to Vauclierui for 8 months before the viruses
appeared, the infection is unlikely to have been opportunis-
tic. Instead, the results suggest either that the demise of the
entire population is caused by an endogenous virus or that
the virus can be expressed only as the defense systems of
the aging animals begin to fail. Furthermore, if the effect on
the life cycle is due to a retrovirus, as our data suggest, then
the viral genome is probably transmitted to the next gener-
ation of slugs in the molluscan DNA. Infection of germ cells
by retroviruses produces endogenous proviruses that are
inherited as Mendelian genes (33). Alternatively, the viruses
might enter all of the slugs via the sequestered chloroplasts.
either as part of the plastid genome or as constituted viral
particles. In either case, viral expression is coincident with
increases in environmental temperature, at least in the field
slugs. Both the onset of egg laying and the death of the
population are associated with the rise of water tempera-
tures in the spring. We can delay the demise of the slugs by
maintaining them at very cold temperatures (2-5C), but
eventually 6-8 weeks after the warmer-maintained slugs
have died the cooled slugs also die with viruses in their
cells, indicating that temperature is not the only expression
stimulus.
It will take some time to sort out both the types of viruses
involved here and the molecular relationships between the
SEA SLUGS. PLASTIDS. AND VIRUSES
slugs, the algae, the plastids. and the viruses. Nevertheless,
the nine-year, annual occurrence of the association between
population demise and viral expression at the end of the E.
chlorotica life cycle strongly suggests that the virus has a
role in regulating this coincidence. Indeed, we speculate that
the viral infection may have caused the transfer, from the
alga to the slug, of algal genes that allow the molluscan cells
to assist in plastid maintenance. Although the transfer, in-
tegration, and expression of such a group of genes between
species should succeed only rarely, those successes that did
occur should have profound, immediate, heritable effects on
the phenotype of the infected species. Such heritable effects
must certainly be associated with the mechanism of the
widely accepted endosymbiotic origin of intracellular or-
ganelles such as mitochondria and chloroplasts; a variety of
genes must have been transferred from the symbiont into the
host cell nucleus to consummate such a relationship. In
addition, a retrovirus as a gene transmission vehicle might
have merit as a hypothesis to explain genetic similarities
between distantly related or unrelated species (e.g., 35) and
is the basis of some genetic therapies (36). If a successful
interspecies gene transfer between an alga and a slug me-
diated by an endogenous virus could be demonstrated in the
case of E. chlorotica. then an exemplary mechanism for this
process would have been provided.
Methods
Viral isolation
The fractionation procedure was carried out using au-
toclaved equipment. All reagents were molecular biolog-
ical grade (DNAase-, RNAase-. and protease-free; from
Sigma Chemicals, unless otherwise noted) and filtered
(0.2 /xm pore). Approximately 3.0 g of E. chlorotica was
homogenized in an ice-cold buffer (450 mM NaCl, 1.0
mM EDTA, 5.0 mM 3-[/V-morpholino]propane-sulfonic
acid (MOPS), 2.3 yuM leupeptin. 1.0 mM dithiothreitol
(DTT), 500 /xM phenylmethylsulfonyl fluoride (PMSF),
pH 7.5) containing the mucolytic agent H-acetyl cysteine
(500 mM), which is necessary to disperse the copious
mucus produced by the slug (26). The homogenate was
filtered through six layers of cheesecloth, then through
one layer of Miracloth (Calbiochem), and finally through
two layers of Miracloth. The filtrate was centrifuged for
5 min at 4300 x g (4C), and the supernatant was
centrifuged at 20,000 X g for 30 min (4C). The super-
natant from the second spin was layered over a 20%
sucrose cushion and centrifuged at 180,000 X g for 2 h
(4C) in a swinging bucket rotor. The supernatant was
discarded, and the pellet was resuspended in ice-cold
homogenization buffer (without H-acetyl cysteine). This
suspension was layered on the top of a 15%-50% con-
tinuous sucrose gradient and centrifuged at 180,000 X g
for 43 h (4C).
The gradients were then fractionated by piercing the
bottom of the centrifuge tube and raising the gradient out of
the tube with 65% sucrose. Twenty 600-/xl fractions were
collected, and the density of each was determined by weigh-
ing 50 /xl with an analytical balance. The sucrose in each
fraction was then diluted with homogenization buffer (with-
out /i-acetyl cysteine), and each fraction was centrifuged a
final time at 180,000 X g for 2 h. The supernatants from this
last spin were discarded, and RT assays (see below) and
protein assays (37) were run on the pellets.
Reverse transcriptase assav
The final pellets (above) were treated with a detergent
buffer (50 mM Tris-HCl, 5 mM KC1, 0.2 mM EDTA. and
0.02% Triton X-100, pH 8.2). Fifteen-microliter aliquots of
this digest were added last to 50 /xl of buffer (100 mM
Tris-HCl, 200 mM KC1. 10 mM MgCl 2 , pH 8.2), ft /xl 100
mM DTT, 9.75 LI! 100 mM thymidine triphosphate (TTP),
1.25 /xl RNA-guard (Pharmacia), 1.0 /xl poly(rA)-p(dT)
(Pharmacia), and 10 /xCi of 32 P-TTP (ICN, 10 /xCi//xl). The
final volume was adjusted to 100 /xl with buffer, as neces-
sary, to compensate for 12 P half life. This solution was
mixed and incubated at 37C for 65 min on a shaker table.
The reaction was terminated by adding 30 /xl of 10 mM
EDTA in 5% TCA and placing the reaction mixture on ice
for 20 min. DN A was then precipitated by the addition of 9
/xl of 72% TCA, and the precipitate was pelleted by cen-
trifugation at 6610 X g for 10 min. The pellet was washed
three times in 5% TCA, the final pellet dissolved in 0.1 N
NaOH. and the radioactivity determined by scintillation
counting. The protein concentration of a separate aliquot
was determined, and RT activity was expressed as counts
per minute per microgram (cpm//xg) protein (38).
Electron microscopy
Small pieces of tissue were prepared for microscopy by
fixation in 2% glutaraldehyde in 0.15 M cacodylate-0.58 M
sucrose buffer (pH 7.3) at 900 mosm. The tissue pieces were
post-fixed in 1 .0% OsO 4 in the same buffer followed by
2.0% aqueous uranyl acetate. The fixed tissue was dehy-
drated in an ethanol series, infiltrated with propylene oxide,
and embedded in Spurr's medium. Silver sections were cut
with an ultramicrotome (Reichert), mounted on 75 X 300
mesh copper grids, and stained with uranyl acetate and lead
citrate. The sections were viewed and photographed with a
transmission electron microscope (Zeiss EM 10).
Acknowledgments
This work was supported by an NSF grant to SKP and
MER. We thank Margaret Palmer, Ulrich Mueller, and
Jeffery DeStefano for critically reading early versions of
6
S. K. PIERCE ET AL
this paper. Contribution #91 from the Laboratory of Bio-
logical Infrastructure.
Literature Cited
1
D'Amico, V., J. S. Elkington. G. Dwyer, R. B. Willis, and M. E.
Montgomery. 1998. Foliage damage does not affect within-season
transmission of an insect virus. Ecology 79: 1 104-1 1 10.
2. Hawkins, B. A., H. V. Cornell, and M. E. Hochburg. 1997. Pred-
ators. parasitoids and pathogens as mortality agents in phytophagous
insect populations. Ecology 78: 2145-2152.
3. Kohler, S. L., and M. L. Wiley. 1997. Pathogen outbreaks reveal
large-scale effects of competition in stream communities. Ecology 78:
2164-2176.
4. Rothman. L. D. 1997. Immediate and delayed effects of a viral
pathogen and density on tent caterpillar performance. Ecology 78:
1481-1493.
5. West, H. H. 1979. Chloroplast symbiosis and development of the
ascoglossan opisthohranch Elysia ch/ororicu. Ph.D. dissertation.
Northeastern University, Boston. 161 pp.
6. West, H. H., J. F. Harrigan, and S. K. Pierce. 1984. Hybridization
of two populations of a marine opisthohranch with different develop-
mental patterns. Veli^er 26: 199-206.
7. Hinde, R., and D. C. Smith. 1974. "Chloroplast symbiosis" and the
extent to which it occurs in Sacoglossa (Gastropoda: Mollusca). Biol.
J. Linn. Soc. 6: 349-356.
8. Clark. K. B., and M. Busacca. 1978. Feeding specificity and chlo-
roplast retention in four tropical Ascoglossa. with a discussion of the
extent of Chloroplast symbiosis and the evolution of the order. J.
Molluxcan Stud. 44: 272-282.
9. Clark, K. B., K. R. Jensen, and H. M. Strits. 1990. Survey for
functional kleptoplasty among West Atlantic Ascoglossa (= Saco-
glossa) (Mollusca: Opisthobranchia). Veliger 33: 339-345.
Clark. K. B., K. R. Jensen, H. M. Strits, and C. Fermin. 1991.
Chloroplast symbiosis in a non-elysiid mollusc, Costasicl/a lilianac
Marcus (Hermaeidae: Ascoglossa (=Sacoglossa): effects of tempera-
ture, light intensity and starvation on carbon fixation rate. Biol. Bull.
160: 43-54.
Taylor, D. L. 1970. Chloroplasts as symbiotic organelles. Int. Re\:
Cytol. 27: 29-64.
Gilyarov, M. S. 1983. Appropriation of functioning organelles of
food organisms by phytophagous and predatory opisthohranch mol-
lusks as a specific category of food utilization. Zli. Ohxlich. Binl. 44:
614-620.
13. Waugh, G. R., and K. B. Clark. 1986. Seasonal and geographic
variation in chlorophyll level of Elysia tuca (Ascoglossa: Opistho-
branchia). Mar. Biol. 92: 483-488.
14. Greene, R. W. 1970. Symbiosis in sacoglossan opisthobranchs:
functional capacity of symbiotic chloroplasts. Mar. Biol. 7: 138-142.
15. Greene, R. W., and L. Muscatine. 1972. Symbiosis in sacoglossan
opisthobranchs: photosyntheUc products of animal-chloroplast associ-
ations. Mar. Biol. 14: 253-259.
16 Graves, D. A., M. A. Gibson, and J. S. Bleakney. 1979. The
digestive diverticula of Alderia inmlexiu and Elysia clilorotica. Veliger
21: 415-422.
17. Trench, R. K. 1969. Chloroplasts as functional endosymbionts in
the mollusc Tridachiu crispalu (Bcrgh), (Opisthobranchia, Saco-
glossa). Nature 222: 1071-1072.
IX Trench, M. E., R. K. Trench, and L. Muscatine. 1970. Utilization
ol photosynthetic products of symbiotic chloroplasts in mucous syn-
10.
11
12.
thesis by Placobranchus iantlmharixiis (Gould). Opisthobranchia,
Sacoglossa. Comp. Biochem. Physio/. 37: 113-117.
19. Greene, R. W. 1970. Symbiosis in sacoglossan opisthobranchs:
translocation of photosynthetic products from Chloroplast to host tis-
sue. Malacologia 10: 360-380.
20. Trench, R. K., J. E. Boyle, and D. C. Smith. 1973. The association
between chloroplasts of Codium fragile and the mollusc, Elysia viridis
II. Chloroplast ultrastructure and photosynthetic carbon fixation in .
)////,(. Proc. R. Soc Land. B 184: 63-81.
21. Trench, R. K. 1975. Of "Leaves That Crawl": functional chloro-
plasts in animal cells. Soc. Exp. Biol. Cambridge Svmp. 29: 229-266.
22 Greenberg, B. M., V. Gaba, O. Cananni, S. Malkin, A. T. Matoo,
and M. Edelman. 1989. Separate photosensitizers mediate degrada-
tion of the 32 kDa photosystem II reaction center protein in the visible
Lind UV spectral regions. Proc. Nail. Acad. Sci. USA 86: 6617-6620.
23. Matoo, A. K., J. B. Marder, and M. Edelman. 1989. Dynamics of
the photosystem II reaction center. Cell 56: 241-246.
24. Barber. J., and B. Andersson. 1992. Too much of a good thing:
Light can be bad for photosynthesis. Trends Biochem. Sci. 17: 61-66.
25 Berry-Lowe, S. L., and G. W. Schmidt. 1991. Chloroplast protein
transport. Pp. 257-302 in The Molecular Biology of Plastids: Cell
Culture and Somatic Cell Genetics of Plants Vol. 7A. L. Bogorad and
I. K. Vasil, eds. Academic Press, New York.
26. Pierce, S. K., R. W. Biron, and M. E. Rumpho. 1996. Endosym-
biotic chloroplasts in molluscan cells contain proteins synthesized after
plastid capture. J. v/. Biol. 199: 2323-2330.
27. Mujer, C. V., D. L. Andrews, J. R. Manhart, S. K. Pierce, and
M. E. Rumpho. 1996. Chloroplast genes are expressed during in-
tracellular symbiotic association of Vaucheriu litorea plastids with the
sea slug Elysiii clilorotica. Proc. Nail. Acad. Sci. USA 93: 12333-
12338.
28. Green, Brian J., W-y Li, J. R. Manhart, T. C. Fox, R. A. Kennedy,
S. K. Pierce, and M. E. Rumpho. 1999. Mollusc-algal chloroplast
endosymbiosis: chloroplast gene expression, thylakoid protein main-
tenance and synthesis, and photosynthetic activity continue for many
months in the absence of the algal nucleus. Plant Phvsiol. (in press).
29. Maugel, T. K.. and S. K. Pierce. 1994. Is the life cycle of Elysia
clilorotica ended by disease? Proc. 52nd Ann. Meeting Microsc. Soc.
Am. 266-267.
30. Murphy, F. A., C. M. Fauquet, D. H. L. Bishop, S. A. Ghabrial,
A. W. Jarvis, G. P. Martelli, M. A. Mayo, and M. D. Summers.
1995. Virus taxonomy. Arch. Vim/. Suppl. 10, 586 pp.
31. Goto, T.. M. Nakai, and K. Ikuta. 1998. The life-cycle of human
immunodeficiency virus type 1. Micron 29: 123-138.
32. Baker, T. S., S. W. Suh, and D. Eisenberg. 1977. Structure of
ribulose- 1 ,5-bisphosphate carboxylase-oxygenase: Form III crystals.
Proc. Nail. Acad. Sci. USA 74: 1037-1041.
33. Shumway, L. K., T. E. Weier, and C. R. Stocking. 1967. Crystal-
line structures in Vicia faba chloroplasts. Plaiita 76: 182-189.
34 Francki. R. I. B., R. G. Milne, and T. Hatta. 1985. Atlas of Plant
Virusex. Vol. I and II. CRC Press. Boca Raton. FL.
35. Pennisi, E. 1999. Is it time to uproot the tree of life? Science 284:
1305-1307.
36. Sikorski, R., and R. Peters. 1998. Treating with HIV. Science 282:
1438.
37. Peterson, G. L. 1977. A simplification of the protein assay method
ot Lowry. ft ai. which is more generally applicable. Anal. Biochem.
83: 346-356.
38. Adolph, K. W. 1996. Viral Ccnomc Methods. CRC Press, Boca
Raton, FL. p. 122.
Reference: Bio/. Bull. 197: 7-10. (August 1999)
Mechanical Resistance to Shear Stress: The Role of
Echinoderm Egg Extracellular Layers
FLORENCE I. M. THOMAS 1 ' 2 '* f , KRISTEN A. EDWARDS 1 2 , TOBY F. BOLTON 1 ' 2 '*,
MARY A. SEWELL\ AND JILL M. ZANDE 1
1 The Marine Environmental Sciences Consortium, Dauphin Island Sea Lab. Dauphin Island. Alabama:
2 The Department of Marine Sciences. The University of South Alabama. Mobile. Alabama: and
3 The Department of Biology, University of Southern California. Los Angeles. California
Extracellular layers (jelly coats) on echinodenn eggs are
composed of a fibrous network imbedded in a gelatinous
material. This type of fibrous net\vork has the potential to
protect eggs from mechanical stress. To determine the ef-
fects of shear stress and the role of jelly coats in protecting
eggs from these stresses, eggs of the sea urchin Ly (echinus
variegatus, both with and without intact jelly coats, were
exposed to shear stresses ranging from 0.3 to 2 Pa in a cone
and plate viscometer. The percentage of eggs remaining
intact after exposure to the shear stress was assessed. The
results indicate that shear stress can damage eggs and that
jellv coats ma\ play a role in decreasing the effects of these
stresses. Eggs with jell\ coats remained intact and fertili'-
able at greater shear stresses than those with the coats
removed. This is the first evidence that extracellular layers
on invertebrate eggs can provide protection from mechan-
ical forces.
In free-spawning invertebrates, the eggs and sperm, hav-
ing passed through a gonoduct and gonopore, are released
directly into the water column. During the spawning pro-
cess, gametes are exposed to shear stresses (force per area)
in the gonoduct and in the external environment. If gametes
are harmed by shear stress before fertilization, irreversible
damage will effectively lower the probability of fertilization
by decreasing the number of viable gametes in a volume of
seawater. Moreover, if gametes are damaged by shear stress,
they may survive and be fertilized, but the resultant embryos
may not develop normally. Therefore, the number of larvae
Received 16 April 1998; accepted 2 June 1999.
* Present address: Department of Biology, University of South Florida.
Tampa. Florida 33620-5 1 50
+ To whom correspondence should be addressed. E-mail: fthomas@
chuma 1 .cas.usf.edu
produced by a given number of eggs may be reduced by
exposure to shear stress.
Eggs are first exposed to shear stresses as they traverse
the gonoduct on their way to the gonopore. As fluid moves
down a tube such as the oviduct, a shear gradient develops
in the fluid and imposes a shear stress on the fluid and eggs
within the duct. Estimates of shear stresses in the oviduct of
one species of sea urchin, Arbacia punctulata, ranged from
near zero at the center of the duct to over 41 Pa near the wall
of the duct ( 1 ). This magnitude of shear stress exceeds that
estimated to occur in the external environment (2), where
gametes meet their second challenge from shear stress after
they are released from the gonopore. After eggs are re-
leased, they encounter shear stress produced by the interac-
tion of eddies within the water column or within the mo-
mentum boundary layer at the surface of the spawning adult.
The effects of such shear stress on fertilization and devel-
opment have only recently been addressed in a hydrody-
namic study of fertilization in the purple sea urchin Strongy-
locentrotus purpuratits (2). High shear stress produced
experimentally in a Couette cell resulted in low fertilization
success and abnormal embryo development. Mead and
Denny (2) postulate that high shear stress, as produced in
turbulent environments, might reduce the encounter rates of
gametes during fertilization, decrease the ability of sperm to
remain attached to the egg after contact, and damage eggs
prior to fertilization and embryos after fertilization.
Given the two sources of shear stress that eggs experience
prior to fertilization, it is possible that there has been selec-
tion for egg properties that could reduce the damage caused
by these stresses. This idea is supported by the fact that at
least one property of echinoid eggs, their viscosity, is pos-
itively correlated to wave exposure in three species (3). One
F. I. M. THOMAS ET AL.
10C
1.0 1.5
Shear Stress (Pa)
Figure 1. Percentage of Lylechinus variegatus eggs remaining intact
after exposure to shear stresses. Sea urchins were collected from St.
Joseph's Bay. Florida, transported to the Dauphin Island Sea Lab, Ala-
bama, and maintained in laboratory aquaria. Additional animals were
obtained from the Carolina Biological Supply Company. Urchins were
maintained in seawater collected from St. Joseph Bay (salinity 29-30 ppt).
aerated continuously, and fed either spinach or lettuce. We obtained eggs
by injecting urchins with 0.5 M KC1. Eggs were used immediately after
spawning. Paired samples of eggs with and without jelly coats from each
of five females were prepared by removing the jelly coats from half of the
eggs collected from a female. The coats were removed using a technique
commonly employed in embryology (19). Eggs were poured through a
plankton screen (Nytex) with 202-;u.m-diameter pores. To determine
whether the jelly coats had been removed from these eggs, a 200- /xl aliquot
was pipetted onto a depression slide and Sunn ink was used to visualize the
edges of the jelly coats under a compound microscope at 100 x magnifi-
cation (20). To minimize the probability of damaging the eggs by subject-
ing them to unnecessary passes through the plankton screen, the eggs were
checked for the presence of jelly coats after every two pours.
To assess the effects of shear stress and the potential effect of jelly coats
on egg survival, eggs were exposed to a range of shear stresses in a cone
and plate viscometer (Brookfield Digital Viscometer, DV-II) attached to a
constant temperature bath (Neslab RTE-8). Shear stress was changed by
adjusting the shear rate and the viscosity of the fluid (/j.). The viscosity was
altered by adding hydroxyethyl cellulose (Proto-slo) to filtered seawater.
Eight viscous fluids were tested: KY jelly (chlorhexidine gluconate);
hydroxyethyl cellulose; polyvinylpyrrolidone; polyvinylpolypyrrohdonc;
Percoll; methylcellulose; Dextran; and egg homogentate. Two criteria were
used to select a fluid: (1) after exposure to the fluid, eggs both with and
without jelly coats remained viable; and (2) no cell leakage was detected
with visual inspection. Hydroxyethyl cellulose was the only fluid that met
both criteria, so it was chosen for use in the experiment. Experiments at
shear stresses up to 1 .5 Pa were also conducted in seawater only, and the
results indicated that use of the hydroxyethyl cellulose could not account
for all of the egg loss.
A known number of eggs in 0.5 ml filtered seawater were exposed to a
given shear stress for 2 min. The shear stress significantly affected the
survival of eggs with (open circles: arcsine % intact = 1.57-0.07* shear
stress, r = 0.48, P < 0.001; 95% confidence limits for the slope are 0.04
to 0.10) and without jelly coats (closed circles: arcsine % intact = 1.53-
0.28* shear stress, r = 0.91. P < l/.OOOl, 95% confidence limits for the
slope are 0.24 to 0.32). For those with icily coats, there was little effect of
shear stress: percent survival ranged from 100% to 96.7% over the entire
range of shear stresses. For those without jelly coats, the effect of shear
stress was more apparent: percent survival ranged from 100% to 82.0%.
property of eggs that has the potential to decrease the effects
of shear stress is the extracellular layer, or jelly coat, that
encapsulates the eggs of echinoderms (4). These coats are
composed of a fibrous network imbedded in globular gly-
coprotein (5) and can account for a significant portion of the
maternal energy invested in an egg (Bolton and Thomas,
unpubl. data). Jelly coats are described for both echinoids
and asteroids and consist of several concentric layers of
complex fibrous networks (5-10) that are reminiscent of
engineering materials designed to withstand shear stresses
(11, 12). Although the jelly coat in echinoderms is involved
in many parts of the fertilization process (13-18), it seems
unlikely that this complex network is required for any of
these functions. Thus it is possible that the structure of jelly
coats plays a role in protecting eggs from shear stresses
experienced in the external environment after spawning, in
the oviduct during spawning, or both. The purpose of the
research presented here is to explore whether jelly coats can
provide this protection in the sea urchin Lytecliinus varie-
gatus.
To examine the potential role of jelly coats in resisting
shear stress, we exposed eggs with and without jelly coats to
shear stresses in a cone and plate viscometer and determined
the percentage of those eggs that remained intact and fer-
tilizable. A greater percentage of eggs with jelly coats
remained intact after exposure to shear stress than did those
with jelly coats removed (Fig. 1. Table I). A test for homo-
geneity of slopes indicated that shear stress affected eggs
with jelly coats differently than eggs with coats removed.
Eggs with jelly coats suffered a maximum loss of less than
4% as shear stresses approached 2 Pa. No eggs were dam-
aged until shear stresses in excess of 1.7 Pa were reached.
For eggs without jelly coats, damage occurred at lower
shear stresses than for those with coats, and maximum loss
reached nearly 20% as shear stress approached 2 Pa.
The fertilization success of eggs exposed to shear de-
creased with increasing shear stress both for eggs with jelly
coats and for those without (Fig. 2). For both egg types,
fertilization success was near 85% with no shear (the de-
Table I
Effect of shear stress on percentage of eggs remaining intuci
Source F P
With/without coats (same intercepts) 1.99 0.165
Shear stress (slope = 0) 0.20 <0.001
Interaction (same slopes) 0.75 <0.001
Results from a test for homogeneity of slopes (1 degree of freedom I
performed on the arcsine-transfonned percentage of eggs intact after ex-
posure to shear stress versus the magnitude of shear stress for eggs with
and without jelly coats. There was a significant effect of shear stress on
eggs remaining intact (slope is significantly different from 0). Eggs with
and without jelly coats were affected by shear stress to a different degree
(significant interaction between shear stress and jelly coat presence).
STRESS RESISTANCE IN SEA URCHIN EGGS
sired initial fertilization success). As shear increased, fertil-
ization success dropped from 85% to 68% for eggs with
coats and from 85% to 59% for eggs without coats. A test
for homogeneity of slopes indicated that the shear stress
affected fertilization differently for eggs without intact coats
than for those with coats present (Fig. 2. Table II). The slope
of the regression of fertilization versus shear stress was
steeper for eggs with jelly coats removed than for those with
intact coats (Fig. 2). After fertilization, developing embryos
were assessed for developmental stage and normal devel-
opment up to the pleuteus stage. Development was assessed
throughout this period. All fertilized eggs, regardless of
80-1
75-
70
a
I 65
60-
55
Tank II
Effect oj shear stress on fertilization
50
0.0
0.5
1.0 1.5
Shear Stress (Pa)
2.0
I
2.5
Figure 2. Percentage of eggs successfully fertilized after exposure to
shear stress. The fertilizability of eggs with and without intact jelly coats
was determined after eggs were exposed to a given shear for 2 nun
Gametes for all experiments were obtained by injecting urchins with 0.5 M
KCl. Females were allowed to spawn into filtered seawater; males spawned
into a dry petri dish. Sperm were stored undiluted in a scintillation vial over
ice until being used in the experiments. Eggs were used immediately after
spawning and sperm within I h after spawning. The concentration of sperm
yielding 80%-85% successful fertilization (I0 4 dilution of dry spawned
sperm in seawater) was determined from serial dilution experiments. We
used this sperm dilution in all fertilization experiments to ensure that any
fertilization decrease caused by egg damage would not be concealed by an
overabundance of sperm (2). After exposure to shear, the eggs were added
to 100 ml of seawater with the sperm solution. Un-sheared eggs were also
fertilized as a control. A sample of approximately 60-100 eggs was
examined for fertilization success. Fertilization was assessed at the four-
cell stage of development, and normal development was determined after
embryos reached the early pluteus stage.
There was a negative relationship between fertilization success and
exposure to shear stress, both for eggs with jelly coats (open circles: arcsine
% fertilized = 0.92-0.07* shear stress, r = 0.88, P < 0.001. 95%
confidence limits for the slope are -0.04 to -0.09) and for those without
(closed circles: arcsine % fertilized = 0.87-0.1 1* shear stress, r = 0.90.
P < 0.001. 95% confidence limits for the slope are -0.08 to -0.15). Only
eggs exposed to shear in the viscometer were used in these analyses.
Results of a test for homogeneity of slopes indicates that shear stress
affects fertilization success of eggs with jelly coats less than that of those
without jelly coats (Table II).
Source
F
P
With/without coats (same intercepts)
2.6
0.13
Shear stress (slope = 0)
0.001
<0.001
Interaction (same slopes)
5,90
0.032
Results from a test for homogeneity of slopes (1 degree of freedom)
performed on the arcsme-transformed percentage of eggs fertilized after
exposure to shear stress versus the magnitude of shear stress for eggs with
and without jelly coats. There was a significant effect of shear stress on
fertilization (slope is significantly different from 0). Eggs with and without
jelly coats were affected by shear stress to a different degree (significant
interaction between shear stress and jelly coat presence).
whether they had jelly coats or not. developed normally.
This result indicates that if eggs are damaged by shear stress
they are not fertilizable, but if they survive they apparently
have not sustained any damage that limits normal develop-
ment.
The results of these experiments indicate that eggs can be
damaged by shear stress and that the jelly coats on echino-
derm eggs can provide mechanical strength, reducing the
negative effects of shear stress on free-spawned eggs. If
jelly coats are absent, survivorship (Fig. 1) and fertilization
success (Fig. 2) are significantly less than when coats are
present.
The shear regime experienced in the viscometer most
closely approximates that seen in the gonoduct. The exper-
imental shear is unidirectional, constant, and well within the
range estimated to occur in the gonoduct during spawning
( 1 ). In contrast, the shear stresses imposed in the external
environment not only are lower (2) than those used in these
experiments, but are not constant and are unlikely to be
unidirectional for sustained periods of time. Thus, the data
presented here indicate strongly that eggs are susceptible to
shear stress and can be damaged at stress levels in the range
experienced during egg release. Therefore, the data show
that jelly coats on echinoderm eggs do protect eggs from
damage caused by shear stress. This result is significant
because it is the first evidence that extracellular layers on
invertebrate eggs can protect eggs from physical stress and
may provide mechanical strength to eggs.
Acknowledgments
Research support was provided by a National Science
Foundation (NSF) grant (IBN-9723770) and an NSF
PECASE award to F. I. M. Thomas (OCE-9701434). Kris-
ten Edwards initiated the research while participating in a
research experience for undergraduate program funded by a
NSF Grantto Judy Stout (REU. OCE-9619862). We also
thank three anonymous reviewers for helpful suggestions.
This is DISL contribution 309.
10
F. I. M. THOMAS ET AL
Literature Cited
1. Thomas, F. I. M., and T. F. Bolton. In Press. Shear stress expe-
rienced by echinoderm eggs in the oviduct during spawning: potential
role in the evolution of egg properties. / Exp. Biol.
2. Mead, K. S., and M. W. Dennv. 199S. The effects of hydrodynamic
shear stress on fertilization and early development of the purple sea
urchin Strongylocentrotus purpuratus. Biol. Bull 188: 46-56.
3. Thomas, F. I. M. 1994. Physical properties of gametes in three sea
urchin species. J. .171. Biol. 194: 263-2X4.
4. Hoshi. M. 1985. Lysins. Pp. 431-462 in Biology of Fertilisation.
Vol. 2. C. B, Metz and A. Monroy. eds. Academic Press. Orlando. FL.
5. Bonnell. B. S., S. H. Keller, V. D. Vacquier, and D. E. Chandler.
1994. The sea urchin jelly coat consists of globular glycoproteins
hound to a fibrous fucan superstructure. Dev. Biol. 162: 313-324.
6. Kidd. P. 1978. The jelly and vitelline coats of the sea urchin egg:
new ultrastructural features. J. Ultrasln/ct. Res. 64: 204-215.
7. Holland, N. D. 1980. Electron microscopic study of the cortical
reaction in eggs of the starfish (Paririti minima). Cell Tissue Res. 205:
67-76.
8. Crawford, B., and M. Abed. 1986. Ultrastructural aspects of the
surface coatings of eggs and larvae of the starfish. Pisaster ochraceus,
revealed by Alcian Blue. J. Morpliol. 187: 29-37.
9. Sousa, M., R. Pinto, P. Moradas-Ferreira, and C. Azevedo. 1993.
Histochemical studies of jelly coat of Marthasterias glacialis (Echi-
nodermata, Asteroidea) oocytes. Biol. Bull. 185: 215-224.
10. Bonnell, B. S., C. Larahell, and D. E. Chandler. 1993. The sea
urchin egg jelly coat is a three-dimensional fibrous network as seen by
intermediate voltage electron microscopy and deep etching analysis.
Mol Reprod. Dev. 35(2): 181-188.
11. Sastry, A. M., S. L. Phoenix, and P. Schwartz. 1993. Analysis of
mterfacial failure in a composite microbundle pull-out experiment.
Composite Sciences and Technology. 48: 237-251.
12. Sastry, A. M., X. Cheng, and C. W. Wang. 1998. Mechanics of
stochastic fibrous networks. J. Thermoplastic Composite Materials.
Vol. II. 288-296.
13. Vaquier, V. D., and G. W. Moy. 1977. Isolation of bindin: the
protein responsible for adhesion of sperm to sea urchin eggs. Proc.
Null. Aciul. Sci. USA 74: 2456-2460.
14 Tilney, L. G., D. P. Kiehart, C. Sardet, and M. Tilney. 1978.
Polymerization of actin IV. Role of Ca2* and H + in the assembly of
actin and in membrane fusion in the acrosomal reaction of echinoderm
sperm. / Cell Biol. 77: 536-550.
15 SeGall, G. K., and W.J. Lennarz. 1981. Jelly coat and induction of
the acrosome reaction in echinoid sperm. Dev. Biol. 86: 87-93.
16. Garbers, D. L., and G. S. Kopf. 1980. The regulation of spermata-
zoa by calcium and cyclic nucleotides. Adv. Cyclic Nucleotide Res. 13:
251-306.
17. Nomura, K., and S. Isaka. 1985. Synthetic study of the structure-
activity relationship of sperm-activating peptides from the jelly coat of
sea urchin eggs. Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 126: 974-982.
18. Miller, R. L. 1985. Sperm chemo-orientation in the Metazoa. Pp.
276-337 in Biology of Fertilization. Vol. 2. C. B. Metz and A.
Monroy. eds. Academic Press, Orlando. FL.
19. Hinegardner, R. 1975. Care and handling of sea urchin eggs, em-
bryos, and adults (principally North American species). Pp. 10 U in
The Sea Urchin Embryo Biochemistry and Morphogenesis. G. Czi-
hak, ed. Springer- Verlag. New York.
20. Strathmann, M. F. 1987. Reproduction and Development of Marine
Invertebrates of the Northern Pacific Coast. University of Washington
Press, Seattle. 670 pp.
Reference: Biol. Bull. 197: I 1-13. (August 1999)
Regeneration of Amputated Avian Bone by a Coral
Skeletal Implant
B. RINKEVICH 1 , S. BEN-YAKIR 2 , AND R. BEN-YAKIR 2
' National Institute of Oceanography, Tel Shikmona, P.O.B. 8030, Haifa 31080, Israel: and
2 Hod-Hasharon Veterinan< Clinic, 17 Gordon Street, Hod Hasttaron, Israel
Bone fractures are common in both wild and captive
birds (I, 2). Avian bones are thin and brittle and tend to
break into fragments or shatter upon a variety of natural
events (midair collisions, fights with other animals; ref. 2)
or anthropogenic experiences (wounding by gunfire, colli-
sions with cars or fences, encounters with traps, attacks by
dogs or cats, etc.; ref. 1). The prospect of full recovery
following repair of avion bone fracture is often poor, and
the complication rate is high (3). For wild birds, anything
less than complete normal function cannot be regarded as
successful, and slight malunion or a change in a few de-
grees of rotation can produce a severe loss of flight function
(4). Furthermore, in nomadic species, time is critical be-
cause long periods of rehabilitation may prevent the birds
from reuniting with their flocks. In experiments with implan-
tation of fragments of skeleton from the coral Stylophora
pistillata, we found the implants to be avion osteo-conduc-
tive biomaterial, acting as a scaffold for a direct osteoblas-
tic deposition. In the case study presented here, the bird
regained complete flight activity within 2 weeks after sur-
gery, with full regeneration of the amputated ulna.
The general principles for treating fractures in birds are
similar to those established for mammals and include rigid
stabilization (primary bone healing does not occur if there is
a gap or motion at the fracture site; ref. 4). However,
treatment such as external coaptation (slings, bandages,
casts, splints, etc.), intramedullary pins or rods, bone plate
fixation, or modifications of any of the traditional means of
external skeleton fixation (3-5) not only fails for rehabili-
tating wild birds, but also involves prolonged hospitaliza-
tion of avian patients. Internal fixation is one of the best
procedures for fracture management, but the brittle nature of
Received 26 January 1999; accepted 23 April 1999.
E-mail: buki@ocean.org. il
avian bones (3-5) results in problems that are not encoun-
tered in mammals.
We recently investigated the use of coral skeleton as a
natural intramedullary fixation device for fractures of bird
bone and found that fractured avian bones can be rehabili-
tated following the internal implantation of coral skeletal
pins (unpubl. data). This investigation was based on studies
with mammals (including humans) documenting that coral
skeletons may be employed as osseous substitutes, as scaf-
folds for direct osteoblastic application, or as an artificial
bone filler for repairing bone defects (6, 7). The coral tested
here was of the branching species Stylophora pistillata, one
of the most abundant coral species in the Gulf of Eilat (8).
Mature domestic pigeons (Colmnba Hvia domestica)
were randomly assigned to a variety of treatment groups (in
preparation). For all radiographic and surgical procedures,
the birds were given Halothane as a general anesthetic. The
skin was prepared for aseptic surgery using a septal scrub
followed by a povidone-iodine wash. Whenever possible,
flight feathers were not removed or clipped; others were
plucked over the intended incision. Reflexes and cardiac and
respiratory activities were monitored. Birds were placed on
their backs and a limited ventral approach to the ulna was
performed. Two of the same bones from the wings of two
birds were used as experimental and control bones (ban-
daged in the traditional manner; ref. 5). Small processed
coral pins were obtained from SagivCoral, P.O. Box 3337,
Ramot Hashavim 45930, Israel. Postoperative radiographs
were taken to evaluate fracture repair and to document the
status of the coral implant. Pigeons were housed in the
flypen system and fed with a commercial pigeon food
supplemented with vitamin D and oyster shell as a calcium
source.
In one of the experiments, which is detailed in this
communication, the proximal half of the ulna (which pro-
11
B. RINKEVICH ET AL
Figure 1. Progressive repair of ulna fracture treated hy implantation of an intramedullary coral pin (a-e),
compared to control, an untreated amputated ulna (fl. Weeks after operation: a = 2. h = 4, c = 6, d = 8, e, f =
12.
vides primary support for the wing) was accidentally com-
minuted during surgery. Full rehabilitation of this amputa-
tion hone by the use of coral skeleton implant is described
here.
In the case of the accidentally comminuted ulna, all brittle
fragments were immediately removed and a small coral pin
(24 mm length. 4 mm diameter) was first passed distally and
then retrogradely until resistance was met at the proximal
side of the ulna. The coral pin was then firmly wedged in
place, forming an inert calcium carbonate milieu between
the two separated parts, replacing the amputated portion of
the ulna. This pigeon used the treated wing freely 14 days
after the operation, alleviating ankylosis resulting from joint
immobilization. In the control bird, the entire segment of
proximal ulnar bone (cortex and medulla) was removed
using Gilgi wire.
Two weeks after the operation, the coral pin was encap-
sulated firmly at both ends by overgrown calcium deposits
and callus formation along the pin shall, providing rota-
tional stability (Fig. la). After 4 weeks (Fig. Ib). the coral
implant was already overgrown by deposited material. By 6
weeks (Fig. Ic), deposited material surrounded the implant
in layers and the first sign of coral resorption was evident.
During resorption. which was significantly advanced at 8
and 12 weeks (Fig. Id, e), radiography showed that the area
between the two ends of the broken ulna was being filled
with accumulated new bone, replacing the degradable pin.
Sft'liiplwni pistillntti skeleton (although its mechanical and
biological properties were not yet evaluated) was thus found
to be avian osteo-conductive biomaterial, acting as a scaf-
fold for direct osteoblastic deposition. The bird regained full
flight activities 2 weeks after surgery, and the coral pin
activated skeletal regeneration (compare with the control;
Fig. If). This process ended in complete regeneration of the
amputated area.
This case of regeneration of an amputated bone and our
study (in prep.) demonstrate the value of coral skeletal
implants for avian bone repair. Coral material (calcium
carbonate) is well tolerated by bird tissue. The pin matrix is
porous enough to be colonized by the birds' bony cells, is
biodegradable, and is easily adjustable in size and shape to
the osseous site of grafting. Previous studies employing
coral implants for bone repair in mammals have shown that
coral resorption rates varied with porosity of the coral
CORAL IMPLANTS IN AVIAN FRACTURES
13
species used and with host reaction (9). We used natural
fragments of 5. pistillata skeletons, the first pocilloporid
coral used in vertebrate skeleton rehabilitation. Each year,
around the globe, veterinarians tend an ever-increasing
number of wild and domestic birds with broken bones;
unfortunately, at present the prognosis for many of these
birds is poor. The approach described here may provide a
fast and dependable method for rehabilitation of avian frac-
tures, increasing the survival rate of birds treated for bone
injuries.
Acknowledgments
This study was supported by the Minerva Center for
Marine Invertebrate Immunology and Developmental Biol-
ogy. Animal surgeries and treatments were conducted in
conformance with the guidelines of the Canadian Council
on Animal Care.
Literature Cited
1. Fix, A. S., and S. Z. Barrows. 1990. Raptors rehabilitated in Iowa
during 1986 and 1987: a retrospective study. J. Wildl. Dis. 26: 18-21.
2. Houston, D. C. 1993. The incidence of healed fractures to wing bones
of White-backed and Ruppell's Griffon Vultures Gyps africaiius and G.
ntt'ppt'tln and other birds. Ibis 135: 468-475.
3. Mathews, K. G., L. J. Wallace, P. T. Redig, J. E. Bechtold, R. R.
Pool, and V. L. King. 1994. Avian fracture healing following stabi-
lization with mtramedullary polyglycolic acid rods and cyanoacrylate
adhesive vs. polypropylene rods and polymethylmethacrylate. Vel.
Comp. Orthop. Trauma 7: 15X-169.
4 Bennett, R. A., and A. B. Kuzma. 1992. Fracture management in
birds. J. Zoo. Wildl Meil. 23: 5-38.
5. MacCoy, D. M. 1992. Treatment of fractures in avian species. Vet.
dm. North Am. Small Aiiini. Pract. 22: 225-238.
6. Kehr, P. H., A. G. Graftiaux, F. Gosset, I. Bogorin, and K. Ben-
cheikh. 1993. Coral as a graft in cervical spine surgery. Ortlmp.
Traumarol. 3: 287-293.
7 Guillemin, G., J-L. Patat, and A. Meunier. 1995. Natural corals
used as bone graft substitutes. Bull. lust. Oceanogr. (Monaco) 14:
67-77.
8. Loya, V. 1976. The Red Sea coral Stylophora pistillata is an r
strategist. Nature (Land.) 259: 478-480.
9. Roudier, M., C. Bouchon. J. I.. Rouvillain, J. Amedee, R. Bareille,
F. Rouais, J. Ch. Fricain, B. Dupay, P. Kien, R. Jeandot, and B.
Basse-Cathalinat. 1995. The resorption of bone-implanted corals
varies with porosity but also with the host reaction. J. Biomed. Mater.
Res. 29: 909-915.
Reference: Biol. Bull. 197: 14-25. (August 1999)
Functional and Evolutionary Implications of Opposed
Bands, Big Mouths, and Extensive Oral Ciliation in
Larval Opheliids and Echiurids (Annelida)
BENJAMIN G. MINER 1 , ERIC SANFORD 2 , RICHARD R. STRATHMANN 3 , BRUNO FERNET 3 ,
AND RICHARD B. EMLET 4
1 Department of Zoology, University of Florida, 223 Bartram Hall, Gainesville. Florida 3261 1;
2 Department of Zoology, Cordley Hall 3029, Oregon State University, Corvallis, Oregon 97331;
3 Friday Harbor Laboratories and Department of Zoology, University of Washington, 620 University
Road, Friday Harbor, Washington 98250; and ^Department of Biology and Oregon Institute of
Marine Biology, University of Oregon, P.O. Box 5389, Charleston. Oregon 97420
Abstract. Larvae of two annelids, the opheliid Armandia
brevis and the echiurid Urechis caupo, captured small par-
ticles between opposed prototrochal and metatrochal ciliary
bands and also captured large particles with wide ciliated
mouths. The body volume of larval A. brevis increased more
rapidly than the estimated maximum clearance rate as seg-
ments were added. Capture of larger particles by late-stage
larvae may compensate for this potentially unfavorable al-
lometry. The existence of larvae that use two feeding mech-
anisms at once, not previously known in annelids, suggests
possible evolutionary routes between larval forms that feed
only with opposed bands (e.g., serpulids and oweniids) and
those that use complex oral ciliature to feed primarily on
large particles (e.g.. polynoids and nephtyids). In particular,
the metatroch and food groove of opposed-band feeders
may have arisen as expansions of oral ciliation in ancestral
large-particle feeders; alternatively, extensive oral ciliation
in large-particle feeders may have originated as a modifi-
cation of metatroch and food-groove cilia in ancestral op-
posed-band feeders.
Introduction
The trochophore is a larval form of several phyla: Anne-
lida, Sipuncula, Mollusca. and Entoprocta (Nielsen, 1995).
It is largely denned by the presence of the prototroch, a
preoral ciliary band with a well-defined cell lineage. Despite
Received 16 December 1998; accepted 8 April 1999.
E-mail: miner@zoo.ufl.edu
this and other embryological similarities, trochophores are
structurally and functionally diverse. Much of this diversity
is found among the approximately 70 families of annelids in
which larvae occur. Annelid larvae vary in the number and
position of ciliary bands (though almost all possess a pro-
totroch). and in whether or not they feed. Among annelid
larvae that feed, mechanisms of capturing suspended parti-
cles have been described in only a few species (Strathmann.
1987).
One of these feeding mechanisms involves capturing and
transporting particles with the prototroch and several
postoral ciliary bands. The prototroch beats with an
anterior-to-posterior effective stroke. A postoral band, the
metatroch, parallels the prototroch and beats in opposition
to it, with effective strokes from posterior to anterior. Par-
ticles small enough to tit between the prototroch and
metatroch are captured between these two ciliary bands and
transported to the mouth by a band of shorter cilia, the food
groove. Particle capture by opposed bands has been de-
scribed in larvae of two annelid families, the serpulids and
the oweniids (Strathmann et al.. 1972; Emlet and Strath-
mann, 1994), and larvae of several other families possess
the ciliary bands necessary to feed in this way.
Another feeding mechanism known in annelid larvae
involves active responses to individual food particles. For
example, polynoid larvae lack an opposing metatroch and a
ciliated food groove. These larvae swim forward until they
encounter relatively large particles, then manipulate each
particle individually into the mouth with a tuft of long
compound cilia (Phillips and Pernet, 1996). Larvae belong-
14
ANNELID LARVAL FEEDING MECHANISMS
15
ing to related families (e.g., phyllodocids and nephtyids:
Rouse and Fauchald, 1997) also lack a metatroch and a food
groove (Bhaud and Cazaux. 1987), and are able to capture
particles as large as bivalve larvae, but how they do this is
not known. Additional feeding mechanisms are known or
suspected from larvae of other annelid families (Strath-
mann, 1987; Nielsen, 1998).
The structural and functional variety of trochophores in
annelids and related phyla has raised questions about their
evolution (Strathmann, 1993; McHugh and Rouse, 1998).
There is no consensus as to whether feeding or nonfeeding
larvae are ancestral, or on which feeding mechanisms are
primitive (Strathmann and Eernisse, 1994). Given uncer-
tainties about such key issues as the distribution of traits
among clades, the functional requirements for capturing
particles, and the phylogeny of annelids, inferences about
ancestral character states are weak.
Our study describes ciliation and mechanisms of particle
capture in larvae of two families of annelids, the Opheliidae
and the Echiuridae. We use these observations to compare
the feeding capabilities of different annelid larvae and to
suggest possible evolutionary transitions among annelid lar-
val forms. These data also augment the number of informa-
tive characters available for phylogenetic inferences.
Hermans (1978) showed that larvae of the opheliid Ar-
iminJia brevis possess prototrochal and metatrochal ciliary
bands. Although the feeding mechanism was not described,
these observations suggest that opposed-band feeding may
occur. He also noted that late-stage A. brevis larvae are able
to ingest large particles. A larva with 15 segments had
ingested a tintinnid 80 /im in diameter and a diatom 35 ^m
in diameter and 260 /xm long (Hermans, 1964). This implies
that these larvae were using a different feeding mechanism,
since other work on annelid and mollusc larvae indicates
that opposed-band feeding is limited to particles that fit
between the prototroch and metatroch (typically spaced
<30 /urn apart: Strathmann et ai, 1972; Strathmann and
Leise, 1979).
Thus, limited observations suggested that A. brevis larvae
might use several feeding mechanisms to capture particles
of a broad range of sizes. Alternative mechanisms for the
capture of larger particles by later stage larvae might sup-
plement the opposed-band feeding mechanism. Such versa-
tility might be particularly advantageous to later stage lar-
vae if unfavorable allometric relationships reduce the
profitability of opposed-band feeding as development
progresses. An unfavorable allometry might occur if body
volume and metabolic demands increase more rapidly than
ciliary band area and maximum clearance rates as segments
are added during development. Therefore, in addition to
observing particle captures, we examined the relationship
between clearance rates and body volume.
Echiurids have sometimes been placed in the phylum
Annelida and sometimes in their own phylum, the Echiura,
which is distinguished from the annelids by an apparent lack
of segmentation (Nielsen, 1995). McHugh's (1997) molec-
ular evidence shows that they are derived annelids, and she
suggests that they should be placed in the annelid family
Echiuridae. Larvae of the echiurid Urechis caupo bear pro-
totrochal, metatrochal, and food-groove cilia (Newby, 1940;
Suer, 1982), but how they capture particles has been un-
known. We observed larval feeding in U. caupo to confirm
use of the opposed-band feeding mechanism in the Echi-
uridae; to our surprise, we also obtained evidence that larger
particles are captured at the mouth.
Our observations demonstrate that larvae in the annelid
families Opheliidae and Echiuridae are able to capture par-
ticles both with opposed bands and directly at the mouth.
This previously unrecognized combination of feeding
mechanisms suggests hypotheses for evolutionary transi-
tions among the diverse feeding larval forms of the Anne-
lida.
Materials and Methods
Larval cultures
Reproductive adults of the opheliid Armandia brevis
were collected in April and May 1998 in front of the Friday
Harbor Laboratories. San Juan Island. Washington. Some
animals were taken from beneath cobbles in the mid-inter-
tidal zone and others from the plankton swarming at night to
a light suspended from the laboratory dock. We isolated
adults in finger bowls containing bag-filtered seawater
(mesh size ^ 10 /xm) until gametes were released. Eggs
were fertilized by the addition of sperm and then rinsed with
filtered seawater. Fertilized eggs were placed in 450-ml
beakers that held filtered seawater and were partially sub-
merged in a seawater table at 1 1-13C. Larvae were fed a
mixture of the algae Isochrysis galhana and Chaetoceros
gracilis.
Adults of the echiurid Urechis caupo were dug in inter-
tidal mudflats in Bodega Harbor, California, in June of 1995
and held in aquaria at the Bodega Marine Laboratory for use
throughout the summer. Methods described by Gould
( 1967) were used for obtaining gametes and fertilizing eggs.
We reared larvae in 800-ml beakers cooled in aquaria at 10
to 16C (median 13.3C), approximately the temperature of
the coastal seawater. The seawater was filtered through
meshes of 30 or 70 /urn and larvae were fed the alga
Rhodomonas sp. and occasionally Isochrysis galbana in
addition to whatever food entered with the filtered seawater.
Ciliarv bands
Light microscopy provided information about the cilia-
tion of both opheliid and echiurid larvae. Larvae were
viewed with differential interference contrast (DIG) optics
16
B. G. MINER ET AL
for an optical section through the prototroch, food groove,
and metatroch.
Scanning electron microscopy provided additional infor-
mation about the ciliation ofArmandia brevis. Larvae were
relaxed in a 1:1 mixture of 7.5% MgCl 2 and seawater for 30
min and fixed in 1% OsO 4 in seawater. After a rinse in
seawater, fixed larvae were dehydrated in ethanol. infiltrated
with hexamethyldisilazane for 30 min, and air-dried. They
were mounted on stubs with double-sided tape and sputter-
coated with gold-palladium before viewing.
Analysis of particle capture
To record larval feeding, we used video cameras mounted
on compound and dissecting microscopes. A time-date gen-
erator indicated intervals between video images to the near-
est 0.01 s. Larvae of Armandia brevis were presented with
small and large particles in separate trials, and feeding
activity was recorded at room temperature (22C) onto VHS
tape. We observed capture of small particles by placing
several larvae on a slide with polystyrene-divinylbenzene
spheres (Duke Scientific) of 5 and 12 /xm diameter (one size
per slide), adding a raised coverslip, and viewing the larvae
with a 20 X objective and DIC optics. Larvae that had
tethered themselves with mucous strands and were actively
feeding (indicated by beating of both the prototroch and
metatroch) were videotaped for about 10 min. We observed
capture of large particles by placing larvae in a small petri
dish onto a dissecting microscope and adding Sephadex
beads ranging from 20 to 80 /u,m in diameter. Larvae were
videotaped as they swam and fed.
For Urechis caupo larvae, feeding was observed at 15 to
20C and recorded onto 8-mm tape. Larvae were confined
within the spaces of a nylon mesh placed on a slide topped
with a coverslip; they were free to rotate and change orien-
tation but not to move forward continuously. We presented
the larvae with three types of particles: the dinoflagellate
Prorocentrum micans (length about 20 /xm), polystyrene-
divinylbenzene spheres (diameter 5 to 29 ju,m), and Seph-
adex beads (diameter 20 to 80 ju.ni).
The size of particles captured and ingested by U. caupo
was analyzed by inspecting the gut contents of particle-fed
larvae. Larvae and suspensions of particles of several sizes
were placed in vials that were rotated at 15 rpm. After 5
min, the larvae were fixed with formaldehyde for gut-
content examination.
Scaling of clearance rate and bod\ volume
The relationship of maximum clearance rate to body
volume was estimated for larvae ofArmandia brevix with 6
to 16 setigerous segments. We counted the number of seti-
Figure 1. Scanning electron micrographs of larvae of Armandia brevis. (A) Posterolateral view ol the
anterior end of an IX-setiger larva. The food groove (*) is the region between the long compound cilia of the
prototrochal (p) and melatrochal (m) ciliary bands. The inner surfaces of the mouth (mo) are heavily ciliated. (B)
Ventral view of the anterior end of an 18-seliger larva, showing the long compound cilia of the metatroch (m)
on the lower lip, the prototroch (p). and the .short neurotroch (n). Both photos are to the same scale.
ANNELID LARVAL FEEDING MECHANISMS
17
gers and measured body length (for the entire larva), width
(at the middle segment), and prototroch diameter of live
larvae (n = 36) under a compound microscope with 4X
objective. A video camera and image analysis program
(NIH Image 1.61: available free at http://rsb.info.nih.gov/
nih-image) were used for these measurements. We esti-
mated larval volume as a cylinder by the equation:
larval volume = Tr(D/2) 2 (L)
where D is body width and L is body length.
Maximum clearance rates were estimated as the volume
of water passing through the prototroch per unit of time. To
calculate these rates, we measured particle velocities and
particle distances to the base of the prototroch from video-
taped sequences of three larvae in each of three size classes
(6-7, 11-12, and 15-16 setigers). We observed larvae and
5-;u,m particles on a compound microscope with DIC optics
and 20 X objective lens, as described above. The larvae
tethered themselves by mucous strands and were recorded
for several minutes. The distances traveled by particles per
unit of time and their distances to the base of the prototroch
were measured from videorecorded sequences. Particles
were measured as they passed within the direct influence of
the cilia where velocities are negligibly affected by the slide
or coverslip (Emlet, 1990).
We fitted binomial regressions from the origin through
the plot of particle velocity versus particle distance from the
cilium base. The rationale for fitting curvilinear lines to
these data was both theoretical (Sleigh, 1984) and empirical
(Strathmann and Leise, 1979). The studies in both areas
suggest that velocity should increase from zero near the
larval body surface to a maximum near the full length of the
cilia; it should then decrease beyond the tips of the cilia.
Since these curves included some particles that presumably
passed beyond the tips of the cilia, it was necessary to
estimate the lengths of the cilia for larvae of each of the
three size classes. We measured cilium lengths (15 cilia per
larva) with NIH Image from videotaped, live larvae with
0-17 setigers (n = 22 larvae). The binomial regression
equations relating particle velocity to particle distance from
the cilium base were then integrated from the origin (the
base of the prototroch) to the estimated cilium length for
that size class. The resulting areas represent estimates of the
area of water that, in one unit of time, passes through one
optical section of the prototroch in the plane of ciliary beat.
100|jrn
Figure 2. Light micrographs of larvae of Urecfus caupo. (A) Lateral view with plane of focus through the
prototroch (p), food groove (0. metatroch (m), and telotroch (t). dorsally. Ventrally, the plane of focus passes
through the prototroch (p). mouth (mo), and metatroch (m). The neurotroch is not visible. The dark spot near the
center is a particle in the gut. (B) The same larva when contracted. Both photos are to the same scale.
18
B. G. MINER ET AL
We then estimated maximum clearance rates for each size
class by multiplying that value by the circumference of the
prototroch halfway between the base of the cilium and its tip
(midpoint prototroch circumference). Finally, to determine
whether maximum clearance rate scaled proportionately to
body size during larval growth, we divided the maximum
clearance rate for a given size class by the average body
volume for that size class.
Results
Cilifin hands
Scanning electron micrographs clearly show the pro-
totrochal and metatrochal cilia of Armandia brevis. The
prototroch is made up of several rows of compound cilia
that completely encircle the larval body anterior to the
mouth (Fig. 1). The rnetatroch is a postoral band of
compound cilia that extends laterally from the lower lip
of the mouth around the larval body to a dorsal position
(Fig. 1A). The metatrochal cilia on the lower lip are
longer than the other metatrochal cilia (Fig. 1A. B). The
prototroch and rnetatroch define the boundaries of a cilia-
lined food groove. The width of the food groove lateral to
the mouth was estimated from a scanning electron mi-
crograph to be 10 jam (SEM not shown). Dorsally. the
food groove narrows. The mouth is large (about 50 ju,m
wide in the 18-setiger larva shown in Fig. IB) and both
its upper and lower surfaces are heavily ciliated (Fig. 1 A.
B). A band of neurotrochal cilia runs along the ventral
surface of the larva from just behind the mouth to the
third setigerous segment (Fig. IB).
Larvae of Urechis caupo also possess prototrochal and
metatrochal ciliary bands (Fig. 2). The prototrochal cilia are
longer than the metatrochal cilia. Again, these two ciliary
bands define the boundaries of a food groove lined with
simple cilia. Larvae also bear a midventral neurotroch.
posterior to the mouth, and a telotroch.
0.00
Figure 3. Videorecorded capture of a 5-/xm sphere by opposed hands, and particle rejection by a self-tethered
Armandia brevis larva. Time in seconds is in the upper left-hand comer. All images are at the same magnification. The
larva is oriented with its dorsal side toward the top of the page. The sequence shows a particle, indicated by the black
line, approach the dorsal part of the metatroch where it is captured and then transported along the food groove and
deposited in the mouth. The particle is then rejected. During rejection (he mclatroch on the lower hp ceases to beat.
At s the larva is 120 p.m in diameter at the base of the prototrochal cilia.
ANNELID LARVAL FEEDING MECHANISMS
19
Figure 4. Videorecorded capture of a 13-jum sphere by a Llrccliia cmipo larva. Time is in seconds in the
upper right-hand corner. The particle has entered a dorsolateral part of the food groove at s, moves along the
food groove toward the mouth at 0.2 and 0.4 s, and enters the side of the mouth at 0.55 s. Rotation of the larva
moves the mouth from upper right at s to center at 0.55 s. The anterior end of the larva is toward the upper
left. At s the larva is 175-jum wide al the base of the prototrochal cilia.
Capture h\ opposed ciliary hands
In larvae of Arniandia hrevis and Urechis caitpo. the
movements of partieles and the directions of recovery
strokes of cilia indicated that the effective strokes of the
prototrochal cilia were from anterior to posterior, and those
of the metatrochal cilia were from posterior to anterior. For
larvae of each species, we observed captures of more than
50 particles of 5 and 12 /urn in diameter; particles that came
within reach of the prototroch were transported into the food
groove between the prototroch and metatroch and moved to
the mouth via the food groove, presumably by the food-
groove cilia (Figs. 3-5). Particles were captured between
prototroch and metatroch on the lateral and dorsal surfaces
of the larva. Particles in the food groove moved around to
the mouth from both the left and the right sides and both
with and against the direction of rotation of the larval body.
These particle paths indicate an opposed-band feeding
mechanism.
Capture of large panicles
Larvae of both species also captured particles at the
mouth, without transport in the food groove. A late-stage
larva of A nnandla brevis (with > 14 setigers) captured two
large particles (50 jum in diameter) while videorecorded
through a dissecting microscope (Fig. 6). When the swim-
ming larva contacted a large particle in the vicinity of the
mouth, the larva slowed and rotated so that the lower lip was
aligned with the particle. The larva opened its mouth and
ingested the particle, presumably using oral cilia or muscu-
lature.
Swimming Urechis caitpo larvae used the mouth for
direct capture of particles that passed over the episphere.
Such captures occurred simultaneously with opposed-band
particle captures (Fig. 5). Many of the particles caught
directly by the mouth were too large to fit between opposed
prototroch and metatroch, as illustrated by the gut contents
in Figure 7 and the particles being rejected in Figure 8. In
some cases the mouth gaped to admit a large particle. The
9-day-old larva in Figure 4 opened its mouth to a gape of
about 35 jum with a width of 95 ;j.m. The 17-day-old larva
in Figure 8 opened its mouth to 70 to 95 /urn, and the
mouth's width when closed was about 125 /u,m. Cilia on the
mouth's lower lip (anterior to the shorter cilia of the neu-
rotroch) appeared to aid the movement of large particles
into the mouth. These cilia seemed to be continuous with the
metatrochal band, which would account for the posterior-
0.00
0.13
Figure 5. Videorecorded capture ol l\u> 12-fxm spheres by a Urechis
fiiiil>t> larva. Time is in seconds in the lower right-hand corner. The particle
marked by an adjacent black bar has entered a dorsolateral part of the food
groove at s. moves along the food groove toward the mouth al 0.04 and
0.13 s, and is near the side of the mouth at 0.30 s. The second particle
passes over the prototroch directly into Ihe mouth. It is near the protolro-
chal cilia at s, passes over the anterior edge of the mouth at 0.04 and
0. 1 3 s. and has entered the mouth at 0.30 s. The mouth is at the lower left;
the anterior end toward the upper left. At s the larva is 170-jLim wide at
the base of the prototrochal cilia.
20
B. G. MINER ET AL
0.00
Figure 6. Videorccoided capture of a 50-/nm sphere h\ a tree swimming Anuttndiu hrevis lar\'a under a
dissecting microscope. Time in seconds is in the upper left-hand comer. All images are at the same magnifi-
cation A black line indicates the particle. The larva approaches the particle and then orients its mouth towards
the particle, which is on the bottom of the dish. The particle is captured at the larva's mouth, presumably moved
by the large oral compound cilia, and swallowed. At s the larva is 85-/am wide at the center of the body.
to-anterior current past these cilia. In sonic cases a panicle
was brought into the mouth over the lower lip (Fig. 7).
Larvae of U. cuiipo captured large particles from an early
stage. Small 4-day-old larvae ingested Sephadex spheres
almost as large as those ingested by 16-day-old larvae
(Table I). Even a 3-day-old larva ingested a 42-by-35-|u,m
mineral grain. Larger larvae did capture larger spheres,
however. When early and later stage larvae were fed the
sai suspension, as in the last two lines of Table I, the
median sizes and the largest si/.es of ingested spheres were
significantly greater for larger, older larvae (Mann-Whitney
U tests, H, 1 0. a 2 = 5, P < 0.05). Objects larger than the
spheres olio can he ingested. For example, a 49-day-old
larva, 375 /u,m id :, ingested an unidentified object 366 /xm
long by 40 |um wide
When larvae of U. cn of different ages and sizes were
offered smaller plastic sphctes, all 10 of the small, 3-day-
old larvae caught fewer spheres of 29-fj,m than of 1 2-jum,
and all 4 of the larger, 48-day-old larvae ingested more of
the 29-/j,m spheres than of the 12-/xm spheres (Table II).
Small, early-stage larvae did ingest 5- and 20- /xm spheres in
about the same ratio as ingested by larger larvae (Table II).
Estimates of the width of the food groove of a single
5-day-old larva ranged from 22 to 34 /xm, but the width of
the food groove varies with contraction of the larva. The
upper limit on the sizes of particles that could be transported
in the food groove was not determined.
Rejection of particles
Larvae could actively reject particles. Particle rejection
often occurred after a particle had been transported to the
mouth and entered the esophagus. When a larva of Ariiuin-
dia brevis expelled a particle, the metatrochal cilia around
ANNELID LARVAL FEEDING MECHANISMS
21
0.15
Figure 7. Videorecorded capture of a 40-fxm sphere by a Urechis
caupo larva. Time is in seconds in the lower left-hand comer. The sphere
is near the metatrochal cilia at the posterior lip of the mouth at s and
moves over this band of cilia toward the mouth at 0.1 and 0.15 s. It is just
entering the mouth at 0.25 s. The anterior end is toward the upper right. At
s the larva is 300-^im wide at the base of the prototrochal cilia.
the mouth stopped beating as the particle moved posteriorly
down the body (Fig. 3). Metatrochal cilia at the mouth of
larvae of Urechis caupo must also have altered beat during
particle rejection, because large particles moved posteriorly
over the lower lip and down the neurotroch during rejection
(Fig. 8). in contrast to their posterior-to-anterior path over
the lip during ingestion (Fig. 7).
For larvae ofArmandia h rev is. prototroch circumference
and prototrochal eilium length increased with number of
setigerous segments (Fig. 9A. B). Larval volume increased
exponentially with number of setigers (Fig. 9C).
Particle velocities increased slightly with number of se-
tigers for larvae of A. hrevis with 6-7. 11-12. and 15-16
setigers (H = 9) (Fig. 10). Increased particle velocities and
eilium lengths resulted in a 30% increase in the area of
water per prototrochal slice moved per second between
larvae with 6-7 and 11-12 setigers and a 22% increase
between larvae with 11-12 and 15-16 setigers (Table III).
Maximum particle velocities were within the distal third of
the eilium length (estimated for each size class from Fig.
9B). consistent with our expectations (Emlet and Strath-
mann. 1994). Although Strathmann et al. ( 1993) suggested
that eilium lengths might be underestimated from videore-
cordings, our results indicate that this was not the case. In
addition, our measurements agree with the eilium length of
approximately 35 /im reported by Hermans (1964) for a
larva with an unspecified number of setigers.
Although estimated maximum clearance rates increased
with number of setigers, they did not increase proportion-
ately to body volume (Table III). Late-stage larvae (15-16
setigers) had a maximum ratio of clearance to body volume
that was less than half of that achieved earlier in develop-
ment (6-7 setigers; Table III).
Prototrochal circumference and eilium length both in-
creased with larval growth to a greater extent for larvae of
U. caupo than for larvae of A. brevis. over the stages
measured (Tables I-III). The relative increase in body
length was much less for U. caupo. Early-stage larvae were
nearly spherical and elongated to the shape shown in Figure
2A at later stages. Data for particle velocities are lacking for
Figure 8. Videorecorded rejection of previously ingested spheres up to 50 jum in diameter by a Urcchix
ciiii/x) larva. Time is in seconds in the lower left-hand corner. At and 0.3 s the mouth gapes at least l(IO-(nm
wide, and the clump of spheres moves over the posterior lip of the mouth and down the midventral neurotroch.
The larva in the last frame is 295-/nm wide at the base of the prototrochal cilia, and the mouth, now rotated
toward the viewer, is closed and approximately 1 20-ju.m wide.
B. G. MINER ET AL
Table I
Sizes of Sephadex spheres ingested by larvae / Urechis caupo differing in size and age
Particle
diameter (/Limit
Age
Prototrochal diameter
Cilium length
Number
(days)
(fan)*
(/Mm)
In suspension
Ingested
of larvae
4
159
45
45,26-73(50)
36, 14-53(51)
12
5
165
44
44. 30-74 (50)
36, 19-60(34)
10
16
318
65
44, 30-74 (50)
38,21-73(104)
5
* Diameter of the prototrochal band is diameter at the base of the prototrochal cilia.
t Values are median, range, and (in parentheses) number of particles.
U. caupo, but the increase in prototrochal area (cilium
length times prototrochal circumference) relative to body
volume was greater for this species than for A. brevis.
Discussion
Our observations add the Opheliidae and Echiuridae to
those annelid families known to possess larvae with op-
posed-band feeding. As in other opposed-band feeders, lar-
vae of both Armandia brevis and Urechis caupo possess a
ciliated food groove between two parallel ciliary bands, a
postoral metatroch and a prototroch. Direct observations
confirm that particles are captured in the food groove (Figs.
3-5), probably through the combined action of long com-
pound cilia in the prototroch (which beat anterior to poste-
rior) and shorter compound cilia in the metatroch (which
beat posterior to anterior). Simple cilia of the food groove
may aid in retention of particles as well as in transport. This
system is very effective in capturing relatively small parti-
cles (5-12 /urn), regardless of which part of the prototrochal
circumference is contacted (ventral, lateral, or dorsal). How
common this feeding method is in larvae of other opheliids
or echiurids is not known, but larvae of at least one other
echiurid bear opposed bands of cilia (Salensky, 1876;
Hatschek, 1880).
Larvae of both A. brevis and U. caupo also ingested
particles larger than the space between prototrochal and
metatrochal bands. For A. brevis, it was later stage (14-17
setiger) larvae that ingested large (50-ju.m) particles. These
larvae approached large particles so that contact was di-
rectly at the mouth. This behavior was not observed in
larvae at earlier stages. In contrast, larvae of U. caupo
ingested particles greater than 50 /urn at early stages. Larvae
of U. caupo did not appear to change orientation as they
approached large particles; however, their movements were
constrained by mesh cages. Particles that were captured
directly at the mouth entered either over the episphere and
prototroch or over the extension of the metatroch on the
lower lip. In both species the mouths were large, could be
opened to a wide gape, and were heavily ciliated. The cilia
bordering the lower lip of the mouth appear to be a contin-
uation of the metatroch. The oral cilia of A. brevis may
include additional compound cilia (Fig. 1). For both A.
brevis and U. caupo, the large ciliated oral field and the
large mouth aid in the capture of large particles.
The combination of two ciliary feeding mechanisms in
individual larvae suggests hypotheses for evolutionary tran-
sitions among the feeding larvae of annelids. Some larvae,
such as those of serpulids, appear to be restricted to captur-
ing small particles between opposed bands; other larvae,
like those of polynoids, lack opposed bands and appear to
capture mostly large particles one by one, using complex
oral ciliature (Phillips and Fernet, 1996). Our results dem-
Tahle II
Sizes of plastic spheres iiixcMctl h\ lamie oj Urechis caupo differing in size and age
Particle diameter
Age
(days)
Prototrochal diameter
(fun)*
Cilium length
(fj.ni)
Ratio in suspension
(29:12 /Mm)
Ratio ingested
(29:12 jum)
Number
of larvae
3
151
46
1.43:1
39/146 = 0.27
10
4S
347
76
1.43:1
206/112 = 1.84
4
(20:5 /im)
(20:5 /urn)
4
161
45
11
146/30 = 4.9
8
15
310
67
1:1
99/37 = 2.7
8
Diameter of the prototrochal band is diameter at the base of the prolotrochal cilia.
ANNELID LARVAL FEEDING MECHANISMS
23
500
4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
40-i
U. 35-
OfJ
u
I
30-
25H
15
R 2 = 0.84
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
U
T
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
# of Setigers
Figure 9. Binomial regression of various larval parameters vs. number
of setigers for Armandia brevis. For all equations. X = number of setigers.
The R 2 value is reported in the lower right-hand corner of each plot. (A)
Inner prototroch perimeter (;i = 36 larvae); larval circumference =
178.36 + 23.24x - 0.44x 2 . (B) Cilium length (n = 22 larvae); cilium
length = 18.67 + 2.16x - 0.07x : . (C) Larval volume (n = 36 larvae);
larval volume = 10 5 48 + 008x .
onstrate that in at least two families of annelids, both types
of mechanisms can be employed simultaneously by the
same larva. In addition, it appears that the oral ciliature of A.
brevis and U. caupo, which is responsible for the capture of
large particles, is continuous with the lateral and dorsal
extensions of the metatroch and food groove. As an evolu-
tionary transition, expansion of oral filiation might result in
a food groove and metatroch paralleling the whole length of
the prototroch to produce an opposed-band system. Alter-
natively, enlargement of the mouth and elaboration of oral
ciliation (with loss of the lateral and dorsal parts of the
opposed-band system) could produce the variety of oral
4000-1
3000 -
2000 -
1000-
o
u
C/3
"e
^i
IT
'o
_0
U
>
o
4000-1
3000 -
2000 -
1000-
4000n
3000 -
2000 -
1000-
A
i 1 1 1 1
o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
10 20 30 40 50 60 70
C
10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Distance To Cilium Base (urn)
Figure 10. Particle velocity vs. distance of particle from the base of the
prototroch for Armandia brevis larvae with (A) 6-7, (B) 11-12, and (C)
15-16 setigers. The vertical dotted line shows the estimated cilium length
taken from the binomial regression of Figure 9B.
24 B. G. MINER ET AL.
Table III
Estimated clearance rate and clearuin c rule per lamil volume fur three .w.-r ( /, <>/ lumie o) Armandia hrcvis
Cilium
Water area per
Midpoint
Larval
Clearance
#of
lencth
prototroch slice
prototrochal
Max. clearance rate
volume
rate/volume
Seligers
( nm I
per unit timet (junr/s)
circumference (jumi
IjunvVs)- 10"
(ju,m')
(1/S)
6-7
29.9
32846
422
13.9
998309
13.9
11-12
34.8
42602
549
23.4
2526475
9.3
15-16
36.4
51449
642
33.4
5310250
6.3
* Calculated from the binomial regression in Fig. 10B.
t Calculated from the areas under the curves in Fig. 1 1. bound by the origin and the estimated cilium length lor that size class.
i Estimated from the binomial regression in Fig. IOC.
ciliature found in the diverse feeding larvae of annelids.
Continued modification of such cilia might result in such
unusual and functionally important structures as the group
of long compound cilia on the left side of the mouth of
polynoid larvae.
Estimated maximum clearance rates did not scale isomet-
rically with body volume among the three size classes of A.
brevis. Cilium length, prototroch circumference, and parti-
cle velocities through a prototrochal slice all increased as
body volume increased, but not enough for maximum clear-
ance rate to increase in proportion to body volume thus
the volume of water swept by cilia decreases relative to
body volume as the larva adds segments. An analogous
situation has been described for the cyphonautes larva of
bryozoans. in which ciliated band length does not increase
proportionately to body volume during growth and devel-
opment (McEdward and Strathmann. 1987). This allometry
is potentially unfavorable to larger larvae. In asteroid, echi-
noid, and bivalve larvae similar in size to A. brevis larvae,
metabolic rates scale isometrically with body mass (Hoegh-
Guldberg and Manahan. 1995). Further, in the larvae of an
echinoid, metabolic demand scales isometrically with larval
volume (McEdward, 1984). If these results can be general-
ized to larvae of A. brevis, and if we make the reasonable
assumption that the masses of these larvae are proportional
to their volume, then the maximum clearance rates of A.
brevis larvae decline relative to metabolic demand as the
larvae increase in size. However, larger larvae of A. hrcvis
(>12 setigers) can supplement the amount of small particles
captured by opposed-band feeding by capturing larger par-
ticles at the mouth. The increased size range of food may
compensate, at least partly, for the decrease in clearance
rate. This decrease in maximum clearance rate per larval
volume may have selected for larvae that possess two types
of feeding mechanisms.
Do other annelid larvae share this potentially unfavor-
able allometry of maximum clearance rate and body
volume? Some annelid larvae resemble A. hrevis in ex-
treme elongation of a segmented body during the larval
stage (Bhaud and Cazaux, 1987). Some of these larvae
(<'.,!,'.. spionids) possess feeding mechanisms other than
the opposed prototrochal and metatrochal bands. Thus,
evolutionary changes in the size range of particles cap-
tured may have been favored in several groups of anne-
lids as a result of a small head circumference and long
larval body. Other possible solutions to this problem are
opposed bands elongated on ciliated lobes, as reported
for the rostraria larva of an annelid (Jagersten, 1972). or
the sinuous opposed bands of mitraria larvae of oweniid
annelids (Emlet and Strathmann, 1994).
The larvae of U. cinipo and some other annelids probably
do not face such an unfavorable allometry of maximum
clearance rate to body volume, however. The larvae of U.
cuit/w develop from nearly spherical trochophores (at 3 to 5
days) to forms with more elongate bodies (at several
weeks), but the elongation is not as extreme (cf. Fig. 2 to
Fig. 6). Also, these larvae capture relatively large particles
from an early stage. Nevertheless, the circumferential cili-
ary bands are shorter, relative to body size, than similar
bands that are extended on the velar lobes of many gastro-
pod larvae (Richter and Thorson. 1975). Feeding on an
extended size range of particles and extension of opposed,
ciliary bands on lobes may be alternative ways of increasing
ingestion rates.
Further analyses of larval feeding methods, as well as
robust phylogenies, are required to understand the evolution
and functional consequences of diverse larval feeding
mechanisms in the Annelida. For example, why are opposed
bands apparently used only in the capture of small particles?
What functional constraints place an upper limit on the
spacing of the prototroch and metatroch in opposed-band
feeders? Such analyses may also reveal why some larvae
(c.i>.. serpulids) use restricted opposed bands to feed on
small particles, and others ('.#., polynoids) use complex
oral ciliature to feed primarily on large particles instead of
employing both methods, as do the opheliid and echiurid
larvae described here.
ANNELID LARVAL FEEDING MECHANISMS
25
Acknowledgments
NSF grant OCE9633193. the Robert Fernald Fellowship
endowment, and the Friday Harbor Laboratories of the
University of Washington supported the research on Annan-
din hrevis. NSF grant OCE9301665 and the Bodega Marine
Laboratory of the University of California at Davis sup-
ported the research on Urechis caupo. K. Uhlinger advised
on collection of adults and culture of larvae of U. caupo. W.
Borgeson provided algal medium and Isochrysis galbana.
N. E. Phillips and C. Staude advised on analysis of video-
tapes of U. caupo. We thank J. Marcus for help in printing
photographs, and J. Hoffman and two anonymous reviewers
for useful comments on the manuscript.
Literature Cited
Bhuud, M., and C. Cazaux. 1987. Description and identification of
polychaete larvae; their implications in current biological problems.
Oceania 13: 595-753.
Emlet, R. B. 1990. Flow fields around ciliated larvae: the effects of
natural and artificial tethers. Mar. Ecol. Prog. Ser. 63: 211-225.
Emlet, R. B., and R. R. Strathmann. 1994. Functional consequences of
simple cilia in the mitrariu of owcniids (an anomalous larva of an
anomalous polychaete) and comparisons with other larvae. Pp. 143-
157 in Reproduction and Development oj Marine Invertebrates, W. H.
Wilson, Jr., S. A. Strieker, and G. L. Shinn, eds. Johns Hopkins
University Press, Baltimore.
Gould, M. 1967. Echiund worms: Urechis. Pp. 163-171 in Methods in
Developmental Biology. F. H. Wilt and N. Wessels. eds. Crowell, New
York.
Hatschek. B. 1880. Oner die Entwicklungsgeschichte von Echiurus und
die systematische Stellung der Echiuridae. Arbeiten Zool. lust. Wien 3:
45-78, plates 1-6.
Hermans, C. O. 1964. The Reproductive and Developmental Biology of
lite Opheliid Polychaete, Armandia brevis. M. S. Thesis, University of
Washington. 131 pp
Hermans, C. O. 1978. Metamorphosis in the opheliid polychaete Ar-
mandia brevis. Pp. 1 13-126 in Settlement and Metamorphosis of Ma-
rine Invertebrate Larvae. F.-S. Chia and M. E. R. Rice. eds. Elsevier,
New York.
Hoegh-Guldberg, O., and D. T. Manahan. 1995. Coulometric mea-
surement of oxygen consumption during development of marine inver-
tebrate embryos and larvae. / E\p. Biol. 198: 19-30.
Jagersten, G. 1972. Evolution of the Metazoan Life Cycle. Academic
Press. New York. 282 pp.
McEdward, L. R. 1984. Morphometric and metabolic analyses of the
growth and form of an echmopluteus. J. Exp. Mar. Biol. Ecol. 82:
259-287.
McEdward, L. R., and R. R. Strathmann. 1987. The body plan of the
cyphonautes larva of bryo/.oans prevents high clearance rates: compar-
isons with the pluteus and a growth model. Biol. Bull. 172: 30-45.
McHugh. I). 1997. Molecular evidence that echiurans and pogono-
phorans are derived annelids. Proc. Nail. Acud. Sci. USA 94: 8006-
8009.
McHugh, I)., and G. VV. Rouse. 1998. Life history evolution of marine
invertebrates: new views from phylogenetic systematics. Trends Ecol.
Evol. 13: 1X2-1X0.
Newby, W. W. 1940. The Embryology of the Ecliiuroid Worm Urechis
caupo. American Philosophical Society. Philadelphia. 219 pp.
Nielsen. C. 1995. Animal Evolution. Oxford University Press, Oxford.
467 pp.
Nielsen, C. 1998. Origin and evolution of animal life cycles. Biol. Rev.
73: 125-155.
Phillips. N. E., and B. Fernet. 1996. Capture of large particles by
suspension-feeding scaleworm larvae (Polychaeta: Polynoidae). Biol.
Bull. 191: 199-208.
Richter, G., and G. Thorson. 1975. Pelagische Prosobranchier-Larven
des Golfes von Neapel. Ophelia 13: 109-185.
Rouse, G. W., and K. Fauchald. 1997. Cladistics and polychaetes. Zool.
Scr. 26: 139-204.
Salensky, W. 1876. Uber die Metamorphose des Echiurus. Morpholo-
gisches Jahrhiich 2: 319-327.
Sleigh, M. A. 1984. The integrated activity of cilia: function and coor-
dination. J. Proto-ool. 31: 16-21.
Strathmann, R. R. 1987. Larval feeding. Pp. 465-550 in Reproduction
of Marine Invertebrates. Vol. 9. General Aspects: Seeking Uniiv in
Diversity, A. C. Giese, J. S. Pearse, and V. B. Pearse, eds. Blackwell,
Palo Alto, CA.
Strathmann, R. R. 1993. Hypotheses on the origins of marine larvae.
Ainni. Rev. Ecol. Syst. 24: 89-1 17.
Strathmann, R. R., and D. J. Eernisse. 1994. What molecular phylog-
enies (ell us about the evolution of larval forms. Am. Zool. 34: 502-
512.
Strathmann. R. R., and E. Leise. 1979. On feeding mechanisms and
clearance rates of molluscan veligers. Biol. Bull. 157: 524-535.
Strathmann, R. R., T. L. Jahn, and J. R. C. Fonseca. 1972. Suspen-
sion feeding by marine invertebrate larvae: clearance of particles by
ciliated bands of a rotifer, pluteus. and trochophore. Biol. Bull. 142:
505-519.
Strathmann. R. R., L. Fenaux, A. T. Scwell, and M. F. Strathmann.
1993. Abundance of food affects relative size of larval and postlarval
structures of a molluscan veliger. Biol. Bull. 185: 232-239.
Suer, A. 1,. 1982. Larval Settlement, Growth, and Reproduction of the
Marine Ecluuran Urechis caupo. Ph.D. Thesis. University of Califor-
nia. Davis. 198 pp.
Reference: Biul. Bull. 197: 26-39. (August I9Q9|
Bioluminescence in the Deep-Sea Cirrate Octopod
Stauroteuthis syrtensis Verrill (Mollusca: Cephalopoda)
SONKE JOHNSEN 1 , ELIZABETH J. BALSER 2 , ERIN C. FISHER 1 , AND EDITH A. WIDDER 1
' Marine Science Division, Harhor Branch Oceanographic Institution. Ft. Pierce. Florida: and
2 Department of Biology, Illinois Wesleyan University, Bloomington, Illinois
Abstract. The emission of blue-green bioluminescence
(A m . ix = 470 nm) was observed from sucker-like structures
arranged along the length of the arms of the citrate octopod
Stauroteuthis syrtensis. Individual photophores either
glowed dimly and continuously or flashed on and off more
brightly with a period of 1-2 seconds. Examination of the
anatomy and ultrastructure of the photophores confirmed
that they are modified suckers. During handling, the photo-
phores were unable to attach to surfaces, suggesting that,
unlike typical octopod suckers, they have no adhesive func-
tion. The oral position of the photophores and the wave-
length of peak emission, coupled with the animals' primary
postures, suggests that bioluminescence in S. syrtensis may
function as a light lure to attract prey.
Introduction
Bioluminescence is a common and complex characteris-
tic in coleoid cephalopods. A large percentage of these
animals are bioluminescent, many possessing complicated
light organs utilizing lenses, reflectors, irises, interference
filters, pigment screens, and shutters (Harvey, 1952: Her-
ring, 1988). The diversity of the morphologies and anatom-
ical distributions of cephalopod photophores is unparalleled
among invertebrate phyla (Voss, 1967; Herring, 1988).
However, despite this extraordinary radiation, biolumines-
cence appears to be rare among octopods. Although 63 of
the 100 genera of squid and cuttlefish have bioluminescent
species, only 2 of the 43 genera of octopods have species
confirmed to be bioluminescent the bolitaenids Japetella
and Eledonella (Robison and Youn. 1981; Herring el /.,
Received 16 March 1999; accepted 27 May !')'>
Address tor correspondence: Dr. Sonke Johnsen, MS #33, Woods Hole
Oceanographic Institution, Woods Hole, MA 02543-1049. E-mail:
sjohnsen@whoi.edu
1987; Herring, 1988). In these genera, the light organs are
found only in breeding females (Robison and Young, 1981 )
and are restricted to tissues associated with the oral ring and
the base of the arms (Herring et ai. 1987). In the case of
citrate octopods, bioluminescence has been suggested but
never confirmed (Aldred et ai, 1982, 1984; Vecchione.
1987).
This study provides the first description of biolumines-
cence in the cirrate octopod Stauroteuthis syrtensis. We also
describe the anatomy and ultrastructure of the photophores
in comparison with the morphology reported for cephalopod
photophores (Herring et til.. 1987) and octopod suckers
(Kier and Smith. 1990; Budelmann et ai, 1997). In addi-
tion, we present a hypothesis to explain how the presence of
light organs relates to the feeding behavior postulated for
these animals. A preliminary account of this research has
been presented by Johnsen et al. ( 1999).
Materials and Methods
Source and maintenance of animals
Three specimens of Stauroteuthis s\rtensis were obtained
during a cruise of the R.V. Edwin Link to Oceanographer
Canyon (on the southern rim of Georges Bank, USA) in
August and September 1997. The animals were collected at
depth using the research submersible Johnson-Sea-Link out-
fitted with acrylic collection cylinders (11-liter volume)
with hydraulically activated, sliding lids. The three speci-
mens were caught during daylight at depths of 755 m (225
m from bottom), 734 m (246 m from bottom), and 919 m
(165 m from bottom) (dive numbers 2925 and 2927) and
maintained for up to 2 days at 8C in water collected at
depth.
26
BIOLUMINESCENCE IN A DEEP-SEA OCTOPOD
27
Video ami photography
Specimens were videotaped in two situations. First, the
behavior of two animals was recorded from the submersible.
Second, the captured animals were filmed aboard ship in the
dark by using an intensified video camera (Inte vac's Nile-
Mate 1305/1306 CCTV intensifier coupled to a Panasonic
Charge Coupled Device). During shipboard filming, the
animals were gently prodded to induce bioluminescence.
Representative video frames were digitized (ITSCE capture
board, Eyeview Software, Coreco Inc.). The animals were
also placed in a plankton kreisel (Hamner. 1990) and pho-
tographed with a Nikon SLR camera with Kodak Elite 100
color film. Data from a previously recorded i';i xitu video of
a specimen of S. svrtensis from the slope waters near Cape
Hatteras at 840 m (35 m from bottom; August 1996; R.V.
Edwin Link; dive 2777) are also reported in this paper.
Spectrophotometry
Bioluminescent spectra were measured using an intensi-
fied optical multichannel analyzer (OMA-detector model
1420. detector interface model 1461, EG&G Princeton Ap-
plied Research) coupled to a 2-mm-diameter fiber optic
cable. The detector was wavelength calibrated using a low-
pressure mercury spectrum lamp (Model 6047. Oriel Inc.)
and intensity calibrated using a NIST referenced low-inten-
sity source (Model 310. Optronics Laboratories) intended
for the calibration of detectors from 350 nm to 800 nm. For
further details on the theory of operation and calibration of
the OMA detector, see Widder et al. ( 1983). Three emission
spectra were recorded from one animal, and an average
spectrum was calculated.
Microscopy of photophores
The fixation, dehydration, and infiltration procedures
were performed at room temperature aboard the R. V.
Edwin Link. The animals were sacrificed by over-anesthesia
with MS222 (Sigma Chemicals Inc.). One specimen was
fixed in 10% formalin in seawater and dissected to confirm
species identification. One arm of a different specimen was
fixed in 2.5% glutaraldehyde in 0.2 M Millonig's buffer at
pH 7.4, adjusted to an osmolarity of 1000 mOs with NaCl.
After an initial 1-h fixation, several photophores were dis-
sected from the arm and placed in fresh fixative for an
additional 5.5 h. Postfixation of the dissected photophores in
\ c /c osmium tetroxide in Millonig's buffer for 70 min was
followed by dehydration through a graded series of ethyl
alcohols. Over a period of 6 days, the specimens were
slowly infiltrated with propylene oxide and Polybed 812
(Polysciences) and then embedded in Polybed 812.
Semithin ( 1 /urn) and thin sections of embedded material
were cut with a diamond knife (Diatome) and a Sorvall
MT2 rotary ultramicrotome. Semithin sections were stained
with 2% toluidine blue in 1% sodium borate and photo-
graphed with a Zeiss Photomicroscope II using Kodak
Tmax 100 black-and-white film. Intact arms fixed in 10%
formalin in seawater were photographed with a Tessovar
photographic system. Thin sections for ultrastructural eval-
uation were stained with aqueous 3% uranyl acetate and
0.3% lead citrate. Stained sections were viewed and photo-
graphed with a Zeiss EM 9 transmission electron micro-
scope.
For scanning electron microscopy, an arm with suckers
was fixed in 2.5% gluteraldehyde (as described above).
dehydrated with ethyl alcohol, infiltrated with hexa-
methyldisali/ane (Pellco), and air-dried. Micrographs were
obtained with a JEOL JSM 5800LV scanning electron mi-
croscope using Kodak Polapan 400 film.
Results
General description of animal and distribution of
photophores
Figures 1A and IB show the largest of the three captured
specimens of S. syrtenxis. The appearance of the specimen
is typical for the species (Vecchione and Young, 1997). The
mantle length is about 9 cm (mantle lengths of other two
specimens ~ 6 cm), suggesting that all three animals were
immature (Collins, unpubl. data). The measurements are
highly approximate because the mantle in the living animal
is easily deformed. The primary webbing extends for about
three-quarters of the length of the arms. The arms are oral to
the primary web and attached to it by a secondary web. The
photophores are arranged in a single row along the oral
surface of each arm, situated between successive pairs of
cirri (Fig. IB). Each arm supports about 40 photophores.
The distance between photophores decreases from the base
to the tip of the arm, with the greatest distance being 4 mm
and the smallest less than O.I mm. The diameter and the
degree of development of the photophores located at the tip
are less than those located at the base of the arm. The fresh
tissue of the entire animal had a gelatinous consistency
typical of many deep-sea cephalopods (Voss, 1967). Al-
though orange-red under the photo-floodlights, the color of
the animal was closer to reddish-brown in daylight.
Bioluminescence
When mechanically stimulated, S. svrtensis emitted mod-
erately bright, blue-green light (A max = 470 nm) from the
sucker-like photophores along the length of each arm (Fig.
2). With continuous stimulation, these photophores pro-
duced light for up to 5 min, though the intensity of biolu-
minescence decreased over time. Individual photophores
either glowed dimly and continuously or blinked on and off
brightly at 0.5 to I Hz. The blinking photophores cycled
asynchronously, producing a twinkling effect. All suckers
28
S. JOHNSEN ET AL
Outer epithelium
Figure 1. Photographs under artificial light of the deep-sea finned
octopod Stauroteuthis syrtenxis with the wehhed arms in swimming pos-
ture (A) and spread (B) displaying the photophores/suckers (arrowheads)
that appear as white spheres along the length of the inner surface of the
arms. The posture shown in (B) may he one of extreme withdrawal
intended to startle intruders with the sudden appearance of hioluminescent
suckers, ar, arm; ey, eye; fi, fin; wb, webbing between arms. Scale bars =
4 cm.
(except possibly the very small ones at the tips of the arms)
appeared capable of luminescence. No other portion of the
body was observed to emit light.
Morphology of photophores
Each photophore is a raised papilla-like structure partially
embedded in the connective tissue of the arm. The photo-
phores are composed of three layers of cells: an outer
epithelium modified to form a collar, infundibulum, and
acetabulum: a capsule-like mass of muscle and neural tissue
beneath the epithelium; and a thin layer separating the
capsule from the dermis of the arm (Figs. 3, 4, 5). The collar
epithelium is continuous with the epidermis and is folded
inward, forming a rim around the central portion of the
photophore (Figs. 3B, C; 4A). In both formalin- and glut-
araldehyde-preserved specimens, the photophores appear to
be either everted above (Fig. 3B) or retracted below (Fig.
3C) the outer edge of the collar.
The outer and inner folds of the collar epithelium are
morphologically distinct and are different from the epider-
mis covering the arm (Figs. 5, 6). The epidermis of the arm
is squamous to cuboidal in character and consists of epithe-
lial cells possessing scattered apical microvilli (Fig. 6A).
The outer edge of the collar is composed of columnar cells
with apical microvilli, numerous electron-lucent and elec-
tron-dense vesicles, and large, apically placed, elongated
nuclei (Fig. 6B). Like the epidermis, this region of the collar
is not covered by a cuticle.
The inner edge of the collar is similar in cellular mor-
phology to the outer collar epithelium except that the mi-
crovilli are more densely arranged and are covered by a
cuticle (Figs. 6C, D). In this region, the cuticle is composed
of at least three layers: an outer lamina 0.3 yum thick with
irregular projections; a second electron-dense lamina, also
0.3 /am thick: and an inner layer approximately 1 /urn thick
consisting of amorphous material.
The epithelium and the overlying cuticle of the inner edge
of the collar continue as the epithelium of a flat recessed
region of the photophore corresponding to the infundibulum
of typical octopod suckers (Figs. 3B; 4 A: 5 A, B). The outer
edge of the infundibulum is ringed by hook-shaped den-
ticles (Fig. 4B-D), which are elaborations of the cuticle
(Fig. 6C, D). In addition to the presence of denticles, the
cuticle covering the infundibular epithelium differs from
that described for the inner part of the collar in that the outer
layer contains more irregular projections and the innermost
lamina is greatly expanded. The cuticle in this region is
apparently secreted by the infundibulum and, as supported
by Figure 6C and D, is periodically molted and replaced by
a new, pre-formed cuticle. Subcuticular spaces were ob-
served in association with what appear to be newly forming
denticles.
Three cell types gland cells, columnar epithelial cells,
and multiciliated cells were observed in the infundibular
epithelium. Gland cells with narrow apical necks and a
reduced number of apical microvilli are situated between
columnar epithelial cells, which are characterized by a brush
border of branched microvilli, rounded apical nuclei, apical
endocytic vesicles, and mitochondria (Fig. 7 A). Both co-
lumnar cells and gland cells have a tine granular cytoplasm
replete with Golgi bodies and electron-dense and electron-
lucent vesicles of varying sizes (Fig. 7B. C). Electron-dense
granules, not bounded by a membrane, were observed be-
tween microvilli. These presumably originate from the in-
fundibular cells and are incorporated into the cuticle (Fig.
7C). Multiciliated columnar cells were infrequently ob-
served as part of the infundibulum. Cilia were not found in
epidermal or collar cells. The cilia of the infundibular cells
have two nearly parallel striated rootlets and appear to have
reduced axonemes that do not project above the level of the
BIOLUM1NESCENCE IN A DEEP-SEA OCTOPOD
29
Figure 2. Digitized frames from a video sequence of light emission (white spots) from photophores/suckers
taken from video of an animal filmed in the dark using an intensified video camera (Inlevac's NiteMatc
1305/1306 CCTV Intensifier coupled to a Panasonic CCD). Two amis are shown. For scale, their closest
approach is approximately 1 cm.
microvilli (Fig. 7C). All three cell types are interconnected
by apical adherens and subapical septate junctions (Fig.
7D).
At the center of the light organ, the infundibular epithe-
lium invaginates to form the acetabulum, which is seen
externally as an opening, or pore (Figs. 3B, 4A). This
central opening continues internally as a blind canal (Fig.
5C). The acetabular cells differ from those of the infundib-
ulum primarily in the basal position of the nuclei, the highly
interdigitated lateral membranes, and the diminution of the
outer two layers of the cuticle (Figs. 5C: 8A. B).
The infundibulum and the acetabulum rest on a basal
lamina beneath which is located an expanded layer of con-
nective tissue with a maximum thickness of 1.5 jam (Figs.
5C; 8C, D). Fibers, presumably collagen, although confir-
mation of this is not provided by the data, are arranged in
alternating directions in multiple layers, giving the tissue a
herringbone appearance. Occasional breaks, traversed by
nerve axons, were observed in this otherwise continuous
connective tissue sheath.
Muscle and neural tissue
Beneath the connective tissue underlying the epithelium
of the infundibulum and acetabulum is a mass of tissue
consisting of muscle and neural cells; this surrounds and
encapsulates the outer epithelium (Figs. 5; 8A, E; 9). The
myofilaments. which include thick filaments (25 and 50 nm
in diameter) and thin filaments consistent with the size of
myosin and actin, are oriented in three planes circular.
radial, and longitudinal with respect to the axis of the
photophore. Although all sections were taken in the longi-
tudinal plane of the photophore. the precise plane of each
section for these transmission electron micrographs was not
known. Thus, the differentiation of the fibers seen in Figure
8C (shown in cross-section) and Figure 9A (horizontal
fibers shown in longitudinal section) as circular or radial
cannot be determined.
Intermingled with the muscle cells are nerve cells char-
acterized by electron-dense granules O.I jum in diameter.
Nerve axons are located throughout the capsule and espe-
cially in the basal region closest to the dermis (Fig 9B).
Although a direct connection was not documented, fluores-
cent images of the photophores indicate that axons originat-
ing from the large branchial nerve traverse the dermis and
connect to the photophore.
The innermost layer of the photophores is an epithelium
that separates the muscular capsule from the dermis of the
arm. The cells of this layer have interdigitated lateral mem-
branes and a cytoplasm that appears more granular than that
of the outer epithelium. This layer is associated with extrin-
sic (to the photophore) muscle cells (Fig. 9A) and a blood
vessel located in the dermis (Fig 9B).
In situ behavior
Animal I (from Cape Hatteras) was first seen in a bell
posture with its fins sculling (Fig. 10A). It then moved away
from the submersible, using a slow medusoid locomotion.
After one contraction/expansion cycle, the animal closed its
30
S. JOHNSEN ET AL
CO
ct
Figure 3. (A) Photograph of part of an arm of Slauroteiilhis syrtensis with the webbing removed.
Photophores (arrowheads) are arranged in a single row along the length of the arm and are unequally spaced with
decreasing distance between light organs at the proximal tip of the arm. The positions of the photophores
alternate with the positions of the cirri (cit. Scale bar = 0.5 cm. (B) Light micrograph of a fluorescent image of
a single formalin-fixed photophore in the extended position. Like octopus suckers, the photophore is elevated
above the epidermis (ep). is surrounded by a collar of epidermal cells (co), and consists of an infundihulum (in)
and central acetabular canal (ac). (C) Light micrograph of a retracted photophore that has been bisected
longitudinally. Internally, a capsule-like mass of tissue (ca) underlies the epithelium of the infundibulum and
acetabulum. ct, dermal connective tissue of the arm. Scale bar for B and C = 0. 1 mm.
web and assumed a highly distended balloon posture with
motionless fins (Fig. 10B). After several minutes in this
posture, the arms opened to a bell posture, and then closed
to a considerably smaller balloon posture (Fig. IOC) re-
ferred to as the "pumpkin posture" by Vecchione (pers.
comm.). After 2 min, the fins began sculling and the animal
made one more medusoid contraction and then again closed
its web to the pumpkin posture with fins sculling. After a
minute, the animal made about seven more medusoid con-
tractions and then closed to the pumpkin posture with fins
sculling and head down.
Animal 2 (from Oceanographer Canyon) was first seen
with its arms spread in the horizontal plane with the mouth
oriented upwards (Fig. 10D). It underwent one medusoid
contraction and then inflated to a highly distended balloon
posture with fins motionless and cirri extended and pressed
against the primary web. After several minutes, the fins
began sculling and the animal simultaneously twisted its
body and opened its arms (Fig. 10E).
Animal 3 (from Oceanographer Canyon) was first seen in
a bell posture. Then, using slow medusoid locomotion,
moved away from the submersible. During the escape, its
fin sculled continuously and sometimes vigorously. During
expansion of the primary web, the cirri could be seen and
were extended perpendicular to the arms and pressed
against the primary web.
Discussion
Morphology of photophores and homology with octopus
suckers
Although the anatomical position and morphology of the
light organs of S. svrtensis indicate their homology with
octopod suckers, other aspects of their structure are consis-
BIOLUMINESCENCE IN A DEEP-SEA OCTOPOD
31
Figure 4. Scanning electron micrographs of photophores. (A) Externally, each photophore has three main
recognizable parts: outer wall or collar (co). infundibulum (in), and acetabulum (arrow indicates the opening to
the acetabiilar canal). Scale bar = 100 /Mm. (B) The junction between the infundibulum and the infolded collar
is ringed by a row of denticles (arrowheads). Scale bar = 10 ^im. (C-D) These hook-like denticles (de). which
are atypical of octopod suckers, appear to be elaborations of the cuticle covering the infundibulum and
acetabulum. Scale bars for C and D = 1 jum. A and B adapted from Johnsen el ill ( 1999). with permission from
Nature, copyright 1999 Macmillan Magazines Ltd.
tent with those reported for simple photophores in other
cephalopods (Young and Arnold, 1982; Herring et al., 1987,
1994). Definitive structural characteristics of octopod suck-
ers are given by Kier and Smith (1990) and Budelmann et
al. (1997). Like the suckers of other citrate octopods, the
photophores of S. syrtensis are arranged in a single row
along the oral surface of the arm with the largest, most
developed organs located at the base of the arm, nearest the
mouth. Suckers and these photophores both consist of three
layers of tissue: an outer epithelium, an intrinsic muscular
layer, and an extrinsic layer associated with muscle cells.
The outer epithelium is covered by a cuticle that, as in
suckers, appears to be periodically molted. Moreover, the
epidermis associated with the photophore is modified to
form the columnar epithelial cells of the recessed infundib-
ulum and the invaginated acetabulum. The arrangement of
myofilaments in the muscular capsule are consistent with
the three-dimensional array of contractile fibers typical of
suckers. Although this may be an artifact of fixation, the
morphology and the arrangement of myofilaments would
allow for the retraction and extension, as well as a change in
the diameter, of the photophore and may be important in
regulating the intensity of the emitted light.
Although denticles are not common in octopod suckers
(Nixon and Dilly, 1977; Budelmann et al., 1997), hooks and
denticles of various sizes are found in decapod cephalopods.
The functional significance, especially with the apparent
loss of an adhesive function for the suckers, of the denticles
on the photophores of S. syrtensis is unknown. They may,
however, be vestigial structures indicating an evolutionary
connection to the decapods.
Although definitive morphological characteristics are
32
S. JOHNSEN ET AL
-
**?>
Figure 5. Light micrographs of a series of semithin sections from the
outer edge of the infundihulum (A), through the middle region of the
inl'undihulum (B), lo the center of the acetabular canal (C). Each photo-
phore consists of an outer epithelium that is recessed below the level of a
supporting epidermal collar (co). This epithelium forms the infundihulum
(inland the acetabulum (ac)and is covered by a cuticle (cu). A capsule-like
mass of tissue (ca) is located below the outer epithelium and is separated
from the connective tissue (ct) of the arm by a third layer of cells (tl).
Arrowheads, denticles; arrow, putative reflector. Scale bars = 0.2 mm
lacking for photocytes in general (Herring, 1988). the epi-
thelium of the acetabulum (and possibly of the infundihu-
lum) is presumed to be the bioluminescent region of the
photophores in S. syrtensis. Characteristics that identify
photocytes in the octopod Japetella diaphana ( Herring et ai
1987) and the squid Ahralia trigonura (Young and Arnold,
1982) and are also found in the photophores of S. syrtensis
include the presence of an amorphous, finely granular cy-
toplasmic ground substance containing numerous electron-
dense vesicles, large basal nuclei, highly interdigitated lat-
eral plasma membranes, ciliary rootlets, and abundant Golgi
bodies. To some degree, this cellular morphology is found
in the cells of both the infundihulum and the acetabulum.
Since these ultrastructural traits are also typical of secretory
epithelia. one hypothesis is that the infundibular epithelium
secretes the cuticle, and the acetabular epithelium is in-
volved in light production.
Reflectors in cephalopod photophores are typically com-
posed of collagen fibers arranged in layers beneath the
photocytes (Young and Arnold, 1982; Herring et /., 1994).
The layer of connective tissue separating the outer epithe-
lium and the underlying capsule of muscle and nerve tissue
in S. syrtensis conforms to this description. As in J. di-
aphana (Herring et ui, 1987), the fibrous layers appear
concentric with respect to the axes of the photophore and
alternate in orientation. In a longitudinal tangential section,
this arrangement would produce the herringbone effect seen
in the putative reflector of S. syrtensis.
The functional significance of bioluminescence
The replacement of adhesive suckers with photophores
might have occurred during colonization of the pelagic deep
sea from the shallow-water benthos. However, the signifi-
cance of this transition and the function of the light emis-
sions are, at present, unknown. One function of light emis-
sion common to almost all bioluminescent animals is
defense (reviewed in Widder, 1999). The vast majority of
bioluminescent animals emit light when disturbed, perhaps
to startle predators or to attract larger animals that may prey
upon the predator. Feeding experiments have shown that
feeding rates of predators are diminished in the presence of
bioluminescence (see Widder, 1999, for further details).
Since S. syrtensis emitted light in response to physical
disturbance, it is likely that defense is at least one function
of its light emission.
The functions of bioluminescence in deep-sea animals are
difficult to determine because these animals are seldom
observed in their own environment, and then only under
bright lights that both mask natural light emissions and
affect behavior. Therefore, the following discussion is based
on circumstantial rather than direct evidence and is neces-
sarily speculative. On the basis of the anatomical distribu-
tion of the photophores, the optical characteristics of the
emitted light, and the behavior of the animal, we propose
two more functions for bioluminescnce in S. syrtensis:
sexual signaling and light luring. Visual communication is
BIOLUM1NESCENCE IN A DEEP-SEA OCTOPOO
33
Figure 6. Transmission electron micrographs of tangential longitudinal sections through the epidermis (A),
outer rim of the collar (B), and the inner rim of the collar and outer edge of the infundibulum (D and C). These,
as do all TEM images, represent sections taken in the longitudinal axis of the photophore. The epidermis is
composed of flat cells with scattered apical microvilli (niv). The inner rim of the collar (co) and the infundibulum
(in) are covered externally by a cuticle (cu). which at the edge of the infundibulum is modified to form denticles
(del. Like the cuticle of suckers, the photophore cuticle is apparently shed and replaced by a new pre-formed
cuticle (nd). ct. dermal connective tissue of the arm; ne. nucleolus; nu. nucleus. Scale bars for A, B. and C =
1 fum. Scale bar for C = 3 jum.
extremely common among cephalopods (Hanlon and Mes-
senger. 1996), and the suckers of certain shallow-water
octopods have been implicated in (non-biolurninescent) sex-
ual signaling (Packard. 1961). Indeed, sexual signaling is
the proposed function of bioluminescence in the other
bioluminescent genera of octopods (Robison and Young.
1981). In these animals, light organs are found only in
mature breeding females. Males, immature females, and
brooding females all lack this organ. In addition, Robison
and Young (1981) noted that the emitted light is distinctly
green (rather than the far more common blue-green) and
suggested that the bioluminescence may be a private line of
communication.
However, although the octoradial pattern of twinkling
bioluminescence in 5. syrtensis makes a highly species-
specific signal, several factors contradict its use as a sexual
signal. First, the photophores appear to be found in mem-
bers of the species that, based on mantle length, are imma-
ture (Collins, unpubl. data). None of the three collected
specimens were sexed by dissection. However. S. .syrtensis
can be externally sexed by a sexual dimorphism in suckers
9-22. In mature males, suckers 9-22 are considerably en-
larged; in immature males, the enlargement is less notice-
able (Collins, unpubl. data). By this method, two of the
thixv animals were sexed as female; the sex of the third
animal is unknown. All, including the animal observed from
the submersible at Cape Hatteras. had the same character-
istically reflective suckers. Second, the light organs' wave-
34
S. JOHNSEN ET AL
mv
mi
Figure 7. Transmission electron micrograph'- showing the details of the epithelial cells of the infundihulum.
This epithelium contains gland cells (gc) and columnar epithelial cells (A) and multiciliated columnar cells (C).
(A. B) Numerous electron-dense lev) vesicles, vesicles that are less opaque (ve), and Golgi bodies (arrowheads)
arc found in finely granular cytoplasm (cy) of all cell types. Scale bars = 1 /urn. (C) Both types of columnar
epithelial cells are characterized by having mitochondria (mi) and a brush-border of branched microvilli (mv).
A few multiciliated cells were identified by the presence ot ciliary rootlets (cr) and short apical axonemes. Scale
bar = 2/xm. (D) Infundibular cells are interconnected by apicolateral adherens (ad) and subapical septate (spi
junctions. Scale bar = ().? /urn. nu. nucleus.
length of peak emission closely approximates the wave-
length of maximum light transmission in the ocean (475
nm) and the usual peak wavelengths of bioluminescence
and visual sensitivity in deep-sea animals (Jerlov. 1976;
Herring, 1983; Widder ct ui, 1983; Frank and Case, 1988;
Partridge el /.. 1992; Kirk. 1983). Therefore, though the
bioluminescent signal would be visible at long distances to
other member-* of S. xyrtcnxix, it would also be visible at
long distances to potential predators. In addition, since the
octoradial pattern would be distorted by light scattering
after a short distance underwater (Mertens. 1970), it would
be difficult to distinguish from the many other biolumines-
cent signals of similar wavelength.
A more attractive hypothesis is that bioluminescence in S.
xyrtenxis functions to lure potential prey. Voss (1967) has
previously suggested that the photophores in some cepha-
lopods function as light lures, and this function in S. syr-
tensis is supported by the following line of evidence. The
ciirate genera Stauroteuthis, Cirrotctithis. and Cirrm/uiiinni
feed on small planktonic crustaceans, and other researchers
BIOLUMINESCENCE IN A DEEP-SEA OCTOPOD
35
.
m v
f ;
" &". .^:A.i?VJ-&
; -
-.".. . ' >'
Figure 8. Transmission electron micrographs of the acetahular epithelium ( A-C). the putative reflectoi i l>i.
and distally positioned cells in the capsule of tissue beneath the outer epithelium (E). (A) A montage showing
the presumptive photocytic epithelium (ph), reflector (re), and the underlying capsule (ca) of muscle and nerve
cells. Scale bar = 3 /xm. (B) Like photocytes of other cephalopods, the cells of the acetabulum have highly
digitized lateral membranes (arrowheads) and a finely granular cytoplasm (cy). Scale bar = 0.5 fim. (C. D) A
layer of connective tissue separates the acetabular epithelium from the underlying muscle (mu) and nerve cells.
Breaks in the connective tissue layer are bridged by neurons (nv). Fibers (fi) in the connective tissue are arranged
in layers with alternating orientation, giving the tissue a herringbone appearance. Scale bars = 0.5 /^m. (E)
Presumptive neurons with electron-dense granules (gr) are found throughout the capsule. Scale bar = 0.5 fxm.
have suggested that these are trapped within a mucous web
produced by buccal secretory glands and handled by the
elongated cirri (Vecchione, 1987; Vecchione and Young,
1997). Since all three genera appear to have nonfunctional
suckers (Aldred ct /.. 1983; Voss and Pearcy, 1990), this
method of feeding seems likely. In all three genera, the
36
S. JOHNSEN ET AL
A
Figure 9. (A, B) Transmission electron micrographs ot Ihc medial region of the capsule and ot the third
innermost cell layer of the photophore. The capsule, like the intrinsic musculature of suckers, consists, in part,
ot cells with myolilaments arranged in three planes (also see inset). Longitudinal dm) and horizontal fibers (nui)
alternate throughout the capsule. Inset shows thick and thin filaments consistent with the si/e and appearance of
myosin and actin. Neural axons (nv) are intermingled with muscle cells. The capsule is separated from the
connective tissue of the arm (ct)by a third layer of cells ( ' I. which is associated with extrinsic muscle cells (cm),
bv. lumen ot a blood vessel; nu. nucleus. Scale bars = 1 fj.ni.
shape of the primary web precludes any flow-through feed-
ing current. Therefore, the prey cannot be filtered from the
water column, but must somehow be attracted to the mucous
web. Since many deep-sea crustaceans have well-devel-
oped, sensitive eyes and are attracted to light sources (Morin
ft nl.. 1475). the photophores of S. syrteiisis may provide
the lure.
With the exception of the twisting behavior following
ballooning (observed only once), the in situ behaviors of the
three specimens of S. syrtensis reported here are similar to
BIOLUMINESCENCE IN A DEEP-SEA OCTOPOD
37
Figure 10. Digiti/ed frames of in situ video of Stauroteuthis syrtensis:
(A) bell posture; (B) distended balloon posture; (C) pumpkin posture
(distinguished from the balloon posture by the fact the web is not fully
inflated); (D) inverted umbrella posture; (E) animal twisting and opening
its arms after ballooning. The highlights on the mantle in A. C, and E are
reflections from the submersible lights.
those described from videos of two other specimens ob-
served by Vecchione and Young (1997). When first ap-
proached. S. syrtensis is generally found with its arms
spread in an umbrella or bell posture, with the mouth
oriented either upwards or downwards (Roper and Brund-
age, 1972; Vecchione and Young, 1997; Villeneuva et a!..
1997). Since the animal almost certainly detects the rela-
tively large and well-lit submersible well before itself being
captured on video, it is difficult to know whether this is the
natural posture or a defensive reaction. Given the assump-
tion that the animals are in an undisturbed, non-withdrawal
state when first filmed, their posture and the location of their
photophores are consistent with the use of bioluminescence
as a lure. As mentioned above, the wavelength of peak
emission approximates the wavelength of maximum light
transmission. This suggests that the emission spectrum of
the photophores has been selected for maximum visibility.
Finally, because the intensity of upwelling light is only a
small percentage of that of downwelling light (Demon,
1990), animals bioluminescing in the mouth-up posture
would be highly visible to potential prey in shallower
depths. Collectively, these observations give credence to the
idea that 5. syrtensis uses photophores to attract prey.
Existence and evolution of photophores in octopods
Aside from the present study, the only other conclusive
evidence of bioluminescence in octopods is restricted to the
breeding females of the family Bolitaenidae (Herring.
1988). However, the existence of light organs within suck-
ers (at the base of the peduncle) has been suggested in the
cirrate octopod C. nuimivi (Chun. 1910, 1913). As in the
photophores of 5. svrtensis, these organs have a bright white
appearance due to reflection from a connective tissue layer
and are found in suckers that have many reduced traits
compared to typical octopod suckers (Aldred et ui, 1983).
Unlike the photophores of S. syrtensis, the postulated light
organs of C. mtirmyi are not found within the sucker itself.
In addition, the connective tissue layer is situated such that
the produced light would be reflected into the tissue of the
arm. After a complex subsequent study (Aldred et ai, 1978,
1982, 1983), Aldred et nl. (1984) tentatively interpreted the
organs as unusual nerve ganglia (see also Vecchione, 1987).
Because photophores and photocytes have a bewildering
variety of morphologies (Buck, 1978; Herring, 1988), con-
clusive determination of the presence or absence of light
organs (which often emit only dim light) requires observa-
tion of a healthy specimen in near-total darkness by a
thoroughly dark-adapted observer (i.e., in near-total dark-
ness for a minimum of 10 min) (Widder et ai, 1983). Owing
to the bright lights of submersibles and remotely operated
vehicles, bioluminescence is seldom observed in situ. In
addition, since most bioluminescent animals produce light
when disturbed, deep-sea cephalopods collected in nets
generally have exhausted their light production by the time
they reach the surface. Finally, observations of spontaneous
luminescence are rare; most bioluminescent animals must
be physically stimulated (often for a considerable period of
time) before light is observed (Widder et /., 1983).
The evolutionary history of photophores in any animal
group is extremely difficult to determine because biolumi-
nescence has no fossil record (Buck, 1978). The evolution
of bioluminescence in the coleoid cephalopods is particu-
larly intriguing because of the extraordinary diversity and
complexity of photophores in deep-sea decapods and
vampyromorphs and their apparent rarity and simplicity in
deep-sea octopods (Herring, 1988). However, biolumines-
cence in the deep-sea octopods may not be as rare as
previously assumed. For the reasons given in the previous
paragraph, bioluminescence may be under-reported in the
deep-sea octopods. Cirrothuuimi innrniyi and Cirroteitthis
38
S. JOHNSEN ET AL
are found at abyssal depths (except in polar regions, where
they can be found at the surface) (Voss, 1988), making
capture of healthy specimens extremely difficult. Opistoteu-
this is found at shallower depths and has been maintained in
aquaria (Pereyra, 1965). but it is not known whether it was
observed under the specialized conditions necessary to de-
tect bioluminescence. However, given that Opistoteuthis
feeds on a variety of benthic prey that it apparently captures
using functional suckers (Villaneuva and Guerra, 1991 ), if it
is bioluminescent, its photophores are probably in a differ-
ent site.
Octopod bioluminescence may exist only in S. syrtensis
and the bolitaenids. A cladistic analysis of the Octopoda
involving 66 morphological characters places the citrates
basal to the incirrates and the bolitaenids basal among the
incirrates (Voight, 1997). This analysis also supports the
monophyly of the bolitaenids and the two clades (Cirroteu-
thidae and Stauroteuthidae) composing the genera Stauro-
teitthis, Cirrothauma, and Cirroteuthis. The homology of
the photophores in S. syrtensis and the bolitaenids is un-
likely. The photophores of S. syrtensis appear to exhibit the
rare trait of muscle derivation. The only other example of
muscle-derived light organs has been found in the scopel-
archid fish Benlhalbella infans (Johnston and Herring,
1985). Although the luminous circumoral ring in the boli-
taenid Japetella diaphann is initially a muscular band, the
great increase in the size of the ring in adult females
apparently requires tie uoro synthesis of luminous tissue
(Herring et ai, 1987). In addition, the light organs differ in
almost all other anatomical and morphological characteris-
tics. Finally, only mature female bolitaenids have light
organs, which appear to have a sexual function, whereas the
light organs of S. syrtensis are found in immature animals
and may be involved in feeding. Multiple independent evo-
lutions of photophores are common in decapods, at least at
taxonomic ranks of subfamily or higher (Young and Ben-
nett, 1988; Herring et ai, 1992. 1994). Therefore, despite
the close evolutionary relationship between the cirrates and
the bolitaenids. photophores in these two groups seem to
have evolved independently. However, the monophyly of
Stauroteuthis, Cirroteuthis, and Cirrothauma and the fact
that they all have suckers with reduced traits suggest the
possibility of light production by modified suckers in the
latter two genera.
Acknowledgments
We thank the captain and crew of the R.V. Edwin Link
and the Johnson-Sea-Link pilots, Phil Santos and Scott
Olsen. for assistance with all aspects of animal collection.
We also thank Dr. Tamara Frank for a critical reading of the
manuscript. Dr. Michael Vecchione for aid with identifying
the specimens, Dr. Janet Voight for helpful discussions on
octopod evolution, and Dr. Martin Collins for use of un-
published data. The authors are grateful to the Smithsonian
Marine Station at Fort Pierce, Florida, for allowing the use
of the photomicroscopes. Our thanks are also extended to
Dr. William Jaeckle for his assistance with the scanning
electron microscopy and to Julie Piriano for help with the
transmission electron microscope. This work was funded by
a grant from the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Ad-
ministration (subgrant UCAP-95-02b, University of Con-
necticut, Award No. NA76RU0060) to Drs. Tamara Frank
and EAW, a grant from the National Science Foundation
(OCE-93 13872) to Drs. Tamara Frank and EAW. and by a
Harbor Branch Institution Postdoctoral Fellowship to SJ.
This is Harbor Branch Contribution No. 1287 and Contri-
bution No. 479 of the Smithsonian Station at Fort Pierce,
Florida.
Literature Cited
Aldred, R. G., M. Nixon, and J. Z. Young. 1978. The blind octopus
Cinotlnniimi. Nature 275: 547-549.
Aldred, R. G., M. Nixon, and J. Z. Young. 1982. Possible light organs
in tinned octopods. J. Mo/luscan Stud. 48: 100-101.
Aldred, R. G., M. Nixon, and J. Z. Young. 1983. Cirrothauma murrayi
Chun, a tinned octopod. Philos. Trans. R. Soc. Land. B 301: 1-54.
Aldred, R. G., M. Nixon, and J. Z. Young. 1984. Ganglia not light
organs in the suckers of octopods. J. Molluscan Snul. 50: 67-69.
Buck, J. 1978. Functions and evolutions of bioluminescence. Pp. 419-
460 in Bioluminescence in Action, P. J. Herring, ed. Academic Press,
London.
Budelmann, B. U., R. Schipp, and S. Boletzky. 1997. Cephalopoda. Pp.
119-414 in Microscopic Anatomy of Invertebrates Vol. 6A, F. W.
Harrison and A. J. Kohn, eds. Wiley-Liss Publications, New York.
Chun, C. 1910. Die Cephalopoden. Wiss. Ergebn. dl. Thiefsee-Exped.
"Valdn-ia" 18: 1-552.
Chun. C. 1913. Cephalopoda. Pp. 1-21 in Report on the Scientific
Results of the "Michael Sars " North Atlantic Deep-Sea Expedition
1910 Vol. III. Part I. J. Murray and J. Hjort. eds. The Trustees of the
Bergen Museum. Bergen.
Denton, E. J. 1990. Light and vision at depths greater than 200 meters.
Pp. 127-148 in Light ami Life in the Sea. P. J. Herring. A. K. Campbell.
M. Whittield. and L. Maddock, eds. Cambridge University Press, New
York.
Frank, T. M., and J. F. Case. 1988. Visual spectral sensitivities of
bioluminescent deep-sea crustaceans. Bio/. Bull. 175: 261-273.
Hamner, W. M. 1990. Design developments in the pkmktonkreisel, a
plankton aquarium for ships at sea. / Plankton Res. 12: 397-402.
Hanlon, R. T., and ,1. B. Messenger. 1996. Cephalopod Behaviour.
Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
Harvey, E. N. 1952. Bioluminescence. Academic Press, New York.
Herring, P. J. 1983. The spectral characteristics of luminous marine
organisms. Pruc. R. Soc. Loud. B 220: 183-217.
Herring, P. .1. 1988. Luminescent organs. Pp. 449-489 in The Molluxca
Vol. II. E. R Tru<;man and M. R. Clarke, eds. Academic Press. New
York.
Herring, P. J., P. N. Dilly. and C. Cope. 1987. The morphology of the
bioluminescent tissue of the cephalopod Japetella diaphana (Cepha-
lopoda: Bolitaemdael. / Zoo/. Lund. 212: 245-254.
Herring, P. J., P. N. Dilly, and C. Cope. 1992. Different types of
photophore in the oceanic squids, Octopoteuthis and Tuningiti (Cepha-
lopoda: Octopoteuthidae). J. Zoo/. Loud. 227: 479-491.
Herring, P. J., P. N. Dilly, and C. Cope. 1994. The bioluminescent
BIOLUMINESCENCE IN A DEEP-SEA OCTOPOD
39
organs of the deep-sea cephalopod Vampyroteuthis infemalis (Cepha-
lopoda: Vampyromorpha). J. Zool. Land. 233: 45-55.
Jerlov, N. G. 1976. Marine Optics. Elsevier Scientific Publishing, New York.
Johnsen, S., E. J. Balser, and E. A. Widder. 1999. Light-emitting
suckers in an octopus. Nature 398: 1 13-1 14.
Johnston, I. A., and P. J. Herring. 1985. The transformation of muscle
into bioluminescent tissue in the fish Benlhalbella infans Zugmayer.
Proc. R. Soc. Land. B 225: 213-218.
Kier, W. M., and A. M. Smith. 1990. The morphology and mechanics
of octopus suckers. Bio/. Bull. 178: 126-136.
Kirk. J. T. O. 1983. Light and Photosynthesis in Aquatic Ecosystems.
Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
Mertens, L. E. 1970. In-water Photography: Theory and Practice.
Wiley Interscience, New York.
Morin, J. G., A. Harrington, K. Ncalson, N. Krieger, T. O. Baldwin,
and J. W. Hastings. 1975. Light for all reasons: versatility in the
behavioral repertoire of the flashlight fish. Science 190: 74-76.
Nixon, M., and P. N. Dilly. 1977. Sucker surfaces and prey capture.
Symp. Zool. Soc. Land. 38: 447-5 1 1 .
Packard, A. 1961. Sucker display of Octopus vulgaris. Nature 190:
736-737.
Partridge, J. C., S. N. Archer, and J. Van Oostrum. 1992. Single and
multiple visual pigments in deep-sea fishes. J. Mar. Bio/. Assoc. U.K.
72: 113-130.
Pereyra, W. T. 1965. New records and observations on the flapjack
devilfish Opistoteuthis cali/orniana Berry. Pac. Sci. 19: 427-441.
Robison, B. H., and R. E. Young. 1981. Bioluminescence in pelagic
octopods. Pac. Sci. 35: 39-44.
Roper, C. F. E., and W. L. Brundage. 1972. Citrate octopods with
associated deep-sea organisms: new biological data based on deep benthic
photographs (Cephalopoda). Smithson. Cnntrib. Zool. 121: 1-45.
Vecchione, M. 1987. A multispecies aggregation of curate octopods
trawled from north of the Bahamas. Bull. Mar. Sci. 40: 78-84.
Vecchione, M., and R. E. Young. 1997. Aspects of the functional
morphology of cirrate octopods: locomotion and feeding. Vie Mi/ic'ii
47: 101 -1 10
Villaneuva, R.. and A. Guerra. 1991. Food and prey detection in two
deep-sea cephalopods: Opistoteuthis aga.isizi and O. vossi. Bull. Mar.
Sci. 49: 288-299.
Villaneuva, R., M. Segonzac, and A. Guerra. 1997. Locomotion modes
of deep-sea cirrate octopods (Cephalopoda) based on observations from
video recordings on the Mid-Atlantic Ridge. Mar. Bio/. 129: 1 13-122.
Voight, J. R. 1997. Cladistic analysis of the octopods based on anatom-
ical characters. J. Molluscan Stud. 63: 311-325.
Voss, G. L. 1967. The biology and bathymetric distribution of deep-sea
cephalopods. Stud. Trop. Oceanogr. 5: 51 1-535.
Voss, G. L. 1988. The hiogeography of the deep-sea octopoda. Malaco-
logia 29: 295-307.
Voss, G. L., and W. G. Pearcy. 1990. Deep-water octopods (Mollusca:
Cephalopoda) of the northeastern Pacific. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci. 47:
47-94.
Widder, E. A. 1999. Bioluminescence. Pp. 555-581 in Adaptive Mech-
anisms in the Ecology of Vision. S. N. Archer, M. B. A. Djamgoz. E.
Loew, J. C. Partridge, and S. Vallerga, eds. Kluwer Academic Pub-
lishers. Dordrecht, The Netherlands.
Widder, E. A., M. I. Latz, and J. F. Case. 1983. Marine biolumines-
cence spectra measured with an optical multichannel detection system.
B/o/. Bull. 165: 791-810.
Young, R. E., and J. M. Arnold. 1982. The functional morphology of a
ventral photophore from the mesopelagic squid, Abralia trigonura.
Ma/aco/ogia 23(1): 135-163.
Young, R. E., and T. M. Bennett. 1988. Photophore structure and
evolution within the Enoploteuthidae (Cephalopoda). Pp. 241-251 in
The Mollusca Vol. XII, E. R. Trueman and M. R. Clar! eds. Aca-
demic Press, New York.
Reference: Biol. Bull 197: 40-48. (August 1999)
Long-Term Culture of Lobster Central Ganglia:
Expression of Foreign Genes in Identified Neurons
GEOFFREY K. GANTER, RALF HEINRICH. RICHARD P. BUNGE 1 *,
AND EDWARD A. KRAVITZt
DC/HI rtinent of Neurohiologv, Harvard Medical School, 220 Longwood Avenue, Boston, Massachusetts
021 15: and Miami Project to Cure Paralysis, University of Miami School of Medicine,
Miami, Florida 33136
Abstract. The ventral nerve cords of lobsters (Homarus
americamts) can be cultured /';; vitro for at least 7 weeks.
Over this period, neurons maintain their normal electro-
physiological features and continue, among other measures
of neuronal health, to synthesize RNA and proteins. One
application of this culture system is demonstrated: the ma-
nipulation of gene expression in identified neurons. After
intracellular injection of complementary RNA (cRNA) en-
coding green fluorescent protein (GFP), the amount of pro-
tein product measured by fluorescent confocal microscopy
increases for 4 days and then decreases to background by
day 10. Thus, translation of the injected message must have
increased for 4 days before declining. Moreover, after in-
jection of cRNA encoding j3-galactosidase, the levels of
enzyme activity were measured using a fluorogenic sub-
strate, revealing a peak of /3-galactosidase activity at 6 to 9
days: this activity was still detectable for at least 10 days
after injection.
Therefore, either GFP or /3-galactosidase can be used as
an injectable marker, allowing HI vivo quantitation of ex-
Received 16 December 1998; accepted 21 April 1999.
* This paper is dedicated to the memory of a good colleague and friend.
Dr. Richard P. Bunge. Dick died on September 10. 1996, of esophageal
cancer at the age of sixty-four. He was in the midst of an important project,
that of rebuilding the Miami Project to Cure Paralysis, and in 1989 became
the scientific director of that project. One of us (EAK) had the good fortune
to work with Dick from 1968 to 1969 during his sabbatical visit to our
laboratory in Boston. The organ culture system was developed at that time,
and although these earlier experiments never were published, they are an
important part of our present and future research activities. It is typical of
Dick and his studies that they often were far ahead of their time. We are
honored to include him as an author on this paper.
t To whom correspondence should be addressed. E-mail: edward_kravitz@
hms.harvard.edu
pression in individual cells over time. We measured long-
lasting expression of these proteins after a single injection,
suggesting that it may be possible to manipulate the levels
of expression of any gene of interest.
Introduction
The ventral nerve cord preparation has been a useful tool
for exploring the physiology and pharmacology of central
neurons in the lobster (see Otsuka et ai. 1967; Livingstone
ct /., 1980; Ma and Weiger, 1993). The entire nerve cord,
with the nerve roots sectioned, can be dissected from lob-
sters and maintained in oxygenated saline for up to 36
hours. After the ganglia have been desheathed, the large cell
bodies of central neurons can be identified both by their
positions and by their physiological properties as revealed
in electrophysiological recordings.
In this study, we report an extension of this technique that
allows experiments of at least 7 weeks duration to be carried
out. Longer term experiments that become possible under
these conditions include an exploration of the effects of
manipulation of levels of gene expression. Since activation
of a gene can take several days to affect cells, experiments
of this type were not practical with the short-term prepara-
tions that are commonly used.
Genes from practically any source can be injected into
Xenopits oocytes and the resulting heterologous expression
analyzed (for review, see Dawid and Sargent, 1988). Use of
this technique allows, for example, the effects of point
mutations or deletions in genes to be examined. Although
expression can be characterized in heterologous systems,
the function of cloned genes might be more informatively
explored if they could be expressed in cells of their native
organism. Our studies show that this important option is
40
ORGAN CULTURE AND INJECTION OF NEURONS
41
now available for investigations of the roles of neuronal
genes in the central neurons of the lobster. Moreover, we
can use this technique to express proteins or peptides in
neurons and investigate both the physiological responses of
the neuron and the effectiveness of the introduced sub-
stance.
Injection of DNA or RNA into identified neurons can be
a direct and effective means of altering gene expression in
identified cells. Several investigators have used microinjec-
tion techniques to express genes in invertebrate neural sys-
tems; in particular, the effects of various proteins on syn-
aptic transmission and electrical excitability of neurons
have been determined. For example, Kaang and coworkers
(1992) found that microinjection of DNA encoding an A-
type Shaker potassium channel into Aplysia neurons short-
ened action potentials and thereby had a profound effect on
transmitter release. Expression of a noninactivating potas-
sium channel in another type of Aplysia neuron abolished
spontaneous bursting activity (Zhao et til.. 1994). RNA
encoding the leech homeobox protein Loxl, when injected
into certain types of leech motoneurons, introduced active
spike propagation to proximal neurites (Aisemberg et al.,
1997). In another system. Dearborn and coworkers (1998)
injected rat synapsin 1A1 into crayfish neurons and found
an increase in transmitter release.
In this communication, we present an organ culture sys-
tem that extends the time frame of nerve cord experimen-
tation, allowing for such long-term experiments as the ex-
pression of foreign RNAs in lobster central neurons. We
have induced the expression of green fluorescent protein
(GFP) from the jellyfish Aequoria victoria (Prasher et al.,
1992; Chalfie et al., 1994) and the enzyme /3-galactosidase
from the bacterium Escherichia coli (MacGregor et al.,
1987). Levels of both proteins were measured repeatedly in
individual living cells over several days. Neither of these
proteins interfered with the viability of the cells. These
reagents can be injected either as continuous expression
monitors or as fusion proteins linked with other proteins of
interest (Lalumiere and Richardson, 1995; Gerdes and
Kaether. 1996). This study confirms the effectiveness of the
gene delivery system and our long-term organ culture sys-
tem, a combination that promotes connections between the
disciplines of molecular biology and physiology in the study
of the lobster nervous system.
Materials and Methods
Dissection and neuron identification
Nerve cords were removed from ice-anesthetized adult
lobsters and pinned out in lobster saline as previously de-
scribed (Otsuka et al., 1967; Harris-Warrick and Kravitz,
1984; Ma et al., 1992). After desheathing the abdominal
ganglia and removing the glial layers, we targeted two cell
types for injections. These were identified according to
criteria defined by Otsuka et al. (1967) and included large
glutamate-containing motoneurons (M6/M7). with their ax-
ons projecting through ipsilateral 3rd roots, and GABA-
containing neurons (12), displaying prominent excitatory
synaptic input and projecting through contralateral 3rd roots
to the periphery.
Lobster organ culture system
After experimental manipulation, preparations were
rinsed several times in sterile saline containing penicillin
(50 /u,g/ml). streptomycin (50 /ig/ml) and neomycin (100
fig/ml) (GIBCO/BRL). Nerve cords were rinsed twice in a
modified Leibovitz's L-15 medium, pinned out in ethanol-
and UV-sterilized Sylgard-coated (Dow Corning) petri
dishes (60 mm diameter), and then incubated in the modi-
fied medium. The culture medium contained Leibovitz's
L-15 medium with L-glutamine at 300 mg/1 (GIBCO/BRL)
and with the following additions made to bring the salt
concentration to levels suitable for incubation of lobster
tissues: NaCl was adjusted to 462 mM; KC1 to 16 mM;
CaCU to 26 mM; MgCl 2 to 8 mM; and glucose to 1 1 mM;
HEPES buffer (pH 7.4) at 10 mM (all salts from Sigma);
fetal bovine serum (GIBCO/BRL) at a final concentration of
10%. Antibiotics and antifungal agents were added at the
same concentrations specified above. Nerve cords were
cultured at 16C in an air incubator (Isotemp, Fisher) and
the culture medium was changed twice weekly.
Lobster ganglion labeling and autoradiography
Labeling and autoradiography were carried out according
to the method of Hendelman and Bunge (1969). Lobster
ganglia were incubated in medium containing 10 jaM H-
uridine (RNA labeling) or 10 /J.M 3 H-leucine (protein label-
ing) at high specific activity (New England Nuclear). Tis-
sues were fixed in 2% osmium tetroxide buffered with
veronal acetate (pH 7.4) with added CaCl : (0.05%) (all
chemicals from Sigma). After several washes, ganglia were
dehydrated in a graded ethanol series and embedded in a
mixture of 10 parts Epon 812 (Structure Probe, Inc. (SPD);
10 parts Aralidite 6005 (SPD: 24 parts DOS A (dodecenyl
succinic anhydride. SPI): and 2% DMP-30 (2,4,6-tris(dim-
ethylaminomethyl (phenol, Sigma). Sections of 1-1.5 /am
were cut and autoradiographed at 4C in Ilford L-4 emul-
sion (Ferranti-Dege). Slides were developed with D-19
(Kodak) and mounted in glycerin. Two experimental sets
were examined in detail using this method. In one, pairs of
ganglia were incubated in organ culture for 2 days or for 49
days, before incubation for 4 h in H-leucine or H-uridine,
followed by 20 h of washout in nonradioactive medium,
fixation and processing all as described above. In the second
experimental set, ganglia were cultured for 30 and 45 days
in vitro before labeling, fixation, and autoradiography.
42
G. K. GANTER ET AL
GABA measurements
GABA in single cells was measured by the original assay
method of Jakoby and Scott ( 1959). This method uses the
enzymes GABA-glutamic transaminase and succinic semi-
aldehyde dehydrogenase to generate spectrophotometrically
detectable triphosphopyridine nucleotide (reduced) in direct
proportion to the amount of GABA in a sample. Single-cell-
body isolation, extraction, and enzyme measurements were
carried out as described in Otsuka ct ul. ( 1967).
RNA reagents
Capped GFP cRNA was transcribed from Xhol -linear-
ized pSEM/GFP (generously provided by Richard Dear-
born, see Dearborn ct ul.. 1998) (enzyme from New En-
gland Biolabs) using the CapScribe SP6 kit (Boehringer
Mannheim) and following the manufacturer's instructions.
/3-galactosidase-encoding cRNA was transcribed from
pCMV-SPORT-0-gal (GIBCO/BRL. linearized with Xmnl.
New England Biolabs) by the same method. RNA quality
and quantity were monitored by gel electrophoresis and UV
spectrophotometry. The solutions used for injection con-
tained cRNA at 0.5 to 1 MJ?V alH ' included 0.1 U/ju,l of
RNase inhibitor (RNasin. Promega).
RNA was introduced into the cytoplasm of lobster neu-
rons by pressure injection through an intracellular recording
electrode (pressure at compressor: 5-20 psi). Glass capil-
laries (Drummond Scientific Company) were baked over-
night at 300C to facilitate filling and to remove possible
sources of RNase activity; microelectrodes were pulled (Na-
rishige PE-2) and the tips were broken to less than 4 /im by
tapping them against a fine glass rod under a compound
microscope at 200 x magnification. Electrodes were filled
by first dipping their tips into 2 jul of the electrode solution
(see below) on a small piece of Parafilm (American Na-
tional Can). The remaining solution was picked up using a
pipette tip and injected into the back of the electrode, where
it quickly ran to the tip by capillarity. Electrodes were
mounted in an electrode holder (MEH2RW, World Preci-
sion Instruments (WPI)) fitted with a silver wire long
enough to make electrical contact with the solution in the tip
of the electrode. The electrode wires were treated with
RNaseZap! solution (Ambion), with care taken in loading
the RNA solution to avoid RNase contamination. Potassium
acetate was added to the RNA samples to a final concen-
tration of 0.5 M, along with 0.05% phenol red (Sigma) for
visualization. Control injections revealed that phenol red
did not interfere with the fluorescence detection or the
viability of the cells, and appeared to diffuse out of injected
cells within a few hours. Cells were injected slowly with
RNA solution until the somata appeared slightly red.
DNA reagents
Plasmid DNA was injected in the same way as was the
RNA. Purified DNAs including the following constructs
were injected at concentrations ranging from 0.1 to 5 /J.g//-tl:
(i) Drosophila melanogaster neuron-specific elur promoter
(Yao and White, 1994) driving a /3-galactosidase reporter
gene (gift from Dr. Thomas Schwarz): (ii) human CMV
immediate early enhancer/promoter (Thomsen et ai. 1984)
driving a fusion of the human j3-2 adrenergic receptor and
the At'i/itoriti victoria GFP (gift from Dr. Timothy Mc-
Clintock); and (iii) Drosophila melanogaster heat-shock
inducible promoter from hsp70 (Pelham, 1982) driving
GFP.
Physiological recordings
Intracellular recordings from neuronal somata were per-
formed with glass microelectrodes filled with 1.0 M potas-
sium acetate (12-25 MO resistance). For injections, this
solution was replaced by a mixture of 0.5 M potassium
acetate and the molecular constructs to be injected (3-5 Mil
resistance). Electrical signals were amplified with an Axo-
probe 1A amplifier (Axon Instruments). The cells were
physiologically identified by their synaptic input and anti-
dromic stimulation of their axons in the 3rd roots following
criteria defined by Otsuka and coworkers (1967). Nerve
roots were stimulated by placing their cut ends into closely
fitting suction electrodes. Electrical stimuli were generated
and delivered by a Master-8 stimulus generator (A. M.P.I.)
with built-in isolation units.
Detection of cRNA expression
Injected neurons were periodically monitored, using con-
focal fluorescence microscopy, for GFP expression or for
/3-galactosidase activity. Nerve cords were transferred from
culture vessels to sterile, medium-filled, deep-well micro-
scope slides that had a thin coat of Sylgard on their lower
surfaces. The cords were pinned out, coverslipped. and
observed with a scanning laser confocal microscope
equipped with FITC filters (MRC 600, Bio-Rad). For /3-ga-
lactosidase activity determinations, fluorescein di-(/3-D-ga-
lactopyranosideK Sigma) dissolved in dimethyl sulfoxide to
make a final concentration of 0.67 mg/ml was added to the
medium on ice after the preparation had been transferred to
the slide.
For GFP measurements. 6.5-/xm optical sections were
taken through the cell body region of the injected cell and
images recorded using the confocal microscope's photomul-
tiplier tubes at various times after injection. For /3-galacto-
sidase measurements, a single section was scanned as
quickly as possible after transferring the slide to the micro-
scope, and the increase in fluorescence with time was mea-
sured over the next 35-40 min in periodic scans. Fluores-
ORGAN CULTURE AND INJECTION OF NEURONS
43
cence was quantified by measuring average pixel intensity
for comparable single sections using NIH Image software
(Shareware by Wayne Rasband. National Institutes of
Health). Following each imaging session, preparations were
rinsed again in sterile saline and lobster L- 1 5 and repinned
m the culture dish; the culture was continued at 16C.
Results
Sunivul of central neurons in lon^-terin orifun culture
The ventral nerve cord was removed from an adult lobster
and maintained in a modified Leibovitz L-15 culture me-
dium for at least 7 weeks. Over this period, identified
neurons maintained features typical of their condition in the
short-term preparation routinely used for physiological ex-
periments (usually from 12 to 36 h).
Phvsiology of neurons. The positions of the somata of
many neurons in the lobster ventral nerve cord have been
mapped (Otsuka el al. 1967: Beltz and Kravitz. 1983;
Schwarz el al., 1984; Schneider et al., 1993). Cell bodies
can be reliably and readily identified from preparation to
preparation by their relative sizes, their position in a gan-
glion, their endogenous and nerve-evoked synaptic input,
their spontaneous activity, and by backfiring their axons. To
illustrate, 12, a large GABA-containing inhibitory motor
neuron innervating the fast flexor muscles, was studied in a
preparation maintained for 49 days in culture (Fig. 1). As
shown in the schematic, an intracellular recording electrode
was placed in the putative 12 cell in this ganglion, and
stimulating electrodes were placed on the anterior connec-
tive (point 1) and contralateral 3rd root of the ganglion
(point 2). Stimulation of the contralateral 3rd root led to the
appearance in the cell body of small action potentials (ac-
tion potentials do not invade these somata) that retained a
constant amplitude with increasing intensities of stimula-
tion. No other large cell bodies showing this property were
seen in that location, hence the identification of the cell as
12 is highly likely and further supported by the demonstra-
tion that these neurons contain GABA. In contrast, with
increasing levels of stimulation of the anterior connective
(point 1, Fig. 1, left), excitatory postsynaptic potentials
measured in 12 increased in amplitude, finally generating
action potentials in these cells. This suggests that a progres-
sive recruitment of presynaptic inputs to 12 is occurring, and
that these inputs, too. have survived the long-term organ
culture. When the connective between electrode 1 and the
ganglion was crushed, excitation of 12 via this route was
abolished (Fig. 1, top right), thereby assuring that the re-
sponses seen were not due to current spread from the
stimulating electrode. Resting membrane potentials in 12
and other cells in this and in other experiments were within
normal ranges (50 to 65 mV, data not shown). GABA
was detected in 12 cell somata dissected from organ-cul-
tured ganglia at concentrations normally found in 12 cell
crush ant. conn.
ins
mv
ms
Figure 1. Normal actmt\ in a lobster ganglion maintained in organ
culture for 49 days. While recording intracellularly from an abdominal
GABA-containing cell. \2. the preparation was stimulated from the anterior
connective (point 1 ). Increasing stimulation intensity (left panel, bottom to
top) elicited an increasing excitatory response in 12 (at point 1 1 that finally
triggered an action potential. After the anterior connective was crashed
between the stimulating electrode and the ganglion, the EPSPs in 12
disappeared (upper right). When the 3rd root was stimulated directly (point
2 at right), an antidromic action potential was triggered in 12 and recorded
in the cell body. As expected, the action potential showed no size change
with increasing stimulus intensity.
bodies from freshly dissected preparations [fresh prepara-
tions 0.79 1.75 X 10~'" moles/cell body (mean SD,
= 14) (Otsuka et al.. 1967); 6-week cultures 1.1
7.1 1 X 10"' moles/cell body (mean SD, n = 4)].
Evidence of RNA synthesis by neurons. RNA synthesis
in cultured nerve cords was measured by radiolabeled pre-
cursor incorporation and autoradiography. In Figure 2, one
example is presented. Lobster ganglia maintained in organ
culture for 1 and 49 days were incubated in medium con-
taining 'H-uridine for 4 h. followed by a washout with
unlabeled medium for 20 h. Ganglia were fixed, embedded,
and sectioned, and autoradiography was performed. Silver
grains are readily seen over the nuclei of neurons and glial
cells (Fig. 2). These represent the location of newly synthe-
sized RNA and demonstrate that neurons in long-term cul-
ture still actively transcribe RNA. Qualitatively, we saw
44
G. K. CANTER ET AL
Figure 2. Autoradiography of newly synthesized RNA in lobster gan-
glia maintained for 2 and 49 days in vitro. Ganglia were treated with
3 H-uridine lor 4 h. followed by a chase with unlabeled medium for 20 h.
Following fixation, samples were embedded and sectioned, and autora-
diography was performed. The resulting silver grains clustered primarily at
the nuclei of cells cultured for 2 and 49 days indicate the presence ol
nascent RNA.
little difference in grain density between the 2-day and
49-day organ cultures.
Similar labeling experiments were performed after other
times of incubation with both 3 H-uridine and 3 H-leucine. In
the latter experiments, a cytoplasmic rather than nuclear
distribution of silver grains was noted after autoradiogra-
phy. indicating the synthesis of protein in the cultured
ganglia (data not shown).
Cytology of ganglia. Some indication of overall health
can be seen in the cytology of cultured ganglia. Cells of
ganglia cultured for the longer time period appeared similar
to cells of recently dissected ganglia, although the former
usually had larger spaces between cells (not shown). Rarely,
opaque or darkly colored cells were observed in cultured
lobster ganglia, such as those shown in Figure 3 (bottom
panel). These cells typically had low or no resting potentials
and were likely to be dead or dying. Another feature of
unhealthy cells is their slight autofluorescence (Fig. 3, top).
The bright cell in Figure 3. top panel, is a GFP-expressing
cell. As seen in bright-field illumination (Fig. 3, bottom
panel), the GFP-expressing cell is transparent, whereas the
two weakly fluorescent cells are opaque. The death of these
two cells resulted from experimental DNA injection, de-
scribed below. The numbers of spontaneously unhealthy
cells was generally low throughout the culture period: most
cells and their processes appeared morphologically undis-
tinguishable from their counterparts in freshly dissected
ganglia.
Expression of introduced RNAs in organ-cultured neurons
A single injection of cRNA for either GFP or /3-galacto-
sidase into central neurons in cultured ganglia led to the
synthesis of these proteins. Their presence was detected
with fluorescence and confocal microscopy, either directly
in the case of GFP, or indirectly for (3-galactosidase, by
adding a fluorogenic substrate for the enzyme. Measure-
ments were made by periodically locating the same injected
cell in organ-cultured cords.
Induction of GFP expression. An identified cell, usually
12. M6, or M7, was pressure-injected with the cRNA for GFP
and maintained in organ culture for periods of up to 10 days.
At various time points the injected ganglia were imaged using
a confocal fluorescence microscope to detect and measure GFP
expression. GFP fluorescence in this cell was detected after
one day, increased until day 4. then decreased to background
Figure 3. Comparison of a GFP-expressing neuron with two cells
injected with high concentrations of plasmid DNA, The highly fluorescent
cell seen with epifluorescent illumination (top panel) was injected with
cRNA encoding green fluorescent protein (GFP). After 3 days of incuba-
tion, this cell appeared clear under bright-field illumination (bottom) In
contrast, two cells injected with plasmid DNA fluoresced only \\euklv (lop)
and were opaque under bright-field illumination (bottom). These cells had
poor (or no) resting membrane potentials and resembled untreated cells that
occasionally died during prolonged organ culture.
ORGAN CULTURE AND INJECTION OF NEURONS
45
100-
r 75-
50-
25-
012 4 6 8 10
days post-injection
Figure 4. Time course of GFP expression after injection of cRNA. (Left) A single neuron injected with
GFP-encoding cRNA was photographed, using a confocal fluorescent microscope, at various time points (in
days) following injection. (Right) The intensity of fluorescence increased to a maximum at day 4, then declined
to background at day 10.
by day 10 (Fig. 4). Other cells injected with this cRNA showed
similar patterns of expression.
As the level of GFP fluorescence declined from its peak,
its distribution in injected cells became patchy. In a few
injections. GFP distribution was uniform in the cytoplasm
but later became punctate, and the protein product appeared
to be excluded from certain areas of the cytoplasm. In many
cases, GFP fluorescence was seen in the primary neurite
leaving the cell body (Fig. 5). However, we were unable to
detect a GFP signal in deeper layers of the neuropil. in
connectives, or in peripheral nerves.
Induction of f)-galactosidase expression. Injection ot the
cRNA for /3-galactosidase into cell somata resulted in enzyme
activity detectable in cultured neurons within 2 days. Expres-
sion of this enzyme was determined by using the fluorogenic
substrate fluorescein di-(/3-D-galactopyranoside) to measure
activity. Hence, we did not directly measure the amount of
protein synthesized. Since enzyme activity probably was di-
rectly related to the amount of protein present, levels of ex-
pression of /3-galactosidase apparently peaked between 6 and 9
days after injection. Strong /3-galactosidase activity was still
easily detectable in cultured ganglia 10 days after cRNA in-
jection (Fig. 6). The fluorescence intensity increased rapidly
and close to linearly in a /3-galactosidase-expressing cell fol-
low ing addition of the fluorogenic substrate. Since the fluores-
cent cleavage product leaves the cells within a few hours, the
same cells can be repeatedly tested for /3-galactosidase activity
on consecutive days.
Injection of DNA into lobster neurons
We attempted to induce reporter gene expression by the
cytoplasmic microinjection of plasmid DNA. Identified
cells were injected with DNA constructs containing three
different promoters: the human CMV immediate early en-
hancer/promoter; Drosophila melanogaster hsp70; and D.
melanogaster elav promoter driving either GFP or /3-galac-
tosidase. Injections of low concentrations of DNA (below 1
jug//u,l in the electrode) had no detectable toxic effect on
cells, whereas injections of DNA at concentrations above 1
jug/ju,l led to cell death. Most cells injected with higher
levels of DNA became opaque and autofluorescent within 1
to 2 days (see Fig. 3), and all such cells showed low or no
resting membrane potentials, indicating that they were dead
or in the process of dying. In no case (low or high concen-
trations of DNA). however, did we observe any protein
product expression.
Discussion
We have used an organ culture method to maintain the
isolated central nerve cord of the lobster for up to 7 weeks,
a significant extension beyond the 1 to 2 days previously
possible. During this time RNA and protein synthesis, as
well as physiological activity in identified neurons, ap-
peared normal. This technique makes possible a range of
long-term experiments, including study of the effects of
pharmacological and hormonal treatment on the central
nervous system, and the effects of manipulation of gene
expression in central neurons.
Long-term culture of lobster ventral nerve cord
Ventral nerve cord preparations of crustaceans are valuable
for exploring central circuitries because they allow absolute
identification of neurons (see Otsuka et ui, 1967; Kennedy et
46
G. K. CANTER ET AL
Figure 5. Lobster neuron injected with GFP cRNA. (Top) A
desheathed lobster central ganglion at low magnification. (Middle) High-
magnitication view of an injected cell (center) under bright Held illumina-
tion. (Bottom) The same view in dark field, showing fluorescent signal
from the expressed GFP protein. The signal fills the injected soma and can
be seen in the proximal section of the primary neurite as it descends into
the neuropil.
ill., 1969; Roberts ct al.. 1982; Beltz and Kravitz, 1987; Ma et
til.. 1992; Yehf//.. 1996; Homer et al., 1997). Once exposed
by removal of the connective tissue sheath, the somata of these
neurons are easily visible and accessible to microelectrodes.
Cells occur in predictable arrangements and can be unambigu-
ously identified by their position, size, and activity, and by
backfiring their axons from roots or connectives (Otsuka et al.,
1967). In our laboratory, preparations of this type have been
used to explore the roles of amines in the neural networks
involved in postural regulation ( Harris- Warrick and Kravitz,
1984; Beltz and Kravitz, 1987; Ma et al.. 1992; Weiger and
Ma, 1993). In crayfish, similar preparations have been used to
define changes in synaptic properties accompanying changes
in social status at particular synaptic sites (Yeh et nl.. 1996).
In the organ culture system described here, we showed
that neurons are suitable for electrophysiological experi-
mentation for at least 7 weeks. We used only one example
for illustration. In Figure 1 we showed that the large inhib-
itory motoneuron 12 could be activated by backfiring its
axon at a distance of several centimeters from the cell body,
and that interneurons upstream of 12 still could relay signals
via the release of transmitters. Moreover, in single 12 cells
dissected from long-term organ cultures of ganglia, the
intracellular levels of GAB A were comparable to those
found in cells dissected from fresh preparations.
The autoradiographic studies demonstrated that neurons
in ganglia cultured for 49 days still synthesized RNA (Fig.
2) and protein (data not shown). In addition, at a light
microscopic level, the cytology of cultured neurons ap-
peared normal, except for a somewhat more frequent vacu-
olar appearance of cell somata, and for larger spaces be-
tween cells and neuropil processes. These differences may
result from looser cell packing in the excised and
desheathed ganglia, from degeneration of sensory fibers
from the periphery (Barker et al., 1972), or both.
Cells that do not survive in organ culture appear dark with
light microscopy and their autofluorescence is weak, making
them easy to distinguish from surviving cells. Autofluores-
cence of unhealthy or dead cells has been reported elsewhere
(Linnik et al., 1993; Kosslak et al, 1997), and is a useful way
to prevent making comparisons between these cells and
healthy cells in the cultures (O'Brien et al., 1995). It is impor-
tant to identify such cells so that their fluorescence is not
confused with that of experimental markers like GFP.
GFP and LacZ are suitable expression markers
in lobster neurons
GFP and LacZ (the gene encoding jS-galactosidase) have
been used as reporter and marker genes in studies involving
a wide variety of organisms (see Chalfie. 1995). Lobsters
and crayfish (see Dearborn et al., 1998) now can be added
to the list of organisms capable of expressing these proteins.
The studies presented here, and those reported by Dearborn
et nl. ( 1998), suggest that it may be possible to use GFP and
j8-galactosidase as injection markers, as reporters for tran-
scriptional studies, and as tags that can be fused to proteins
under study in crustacean systems. To illustrate the latter, in
preliminary studies (G. Ganter. unpubl. obs.), we have
found that intracellular injections of cRNAs encoding a
human (3-2 adrenergic receptor/GPP fusion and a lobster
amine receptor/GFP fusion result in fluorescent signals.
Although different cRNAs might show differences in their
rates of translation, thus far all cRNAs that we have injected
have been expressed. Indeed, the different times we noted for
peak detection of jS-galactosidase and GFP could be due to
differences in the translation rates of these two transcripts.
ORGAN CULTURE AND INJECTION OF NEURONS
47
5 10 15 20 25
min. after addition of fluorescein
di-(B-D-galactopyranoside)
Figure 6. |3-galactosidase activity in a lobster neuron maintained 10 days in organ culture alter injection
with LacZ cRNA. /3-galactosidase activity was detected in a living injected cell by addition of a fluorogenic
substrate, fluorescein di-(fJ-D-galactopyranoside). (Left) The cell was photographed, using a confocal fluorescent
microscope, at various time points (in minutes) following addition of the substrate. (Right) The intensity of
fluorescence increased almost linearly
Future uses of the organ culture method
Long-term organ culture offers a controlled environment in
which to perform experiments that were difficult to carry out in
short-term studies using isolated nerve cords. This should
allow us to explore the consequences of applying test sub-
stances to central ganglia in more biologically relevant time
frames. For example, the lobster molting hormone, 20-hy-
droxyecdysone, is likely to have actions at both membrane and
genomic levels (see Zakon, 1998). The genomic effects may
take days to bring about observable changes at synaptic or
circuit levels. The organ culture system offers enough time for
such changes to be seen, in an environment in which tissues
will continue to synthesize the RNA and protein required to
trigger the changes. Long-term drug effects relating to amin-
ergic function also can be examined in the cultured ganglia. At
present we are particularly interested in chronic exposure of
ganglia to Prozac (fluoxetine). In behavioral studies, acute
exposure to Prozac has little effect on agonistic behavior in
lobsters (Huber el ai, 1997); in contrast, chronic exposure
increases the amount of time that animals are willing to fight
(A. Delago, unpubl. obs.).
Another exciting application of the organ culture method
is in the experimental manipulation of gene expression in
identified neurons. The extended time frame makes it pos-
sible to examine the effects of gene expression on the
physiology of cRNA-injected neurons and to analyze cloned
genes in their native environment. For example, the seroto-
nin-containing neurosecretory neurons of lobster appear to
lack the mRNA for the shab form of the potassium channel
(H. Schneider, unpubl. obs.). It would be interesting to
express shab in these neurons, and then examine the con-
sequences of this manipulation on the intrinsic properties of
the injected cell and on the network in which it functions.
Other applications could include injections of sense, anti-
sense, or double-stranded RNAs coding for particular pro-
teins into cells to ask how such manipulations alter function.
These and other applications await further exploitation of
this important system.
Summary and conclusions
We describe an organ culture method that maintains isolated
lobster ganglia in viable states for up to 7 weeks. We have
validated the method, showing that evidence of gene expres-
sion and electrophysiological activity persist throughout the
culture period. Applications include long-term experiments to
examine the consequences of chronic treatment with pharma-
cological or hormonal reagents and of changes to the levels of
expression of particular genes in single neurons and in net-
works of neurons. The ability to introduce genes into lobster
nerve cells should allow analysis of the function of these genes
in their native environment, narrowing the gap between mo-
lecular methods and the study of physiology in this important
system.
48
G. K. CANTER ET AL.
Acknowledgments
We acknowledge Dr. Gary N. Cherr, Dr. Frederick J.
Griffen. and Ms. Carol Vines for help with confocal mi-
croscopy: the staff of the Bodega Marine Laboratory, Dr.
Ernest S. Chang, and Ms. Sharon Chang for providing
technical support, and a rich environment; and the Univer-
sity of California. Davis, for the fellowship support that
funded these studies. We also thank Drs. Margaret Bradley
and Stuart Cromarty for their ideas about the project and
their helpful comments on the manuscript. This research
was supported by a grant from the National Science Foun-
dation (to EAK) and by a post-doctoral fellowship from the
Alexander von Humboldt Foundation (to RH).
Literature Cited
Aisemberg, G. O., T. R. Gershon, and E. R. Macagno. 1997. New
electrical properties of neurons induced by a homeoprotein. J. Neuro-
biol. 33: 11-17.
Barker. D. L., E. Herbert. J. G. Hildebrand. and E. A. Kravitz. 1972.
Acetyleholine and lobster sensory neurons. J. Physitil. 226: 205-229.
Beltz. B. S.. and E. A. Kravitz. 1983. Mapping of serotonin-like im-
munoreaetivity in the lobster nervous system. J. Neiirosci. 3: 585-602.
Beltz. B. S., and E. A. Kravitz. 1987. Physiological identification,
morphological analysis and development of identified serotonin-proc-
tolin containing neurons in the lobster ventral nerve cord. J. Neitroxci.
7: 533-546.
Challie, M. 1995. Green fluorescent protein. I'lioincheni. Pliniohinl. 62:
651-6.
Chalfie, M., Y. Tu, G. Euskirchen, VV. VV. Ward, and D. C. Prasher.
1994. Green fluorescent protein as a marker for gene expression.
Science 263: 802- S04.
Davtid, I. B., and T. I). Sargent. 1988. AVmyw.v lucvis in developmental
and molecular biology. Science 240: 1443-1448.
Dearborn, R. E., Jr., B. G. Szaro, and G. A. Lnenicka. 1998. Micro-
injection of mRNA encoding rat synapsm la alters synaptic physiology
in identified motoneurons of the crayfish. Prucambarua clarkii. J. Neu-
rohiol. 37: 224-236.
Gerdes, H. H.. and C. Kaether. 1996. Green fluorescent protein: appli-
cations in cell biology. FEBS Lett. 389: 44-47.
Harris-Warrick, R. M., and E. A. Kravitz. 1984. Cellular mechanisms
for modulation ol posture by octopamine and serotonin in the lobster.
J. M-/-.H,7. 4: 1976-1993.
Hendelman, W. J., and R. P. Bunge. 1969. Radioautographic studies of
choline incorporation into peripheral nerve myelin. J. Cell Binl. 40:
190-208.
Horner, M., W. A. Weiger, D. H. Edwards, and E. A. Kravitz. 1997.
Excitation of identified serotonergic neurons by escape command neu-
rons in lobsters ./ Ay. Binl. 200: 2017-2033.
Huber, R., K. Smith. A. Delago, K. Isaksson, and E. A. Kravitz. 1997.
Serotonin and aggressive motivation in crustaceans: altering the deci-
sion to retreat. Proc. Nail. Acud. Sci. USA 94: 5939-5942.
Jakoby. VV. B., and E. M. Scott. 1959. Aldehyde oxidation. III. Succmic
semialdehyde dehydrogenase. J. Binl. Client. 234: 937-940.
Kaang, B.-K., P. J. Pfaffinger, S. G. N. Grant, and E. R. Kandel. 1992.
Overexpression of an Aplysia Shaker K ' channel gene modifies the
electrical properties and synaptic efficacy ol identified /\/>/v,v?(/ neurons.
Proc. Nail. Acud. Sci. USA 89: 1 133-1 137.
Kennedy. I)., A. I. Selverstcm, and M. P. Remler. 1969. Analysis of
restricted neural networks. Science 164: 1488-1496.
Kosslak, R. M., M. A. Chamberlin, R. G. Palmer, and B. A. Bowen.
1997. Programmed cell death in the root cortex of soybean root
necrosis mutants. Plant ./. 11: 729-745.
I .iliumc n . M., and C. I). Richardson. 1995. Production of recomhi-
nant baculoviruses using rapid screening vectors that contain the gene
for beta-galactosidase. Mali. Mol. Binl. 39: 161-177.
Linnik, M. D., M. D. Hatfield, M. D. Swope. and N. K. Ahmed. 1993.
Induction of programmed cell death in a dorsal root ganglia X neuro-
hlasioma cell line. J. Netirohiol. 24: 433-446
Livingstone, M. S., R. M. Harris-Warrick, and E. A. Kravitz. 1980.
Serotonin and octopamine produce opposite postures in lobsters. Sci-
ence 208: 76-79.
Ma, P. M., and W. A. Weiger. 1993. Serotonin-containing neurons in
lobsters: the actions of y-aminobutyric acid, octopamine. serotonin, and
proctolin on activity of a pair of identified neurons in the first abdom-
inal ganglion. J. Nenropli\.\iol. 69: 2015-2029.
Ma, P. M., B. S. Beltz, and E. A. Kravitz. 1992. Serotonin-containing
neurons in lobsters: their role as "gain-setters" in postural control
mechanisms. / Neiiniphyxiol. 68: 36-54.
MacGregor, G. R., A. E. Mogg. J. F. Burke, and C. T. Caskey. 1987.
Histochemkal staining of clonal mammalian cell lines expressing E.
culi beta-galactosidase indicates heterogeneous expression of the bac-
terial gene. Somatic Cell Mol. Genet. 13: 253-265.
O'Brien, M. C., and VV. E. Bolton. 1995. Comparison of cell viability
probes compatible with fixation and pemieabilization for combined
surface and intracellular staining in flow cytometry. Cyitnnetry 19:
243-255.
Otsuka, M., E. A. Kravitz. and D. D. Potter. 1967. The physiological and
chemical architecture of a lobster ganglion with particular reference to
gamma-aminobutyrate and glutamate. J. Neurophysiol. 30: 725-752.
Pelham, H. R. 1982. A regulatory upstream promoter element in the
DriKopliilu h.\p70 heat-shock gene. Cell 30: 517-528.
Prasher, D. C., V. K. Eckenrode, VV. W. Ward, F. G. Prendergast, and
M. J. Cormier. 1992. Primary structure of the Act/norm \-tctoria
green-fluorescent protein. Gene 111: 229.
Roberts. A., F. B. Krasne, G. Hagiwara. J. J. Wine, and A. P. Kramer.
1982. Segmental giant: evidence for a driver neuron interposed be-
tween command and motor neurons in the crayfish escape system.
J. Neiimnliyuol. 47: 761-781.
Schneider, H.. B. Trimmer, J. Rapus, M. Eckert. D. Valentine, and
E. A. Kravitz. 1993. Mapping of octopamine-immunoreactive neu-
rons in the central nervous system of the lobster. ./. Com/'. Nenrol. 329:
129-142.
Schwarz, T. L., G. M.-H. Lee, K. K. Siwicki, D. G. Standaert, and E. A.
Kravitz. 19S4. Proctolin in the lobster: the distribution, release, and
chemical characterization of a likely neurohormone. J. Ncurotci. 4:
1300-131 I.
Thnmsen, D. R.. R. M. Stenberg, VV. F. Goins. and M. F. Stinski. 1984.
Promoter-regulatory region of the major immediate early gene of
human cytomegalovirus. Proc. Null. Aaul. Sci. L/SA 81: 659-663.
Weiger, W. A., and P. M. Ma. 1993. Serotonin-containing neurons in
lobsters: the actions of ganima-aniinobutync acid, octopamine. seroto-
nin and proctolin on ncuronal activity. ./. iVcnro/iliy\iol 69: 2015-2029.
Vao, K.-M.. and K. White. 1994. Neural specificity ol <7440 h) and under a variety of
behavioral circumstances. The natural behavior of the squid
was filmed on spawning grounds off Cape Cod (northwest-
ern Atlantic), and behavioral trials in the laboratory were
run in large tanks. The body pattern components 34 chro-
matic (including 4 polarization components). 5 postural, and
12 locomotor are each described in detail. Eleven of the
most common body patterns are also described. Four of
them are chronic, or long-lasting, patterns for crypsis: an
example is Banded Bottom Sitting, which produces disrup-
tive coloration against the substrate. The remaining seven
patterns are acute; they are mostly used in intraspecific
communication among spawning squids. Two of these acute
patterns Lateral Display and Mate Guarding Pattern are
used during agonistic bouts and mate guarding; they are
visually bright and conspicuous, which may subject the
squids to predation; but we hypothesize that schooling and
diurnal activity may offset the disadvantage presented by
Received 1 February 1999; accepted 20 April 1999.
E-mail: rhanlon@nihl.edu
increased visibility to predators. The rapid changeability
and the diversity of body patterns used for crypsis and
communication are discussed in the context of the behav-
ioral ecology of this species.
Introduction
Cephalopods have a highly developed system of visual
communication that is expressed mainly through the skin.
The distinguishing features of this remarkable chromato-
phore system are its speed of change and the diversity of
body patterns that each individual uses for either crypsis or
communication (Hanlon and Messenger. 1996). A body
pattern is defined as the total appearance of the animal at
any given time, and includes the expression of the full
complement of chromatic (i.e.. color or visual), textunil.
postural, and locomotor components (see Packard and
Hochberg. 1977; Hanlon and Messenger, 1996). Among the
components of the body pattern, the most conspicuous are
chromatic, although squids probably perceive intraspecific
signals monochromatically because cephalopods are
thought to be color blind (Hanlon and Messenger, 1996).
These chromatic components are produced primarily by
chromatophore organs and various reflective cells in the
dennis, and they are discrete neural entities (just as postural,
textural. and locomotor components are) because the chro-
matophore organs are controlled by radial muscles under the
direct control of the posterior chromatophore lobes in the
brain (e.g.. Dubas et al.. 1986). Most of the reflective cells
are also controlled by the squid (Cooper et al., 1990). This
neural control enables the cephalopod to change its appear-
49
50
R. T. HANLON ET AL
ance in a fraction of a second, depending upon the visual
sensory input it receives during behavioral interactions.
Few. if any. animals can match the speed of change and
diversity of cephalopod signals, and the body patterns are
used in most behavioral interactions, whether they be for
competition for resources or mates, or interactions between
predators and prey. We are documenting these diverse body
patterns, focusing primarily on adult squids during their
inshore migration every year.
Squids, like other cephalopods, are sensitive to the partial
polarization characteristics of light (Saidel et ai. 1983;
Hanlon and Messenger. 1996; for a description of polarized
light see Kattawar. 1994; Wolff and Andreou. 1995).
Shashar and Hanlon (1997) described a few specific polar-
ization components of squid and correlated these patterns
with the distribution of iridophore cells in the animals' skin.
In cuttlefish, partial polarization patterns have been associ-
ated with communication (Shashar et ai, 1996). Since
squids may use polarization patterns for intraspecific com-
munication, and since polarization-sensitive predators may
be looking for polarization contrasts to locate squid prey, we
also document here some polarization components pre-
sented by the squid.
The long-tinned squid Loligo pealei Lesueur, 1821, is a
renowned model in neuroscience research. The third-order
giant axon. its attendant giant synapse, the complex eye, and
several other organ systems in L. pealei have been studied
in detail for over 50 years at the Marine Biological Labo-
ratory (MBL) in Woods Hole (see Gilbert et til., 1990).
Although a great deal is known about the peripheral nervous
system of L. pen lei. little is known about the behaviors of
this squid, which like most cephalopods, has an enormous
brain relative to its body size. Loligo pealei is also a
valuable commercial resource in the northeastern United
States worth about $30 million annually (McKiernan and
Pierce. 1995; NEFSC, 1995). Curiously, little is known
about the ecology, life history, and behavior of this species
(e.g., Verrill. 1880; Drew. 191 1; Stevenson. 1934; Griswold
and Prezioso, 1981; Summers, 1983; Gilbert et al. 1990;
Brodziak and Macy. 1996). The present report is part of a
broad-based study that focuses on sexual selection pro-
cesses in L. pealei from two perspectives: as a test of sexual
selection theory (e.g.. Hanlon. 1996; Hanlon et til.. 1997)
and as a study of the role that reproductive behavior plays in
the life history and population dynamics of the species
(Hanlon. 1998).
Materials and Methods
The behavior of Loligo pealei can be observed both in a
natural setting and in the laboratory because the squids
habituate quickly to divers and to laboratory surroundings.
Overall, 27.5 h of videotape were analyzed for body pat-
terning and behavior.
During the months of May 1996. May 1997, and May
1998. 103 scuba dives were made on squid spawning
grounds by RTH and NS off the southern arm of Cape Cod,
Massachusetts. Depths ranged from 3-10 m and most sites
were within 2 km of shore between Hyannis and Chatham.
Spawning squids were found mostly in or near commercial
weir traps whose inner pocket dimensions (or capture arena)
were roughly 20 m 2 ; often there were many thousands of
squids in these traps, with a proportion of them actively
engaged in reproductive behavior. Water temperatures
ranged from about 4 to 13C. currents were often strong,
and visibility was usually poor. On about one-third of the
dives, conditions were suitable for video. In total. 16.5 h of
dive video were recorded, using video cameras (either an-
alog or digital) in underwater housings, and analyzed, with
multi-motion playback machines and high-resolution mon-
itors.
Laboratory trials of mating behavior were performed
from May through October in 1996, 1997. and 1998 in the
Marine Resources Center of the MBL. Three large tanks
were used, each measuring 3 m (diameter) by 1 m (height)
and containing about 28,000 1 of seawater. Each tank had a
substrate of mixed gravel and sand, and a continuous supply
of ambient seawater. Animals were acquired by squid jig-
ging (both at night and during the day) off the MBL re-
search vessel Gemma in Vineyard and Nantucket Sounds.
This method minimizes skin damage for maximal survival
in captivity (see Hanlon el al., 1983). Squids were fed live
fish (Fundiihis sp.) daily. Trials involved from three to eight
squids in various combinations of males and females. One
set of trials was performed in an outdoor pond, 20 m X 20 m
X 1 m deep, at the Environmental Systems Laboratory of
the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution. The squids
were observed for 440 h in captivity. 1 1 of which were
recorded on video.
All videos were reviewed multiple times, each time look-
ing for only one category of component (i.e.. first viewing
for chromatic components, second viewing for postural
components, third viewing for locomotor components). In
the laboratory, chromatic, postural, and locomotor compo-
nents were recorded on separate data sheets each time they
were seen. A chromatic component was recorded if it was
expressed for at least 2 s; locomotor and postural compo-
nents were recorded if they were performed for at least 3 s.
All chromatic components were illustrated using a computer
graphics program.
Polarization components were recorded using a video
polarimeter based on a standard three-tube ENG camera
(JVC BY-110) that uses a dichroic prism block for color
separation. The dichroic prism has been replaced with a
custom-made neutral prismatic splitter (Richter Enterprises,
SQUID BODY PATTERNING AND BEHAVIOR
51
Manhattan Beach, CA) such that each of the three video
channels receives 1/3 of the broad-spectrum image input.
Since this assembly lacks the color-trimming filters ce-
mented to the original dichroic prism, magnification errors
due to pathlength differences were corrected with small
quartz discs of appropriate thickness. A small disc of sheet
polarizer (Polaroid, HNP'B) was placed immediately in
front of each camera tube to impart polarization sensitivity
to the channels. The orientation of the polarizers was ad-
justed so that the color channels now encoded 0, 45, and
90 polarization images. The camera electronics encode the
three polarization channels as if they were color, making it
possible to store all the data on a regular portable videocas-
sette recorder and allowing for immediate viewing of a
pseudocolor polarization image on a color monitor. Nonpo-
larizing elements of the scene have no color, whereas po-
larizing elements do. The signal in all three channels is
identical, and the output of the tubes was adjusted to give
white for a saturating faceplate intensity. A polarizer placed
in front of the lens such that horizontally polarized light is
freely transmitted produces the following normalized sig-
nals in the three "color" channels: the R channel signal is 1,
the G channel is 0.707, and the B channel is 0. Monochro-
matic images of the same scene, taken from the three
channels separately, were transferred through a frame grab-
ber into the computer and their linear polarization charac-
teristics were analyzed following procedures in Cronin et al.
(1994). This camera is better suited than previously de-
scribed polarimeters (Cronin et al., 1994; Wolff and An-
dreou, 1995; Horvath and Varju, 1997) for recording the
polarization patterns of moving animals, because it provides
true instantaneous measurements. Technological limitations
made it impossible to get the camera in an underwater
housing; thus measurements were limited to the laboratory.
Furthermore, the light conditions during measurements had
to be precisely controlled, thereby allowing only 3 h of
recorded footage. During these periods, the squids exhibited
only a few behaviors that included fighting, mate guarding,
and egg laying.
Ethogram
We constructed an ethogram for Loligo pealei on the
basis of our field and laboratory observations. The compo-
nents and body patterns identified (Table I) represent a
segment of all behaviors, especially those related to repro-
duction. In fact, because of the size of the sample, most of
the patterning components of the species were probably
identified. The more than 440 h of observation far exceed
the observation periods in other published accounts of Lo-
ligo spp. (e.g., Hanlon, 1982, 1988; Hanlon et al., 1983,
1994; Porteiro et al., 1990).
The chromatic components of the ethogram are illustrated
in Figures 1 and 3, and some of the postural components are
shown in Figure 2. Unlike octopuses and cuttlefishes, loli-
ginid squids do not show textural components in the skin.
Table I, which lists all components, includes the number of
times that we counted a component on videotape or from
observation notes, giving an impression of how commonly
it occurs. Unless otherwise indicated, all components and
body patterns were shown by both sexes.
Light
' components
Chromatic components are produced mainly by the action
of dermal chromatophore organs, which number in the
hundreds of thousands in an adult squid. Loligo pealei has
three color classes of chromatophores: yellow, red, and
brown. Expansion of the chromatophores darks the skin,
while retraction of the chromatophores (and the resultant
expression of underlying iridophores) produces a lightening
or even brightening effect. Intense darkness produced by
maximal expansion and intense brightness produced by
maximal retraction mark two ends of a chromatic contin-
uum, and thus it is somewhat arbitrary to assign a compo-
nent to light or dark. Some of these components are com-
mon to other Loligo spp., as described by Hanlon ( 1982) for
Loligo plei, by Porteiro et ul. ( 1990) for Loligo forbesi, and
by Hanlon et al. ( 1994) for Loligo vulgaris reynaudii.
Clear is retraction of all or most chromatophores, thus
rendering the animal translucent in clear water or white in
murky water. In clear water, when viewed against a sand
bottom or laterally against the aquatic background (Fig.
2B), the translucence renders the squid cryptic, or camou-
flaged, and often the Dorsal iridophore splotches are ex-
pressed simultaneously. Internal organs, such as the red
accessory nidamental gland in females, are often visible. In
murky water. Clear appears bright white in most lighting
circumstances (i.e., the brightness surpasses the albedo of
the greenish water, producing a whitish color). In the im-
mediate vicinity of egg beds, the white form of Clear seems
to function as an intraspecific signal to repel other squids; a
squid displaying this component is almost always engaged
in mate guarding, egg laying, or agonistic bouts (see Fig.
2C). White arms/head results from variable retraction of
chromatophores on the head and arms (three variations are
illustrated in Fig. 1 ). This component sometimes preceded
all white (or clear) in intraspecific encounters; thus, it ap-
pears to be a milder signal of alarm or repellent to approach-
ing squids (Fig. 2G). White head/arms is most common in
paired females near eggs and is seen when unpaired males
approach. White dorsal stripe is retraction of chromato-
phores along a dorsal mantle that is otherwise dark; the
stripe may be short or long (Fig. 1). It has been seen in
52
R. T. HANLON ET AL
Table I
Body patients and their components in the squid Loligo pealei; compare Figure 1
BODY PATTERNS
Chronic (mm to hours)
1. Basic Amber Pattern
2. Clear Body Pattern
3. Countershading
4 Chronic AM Dark
5. Banded Bottom Sitting
6. Chronic Bright White Pattern
Acute (seconds)
1. Very Dark
2. Blanch-Ink-Jet Maneuver
3. Lateral Display
4. Mate Guarding Pattern
5. Accentuated Testis
COMPONENTS*
Chromatic
Light:
1 . Clear
2. White arms/head
3. White dorsal stripe
4. Accentuated testis (m)
5. Accentuated oviducal gland (f)
Iridescent:
6. Dorsal mantle collar indophores
7. Iridescent sclera
8. Dorsal iridophore splotches
9. Iridescent arm stripes
10. Dorsal iridophore sheen
Light polarization components:
1 . Polarized arms
2. Skin surface polarization
3. Polarized eyes
4. Polarized dorsal sheen
(861)
(769)
(194)
(1179)
(183)
(a 1000)
(167)
(500)
(338)
(32)
Dark:
1. All dark
2. Dark arms/head
3. Dark head
4. Dark dorsal stripe
5. Ventral mantle stripe
6. Mantle margin stripe
7. Dark arm stripes
8. Fin spots
9. Arm spots
10. Intraocular spot
11. Bands
12. Shaded eye
13. Dark fins
14. Dark posterior mantle
15. Shaded testis (m)
16. Shaded oviducal gland (f)
17. Red accessory nidamental gland (f)
18. Lateral mantle spot (f)
19. Lateral blush If)
20. Weak lateral flame (m)
(1440)
(133)
(853)
(47)
(369)
(283)
(38)
(195)
(672)
(129)
(153)
(190)
(31)
(42)
(11)
(16)
(-200)
(147)
(88)
(13)
Locomotor
1. Inking
(12)
2. Jetting/fleeing
(336)
3. Chasing
(17)
4. Bottom sitting
(45)
5. Egg touching
(120)
6. Parallel positioning
(435)
7. Jockeying and parrying (m)
(62)
X, Fin beating (in)
(93)
9. Forward lunge/grab (m)
(206)
10. Male-parallel mating
(59)
1 1 . Head-to-head mating
(24)
12. Oviposition
( = 300)
Postural
1 Raised arms
1 1065)
2. Splayed arms
(667)
3. Drooping arms
(54)
4 Raised & splayed arms
(560)
5. Flared arms
(30)
* Letters in parentheses indicate that the component is sex-specific: f = female; m = male. Numbers indicate how many times each component was
observed on video or in laboratory trials.
Clear
SQUID BODY PATTERNING AND BEHAVIOR
All dark
53
Accentuated oviducal eland (0
Dorsal mantle
Iridescent sclera collar indophojs
Dorsal iridophore splotches
v
Iridescent arm stripes
Dorsal iridophore sheen
Shaded oviducal gland (f)
-~r^"
llatcnil vicwt
Mantle margin stripe
Fin spots
Arm spots
Bands (with variations)
Red accessory nidamental eland (f)
Lateral mantle spot (f)
Figure 1. Chromatic components of body patterning in the squid Loligo pealei. The arrangement generally
follows Table I and the text.
54
R. T. HANLON ET AL.
Figure 2. Underwater video images of selected components and body patterns of Laligo pealei. (A) The
chronic Basic Amber Pattern. (B) The chronic Clear Body Pattern. (C) The chronic Bright White Pattern amidst
other squids in Basie Amber. (D) The chronic All Dark pattern viewed against a sand substrate. (E) The Banded
Bottom Sitting pattern showing disruptive coloration against a gravel substrate. (F) Acute Mate Guarding Pattern
shown by a large consort male (female is just below him) showing the Splayed arm posture and the Accentuated
testis chromatic component. (G) Raised arms postural component in a male that also shows the chromatic
component of While arms/head; he is directing this signal to the lone male at upper left as he guards his female
mate (barely visible behind him).
Intensity
SQUID BODY PATTERNING AND BEHAVIOR 55
Partial polarization Orientation of polarization
B
D
0.25 0.5 0.75 1.0
Figure 3. Selected images demonstrating the main sources of polarization components in adult squids.
LEFT: Black-and-white images of the squid. CENTER: Partial polarization images in which black represents
unpolarized light -0, and white represents full linear polarization -1. RIGHT: Orientation of polarization;
horizontal polarization is coded into white or black, and vertical polarization into 50% grey. Special iridophores
on the arms create the predominant components (A, B). where the partial polarization can exceed 0.75. The
orientation of polarization can be equal on all arms (A) or it can vary between them (B, indicated by arrows).
Structural reflection from the skin-water interface can produce a polarization pattern that changes with the
animal's motion (C). The reflection from the sclera of the eye may be highly polarized (D, arrow). The top of
the mantle of the squid occasionally reflects light that is partially polarized (E). This polarization may arise from
structural reflection, as in C. or from reflection by the indophores on the squid's mantle or splotches (Shashar
and Hanlon. 1997).
56
R. T. HANLON ET AL
consort males when an intruder male approaches. Accentu-
ated testis is u male-only component shown when the
chromatophores directly above the testis are retracted while
the squid mantle is otherwise dark, thus accentuating the
whiteness of the organ (Fig. 2F). This component was seen
frequently in single or mate-paired males when reproductive
behavior was actively occurring in the school. Accentuated
oviducal gland is a female-only component analogous in
form and function to Accentuated testis in the male. This
was often seen in females paired with consort males. All of
these light components except White dorsal stripe have been
seen commonly in other Loligo spp.
Light iridescent chromatic components
Each of the light iridescent chromatic components is
common to Loligo spp., and comparable color images
may be viewed in Hanlon (1982). Dorsal mantle collar
iridophores are on the anteriormost portion of the man-
tle, and they appear as bright yellow or pink iridescence;
this component tends to produce disruptive coloration by
breaking up the longitudinal aspect of the squid's body.
It and the next component are usually seen on calm
squids near the bottom in the Clear pattern. Dorsal iri-
dophore splotches occur on the dorsal mantle and head.
They are a distinctive yellow or golden color, and they
help to produce general camouflage (Fig. 2E). Iridescent
arm stripes extend most of the length of the first three
pairs of arms. These are usually expressed lightly during
camouflage in the Clear pattern, but during agonistic
encounters they can be expressed very brightly (see color
illustration in Hanlon. 1982). Iridescent sclera is the
bright silver iridescence on the back (or sclera) of the
eye; squids have the ability to obscure this with chro-
matophores with the Shaded eye component. Dorsal iri-
dophore sheen is somewhat rare and is only noticeable
from the side. Its function is unclear but may aid cam-
ouflage in open water by disrupting the body shape. None
of these are unique to L. pealei but are shared by other
Loligo spp.
Light polarization chromatic components
These linear polarization components are newly de-
scribed for Loligo spp. Polarized arms are highly polarized
reflections that create the most conspicuous component of
polarization (Fig. 3A, B). This component often exceeds
partial polarization of 0.75, which is noteworthy because
Flamarique and Hawryshyn ( 1997) showed that the natural
underwater light field rarely exhibits partial polarization as
high as 0.67. The orientation of polarization can be equal in
all arms (Fig. 3A), or it may differ between arms (Fig. 3B).
Skin surface polarization results from the difference in
refractive indexes between the squid's body and the water,
so that light reflected from any area of the skin may be
partially polarized (Fig. 3C). However, the partial polariza-
tion in this case is mostly low, rarely reaching 0.5. Polar-
ized eyes result from reflection by iridophore cells that
surround the eye (Fig. 3D, arrow). The dorsal mantle occa-
sionally reflects light that is partially polarized, resulting in
Polarized dorsal sheen. The orientation of polarization can
vary, reaching 20 degrees from horizontal. This polarization
reflection corresponds to the area of the Dorsal iridophore
sheen, although the two components do not always coincide
in time. The source of this polarization component can be
either reflection from iridophores on the mantle or Skin
surface polarization. Owing to the limitations of the equip-
ment used to record polarization patterns, these are probably
not the only polarization components that squids can show.
Dark chromatic components
All dark is the opposite of Clear: all or most chromato-
phores are expanded to some degree. The maximal expres-
sion of All dark (Fig. 2D) produces an overall deep brown
coloration; it is characteristic of alarmed squids. However,
the chromatophores need not be maximally expanded, and
thus there are ranges of darkness. Often squids are in a
"normal" or "basic" coloration that is roughly between
Clear and All dark, producing an overall amber body pattern
(Fig. 2A). There is also a striking unilateral expression of
All Dark (Fig. 1 ). Dark arms/head is variable in expression
(see Fig. 1) and is opposite to White amis/head. It is seen
typically in mating pairs and may represent a mild state of
alarm. Dark head is expansion of all the chromatophores
around the head of the animal (but not the arms), causing the
head to appear almost black. This component is frequently
seen in mate pairs near the egg mop and probably represents
a low-grade alarm signal.
Four striped components occur in L. pealei, one used for
crypsis and three used during intraspecific agonistic con-
tests. Dark dorsal stripe extends halfway or fully down the
mid-dorsal mantle. Seen mainly on calm squids, it appar-
ently aids camouflage because it covers some of the bright
organs such as the testis, oviducal glands, and ink sac.
Ventral mantle stripe is a thin, distinct line of fully ex-
panded chromatophores. L. pealei. in contrast to L. plei but
in common with L vulgnris reymnulii. L. vulgaris, and L.
forbesi, shows no protrusile flap of skin when exhibiting this
component (Hanlon, 1988; Hanlon ct ai, 1994). The func-
tion of this component is uncertain, but it is seen commonly
on mating pairs and on males during mate guarding. Males
often swim just above females, and pairs are frequently
approached by other squids from below, so the ventral
SQUID BODY PATTERNING AND BEHAVIOR
positioning of this visual signal may be useful. It is also
possible that the stripe helps disrupt the body form when
viewed from below by predators. Mantle margin stripe is
a dark line running along the fin insertion. It was seen most
often as a mild reaction to disturbance or alarm during
agonistic bouts, and was usually expressed in conjunction
with Ventral mantle stripe. Fin spots, and weak Lateral
flame (see below). Dark arm stripes are variable, being
expressed either along the third pair of arms or along pairs
1, 2, and 3. This uncommon component was seen on a
female that also expressed Dark fins (also uncommon, see
below) just before a male mated her, and as another mating
pair bumped into them. Thus it seems to be an expression of
alarm when all three arm pairs are darkened. The simulta-
neous expression of stripes on three arm pairs has not been
reported for squids.
Three spotted components are expressed during alarm or
threat situations, mainly intraspecifically, and can be shown
unilaterally on the side towards the other squid. Fin spots
are a collection of small circular and oval dark spots scat-
tered across the fins. This component is seen mostly during
agonistic bouts or rarely when an aggressive male comes
close by. Arm spots are small and occur at the base of the
third arms, the second arms, or both. This component is seen
on males during mate guarding and at the early stages of
agonistic encounters; it probably constitutes a low grade of
alarm (see also Arnold, 1962, 1990). Intraocular spot
appears directly in front of the eye and has variations,
including a circular shape that looks like an eye ring. The
avenue of achieving signals of "increasing alarm" appears
to be Arm spots > Infraocular spot > expanded to eye
ring > Dark head.
Various other dark components include two for crypsis
and four for intraspecific alarm situations. Bands are vari-
able (see Figs. 1 and 2E) and may occur on the fins, head,
or arms. First reported by Stevenson (1934), this component
is seen typically in calm, bottom-sitting squids and func-
tions as disruptive coloration to break up the longitudinal
outline of the squid. Shaded eye is a transverse head bar of
expanded chromatophores that may aid crypsis by covering
the bright Iridescent sclera of the eyes. Dark fins occur
when all fin chromatophores are expanded maximally; it is
not common but has been seen on females that are alarmed.
Dark posterior mantle is similar to Dark fins, but the
mantle chromatophores are expanded; it may be the next
stage of alarm after Dark fins.
Several dark components associated with reproductive
behavior complement the light components Accentuated
testis and Accentuated oviducal gland. Shaded testis and
Shaded oviducal gland are selective expansion of chro-
matophores over the testis or oviducal gland. Both are often
indistinct and serve to mask these bright white organs, thus
aiding crypsis. However, the complementary "shading/ac-
centuating" allows rapid signaling. The Red accessory ni-
damental gland can be seen through the translucent mantle
and occurs only in fully mature females, so it may be a part
of communication even though it is internal. Since it turns
red only upon attainment of full sexual maturity, it may be
a sign of female sexual maturity or even receptivity. Lateral
mantle spot is a female-only component expressed as a
small intense dark spot of chromatophores near the anterior
fin insertion. It coincides roughly with the position of the
Red accessory nidamental gland, and the two may function
together in some way. The Lateral mantle spot is seen only
when the female is paired with a large consort male, and
could indicate either receptivity or rejection. Lateral blush
is a female-only component expressed unilaterally as a
diffuse dark area on the lateral mantle. It may be compara-
ble to a variety of similar components shown by female
squids, and it may function as a repellent to courting males
(Hanlon and Messenger, 1996: their fig. 6.21).
Weak lateral flame is a male-only component produced
by longitudinally oriented rows of partly expanded chro-
matophores. It is seen during low-grade agonistic contests.
There are several variations of this component in other
Loligo spp., the most well developed and dramatic of which
is in Loligo plci (Hanlon, 1982; DiMarco and Hanlon,
1997). In Loligo vulgaris, Loligo vulgaris reynaudii, and
Loligo forbesi there are Lateral mantle streaks that are
arranged a bit differently in the skin, but they all function to
provide a lateral signal to an opposing male. Loligo pealei
has perhaps the weakest expression of this component,
while L. plei has the strongest.
Postural components
Five postural components are expressed through the arm
positioning of Loligo pealei. They are generally comparable
to postures seen in other Loligo spp. Raised arms (Fig. 2G)
is the unilateral or bilateral raising of the first pair of arms,
which may be light or dark, and is seen in both males and
females on the mating grounds. This component appears to
be a signal of alarm during agonistic contests. It was pre-
viously reported by Arnold (1962, 1990). Splayed arms
(Fig. 2F) is a posture in which all eight arms are spread and
flattened on the horizontal plane. This posture is expressed
by both sexes but is most common in males that use it to
guard female mates they are escorting to egg mops. Raised
and splayed arms are a combination of the previous pos-
tures in which the arms are all splayed except for the first
pair, which is raised; it is a strong signal of alarm used when
a rival male approaches closely. Drooping arms in a swim-
ming squid is a posture in which all the arms appear relaxed
and hang downward, but its function is unknown. Flared
arms is a rare posture in which all of the arms are held
58
R. T. HANLON ET AL
stiffly outward in a radial manner; it is seen during highly
aggressive agonistic encounters between two males, and
during mate guarding.
Locomotor components
Inking is the expulsion of ink mixed with mucus, either
in small puffs or as a large dense cloud (Hanlon ct /.,
1994). Inking is often followed by Jetting/fleeing, which is
a rapid jet-propulsed escape used in avoidance of both
predators and conspecifics. Females often jet from males
that try to swim with them or copulate with them. Chasing
occurs when one squid actively pursues another, usually in
forward swimming. In most cases a male is pursuing an-
other male at the conclusion of an agonistic bout. Bottom
sitting occurs when a squid rests on the substrate (Fig. 2E).
Egg touching consists of contacts with an egg mop by both
males and females. Contact ranges from brief, exploratory
touches to embraces of an egg capsule with all of the arms.
Females usually lay eggs on existing egg mops, and touch-
ing may be a way of assessing the egg-laying substrate.
Males commonly touch eggs, and touching is often fol-
lowed by highly aggressive agonistic bouts (Hanlon, 1996),
suggesting that the eggs provide a visual, tactile, or perhaps
chemosensory stimulus. Parallel positioning occurs when
two animals are hovering or swimming parallel to one
another in the same direction, within one body length or
each other. Courting pairs maintain this position, and ago-
nistic encounters begin with this movement. Jockeying and
parrying (in, males only) occur when two males maneuver
to get next to a female. A successful paired male will often
ward off (or parry) the jockeying movements of the un-
paired male in a long sequence of swimming maneuvers.
Fin beating (m) occurs in the parallel position when two
males maneuver themselves so that they are beating their
fins against each other. This is a physical and escalated stage
of an agonistic context, but it results in no obvious physical
damage. Forward lunge/grab (m) is a short, fast movement
to bluff or grab another male during agonistic contests. The
grab sometimes results in grappling in which the squids
attempt to bite each other. It is rare and is the highest
escalation of a fight. Male-parallel mating occurs when the
male positions himself under the female and grasps her
anterior mantle to pass spermatophores into her mantle
cavity. Head-to-head mating occurs when a male and
female face each other, and the male grasps the female's
arms. Spermatophores are placed in a seminal receptacle
below the mouth (Drew, 1911). Oviposition (f, females
only) occurs when the female extrudes a single egg capsule
and affixes it to the substrate or to existing communal egg
masses; she does not hold the egg capsule for long. Among
these, egg touching is newly described for Loligo spp.,
although other species do this to varying degrees.
Body patterns
Chronic patterns last for minutes or hours. There are four
general chronic body patterns that are common on calm
squids and function as crypsis. The Basic Amber Pattern
(Fig. 2A) is the most common and long-lasting body pattern
observed in Loligo pealei, and it occurs while the squids are
hovering, gently rocking back and forth, or swimming
slowly. It is characterized by a partial expansion of all
chromatophores (i.e., the All dark component). Apparently
the squid detects the albedo in the immediate vicinity and
neurally adjusts chromatophore expansion to match it, thus
achieving crypsis by matching its surroundings. This pattern
can grade into a lighter Clear Body Pattern (Fig. 2B) with
expression of the Dorsal iridophore splotches; this is seen
both when squids are swimming just above the substrate and
when they are in the water column. Another subtle variation
of these two patterns is Countershading, in which the
chromatophores on the dorsal surfaces of the squid are in a
rather uniform light expansion (as in Clear or Basic Amber)
while the ventral portions of the animal are light (probably
with help from the many iridophores in the dermis; see
Cooper ct ai. 1990; Hanlon et ul.. 1990) to eliminate the
shadow. In the natural environment, squids only a few
meters away blend in almost perfectly with the water col-
umn. A more unusual situation occurs when a whole school
of squids go into the Chronic All Dark Pattern (Fig. 2D),
which is not cryptic at all. The function of this pattern is
unknown, but we have observed it several times in the
natural habitat on many hundreds of calm squids hovering
in large schools in the water column. The Banded Bottom
Sitting pattern (Fig. 2E) is very common and consists of
Bands with Dorsal iridophore splotches and Bottom sitting.
The pattern provides excellent crypsis through disruptive
coloration because the bands break up the longitudinal
shape of the squid, and the pattern has variations in the
banding. To our knowledge, L. pcalci is the only loliginid
squid that commonly sits on the substrate, although Loligo
forbesi was observed to bottom sit in the laboratory on rare
occasions (Porteiro et /.. 1990).
Around egg beds, many squids that are actively engag-
ing in sexual selection behavior remain in the Chronic
Bright White Pattern (Fig. 2C), which is visually con-
spicuous. This pattern has many variations, but the most
common one is seen on mating pairs near the egg beds.
Males that are mate guarding are in Clear. Raised arms,
White arms/head. Arm spots, and sometimes Dark head.
Females that are being guarded are in Clear with Dark
SQUID BODY PATTERNING AND BEHAVIOR
59
head, and sometimes Raised arms. In both cases the testis
and the oviducal glands are clearly visible through the
mantle. It is noteworthy that unpaired males (whether
large or small) moving amidst a school of reproductively
active squids are not in this bright white pattern, yet if a
large male wins an agonistic contest and pairs with the
female he will immediately go into the Chronic bright
white pattern.
Acute patterns last for seconds or rarely for minutes and
are seen during intra- and interspecific interactions. Very
Dark has two variations. The first is a brief flash to a
conspecific or an interspecific threat (e.g., to a person in the
laboratory or a fish in the field). The second variation shows
several flashes over a 5-s period, producing a strong De-
imatic effect that startles or bluffs (see Hanlon and Messen-
ger, 1996). The Blanch-Ink-Jet Maneuver may be univer-
sal among squids: the animal blanches Clear and jets away
(usually backwards, but sometimes forward) while ejecting
ink in a pseudomorph that remains in the approximate
position from which the squid started the maneuver. This is
a typical secondary defense against predation or threat
(when, for instance, the primary defense of crypsis fails).
Such behavior is called Protean behavior because the vari-
able and erratic escape response upsets target prediction by
the attacker (Driver and Humphries, 1988).
Lateral Display is a complex set of behaviors performed
only by males during agonistic contests. There is some
stereotypy. although it is by no means a fixed sequence (see
Hanlon and Messenger, 1996; DiMarco and Hanlon, 1997).
It begins with Parallel positioning by two males and then
includes various visual signals including Arm spots. In-
fraocular spot. Fin spots. Mid ventral stripe. Weak lateral
flame, and Raised and splayed arms. The overall base col-
oration of the body is bright white; this, because it is "turned
on" so quickly as the chromatophores retract when a contest
begins, gives the optical illusion of flashing. The ensuing
dynamic interactions between the males include flashing
and escalation to Fin beating followed by Jockeying on the
part of the intruder male to get near the female, and Parrying
by the paired male to fend off the intruder. Mate Guarding
Pattern (Fig. 2F) is shown by paired consort males that are
approached either by paired males or by single large or
small males that may be seeking an extrapair copulation.
The male hovers directly between his mate and the ap-
proaching male, maintaining a bright white coloration with
Arm spots and maximally Splayed arms; the Accentuated
testis is often conspicuous, especially if the male goes dark
or amber briefly (Fig. 2F). Accentuated Testis is a single
component that can and does act as a body pattern, and it is
particularly common on small sneaker males that swim
around spawning areas attempting extrapair copulations.
This pattern is often shown with the All dark component.
but it may also be paired with Basic Amber. Although we
list it as an acute pattern, it can sometimes be shown often
enough to be considered chronic.
Comparisons With Other Loliginids
Sympatric Loligo pealei and Loligo plei
The components of body patterns were compared be-
tween these species by Hanlon (1988) before detailed in-
formation on Liili^o pealei was available. The importance
of these comparisons is that the species are nearly indistin-
guishable morphologically at hatching (McConathy et al.
1980), as juveniles (e.g.. Cohen, 1976), or even at adult size
(Vecchione et al.. 1998). and fisheries statistics usually
lump the two species together in landing records. Hanlon
( 1988) should be consulted for many comparisons of these
two species; only corrections or additions to that paper are
discussed here. First. Accentuated testis and Accentuated
oviducal gland (and their respective shaded counterparts)
occur in both species, so these components cannot be used
to distinguish them. Second. Lateral blush has now been
seen in both species, but the Lateral mantle spot of female
L. pealei seems to be unique. Third, Dark arm stripes in L
pealei seem distinctive. Fourth, Fin spots in L. pealei are
strikingly distinguishable from Stitchwork fins in L. plei.
Fifth, the bands are more variable and perhaps distinctive in
L. pealei. The Lateral Displays of the two species are clearly
different, especially the Mid ventral ridge and the dramatic
Lateral flame of L. plei compared to the Mid ventral stripe
(i.e., no ridge of extended skin) and the weak Lateral flame
of L. pealei. Conversely, the bright white Mate Guarding
Pattern of L. pealei seems distinctive, although field obser-
vations of natural spawning in L. plei would be needed to
confirm this difference.
Loligo forbesi and Loligo vulgaris reynaudii
In general, Loligo pealei is comparable in the content and
diversity of its patterning with other Loligo spp. Porteiro et
til. (1990) provided an ethogram of L. forbesi based on
limited laboratory observations in the Azores Islands, and
Hanlon et al. (1994) provided an ethogram of L. vulgaris
re\naitdii based on a moderate number of diving observa-
tions (but no laboratory trials) in South Africa. The latter
two species occur in the eastern Atlantic and do not overlap
in distribution with L. pealei. However, the adults are ex-
tremely similar in morphology, and hence the body patterns
are one reasonable way to distinguish living animals. The
western Atlantic L. plei and L. pealei have Lateral flame
markings on the mantle, whereas the eastern Atlantic L.
60
R. T. HANLON ET AL
vulgaris. L. vulgaris revnaudii. and L. forbesi all have
Lateral mantle streaks; the arrangement of chromatophores
in the skin is very different and can be seen in preserved
specimens. All five species seem to have highly comparable
body patterns for crypsis and countershading. but differ-
ences appear in the intraspecific signals used during ago-
nistic contests, courtship, and mate guarding. Sexual signals
must be specific, and these are, therefore, the components of
body patterns that will continue to provide unique markers,
which is critical in distinguishing sympatric species.
Conclusions
Loligo pealei has an unexpectedly rich repertoire of
body patterning. Any of the 34 chromatic components
can be expressed instantly and in various combinations
with the 5 postural and 12 locomotor components to
produce each squid's wide variety of behavior. This is a
unique capacity of cephalopods because of the direct
neural control of hundreds of thousands of chromato-
phore organs in the skin. It also reflects this group's
sensory capabilities and well-developed central nervous
system (Hunlon and Messenger, 1996). In L. pealei, the
largest portion of these visual signals seem to be used for
intraspecific communication. This is not unexpected in a
species that schools for much of its brief life, but it calls
into question just how social squids are. Our findings in
this report can be explained partly in the context of the
life history and ecology of this species off Cape Cod.
Loligo pealei individuals live less than a year (Brodziak
and Macy, 1996), and their inshore migration each spring
is generally thought to be linked to spawning. Off of
south Cape Cod (which is a prime squid fishing area and
much warmer than Cape Cod Bay and other locations
northward), the squids arrive around the first week of
May. The inshore trawl and weir trap fishery targets these
schooling squids, which often have egg mops when cap-
tured, indicating high levels of spawning. This reproduc-
tive activity can be studied by divers throughout May, but
it becomes increasingly difficult to find spawning con-
gregations of squids around the southern Cape and is-
lands (Nantucket and Vineyard Sounds) during the sum-
mer and fall, although eggs are trawled episodically
throughout this time.
Our diving operations were designed to study sexual
selection processes, thus our ethogram is based mostly on
squids that were mature and actively engaged in agonistic
contests between males, courting, mating, mate guarding,
and egg laying. In May, many females already have sperm
stored in the seminal receptacle, and it is likely that some
reproductive behavior occurs offshore, before the squids
migrate inshore. Moreover, the squids apparently spend
considerable time in reproduction while inshore during the
spring and summer, and thus it is not surprising that most of
the components listed in Table I are associated with repro-
ductive behavior. Our many hours (more than 440) of ob-
servation over three field seasons make us confident that the
ethogram is quite complete for these activities and times.
Whether other forms of social behavior occur remains to be
discovered. For example, behaviors of young squids and of
adults not engaged in reproductive activities during other
times of the year and in different habitats have yet to be
studied. However, we predict that such observations will
reveal only a few new body patterns.
We have included polarization components in the etho-
gram largely because recent discoveries have shown that L.
pealei (and probably all cephalopods) uses its visual polar-
ization sensitivity to detect prey (Shashar et /., 1998) and
produces polarization components in its skin that could be
used for intraspecific signaling (Shashar and Hanlon, 1997;
this paper. Fig. 3). Experiments on the cuttlefish Sepia
officinalis suggested that it could possibly use this distinc-
tive visual capability as a "hidden channel" of intraspecific
communication (Shashar et ai, 1996).
One of our recurrent and peculiar observations while
diving was that aggregations of squids actively engaged in
reproductive behaviors were usually conspicuous (i.e.,
bright white) rather than cryptic, thus potentially making
them more easily detected by visual predators, which
abound in the nearshore waters (e.g., mackerel, striped bass,
flatfish). By helping squids avoid predators, schooling, com-
bined with diurnal activity, may offset the disadvantage of
increased visibility.
We believe that use of our ethogram will contribute to
future behavioral studies demonstrating that L. pealei. like
other loliginids. is a species with complex sexual behavior
(Hanlon et al.. 1997; Hanlon and Messenger, 1996; Sauer et
a I.. 1997) that must be understood by those charged with
protecting the resource. This species apparently has a win-
dow of opportunity for laying eggs that is restricted in both
time (mainly spring) and space (shallow nearshore waters).
Many squid fisheries worldwide target spawning congrega-
tions, so the predation pressure on spawners is increased
(Hanlon. 1998). State and federal fishery managers estimate
that stocks of L. pealei are being maximally exploited by
commercial fishing (NEFSC. 1995). Understanding the mat-
ing system of such short-lived species will help managers
assess the true effects of fishery practices that not only
capture a large number of animals but, by removing spawn-
ing individuals, may disrupt the reproductive behavior of
individuals and affect the recruitment and demographic
structure of populations.
SQUID BODY PATTERNING AND BEHAVIOR
61
Acknowledgments
We thank Mark Simonitsch, Ernie Eldridge, and Paul
Lucas, who allowed us to dive in and around their weir traps
to film squid spawning activity. We also thank numerous
personnel of the Marine Resources Center of the MBL and
many summer students who helped collect and feed squids.
This work is the result of research sponsored in part by
NOAA National Sea Grant College Program Office, Depart-
ment of Commerce, under Grant No. NA86RG0075, Woods
Hole Oceanographic Institution Sea Grant no. 22850012.
Saltonstall-Kennedy Grant NA76FD0111 and NSF Grant
IBN 9722805 also partially supported this work. KLB was
partially funded by the Marine Models in Biological Re-
search Program (NSF Grant DBI-9605155). ERL was sup-
ported by ONR grant NR 4221022-01 and NSF grant
9419566. Special thanks to Rosie Davis who produced the
first draft of Fig. 1 .
Literature Cited
Arnold, J. M. 1962. Mating behavior and social structure in Loligo
pealii. Biol Bull. 123: 53-57.
Arnold, J. M. 1990. Squid mating behavior. Pp. 65-75 in Squid as
Experimental Animals. D. L. Gilbert, W. J. Adelman, and J. M. Arnold,
eds. Plenum Press, New York.
Brodziak, J. K. T., and W. K. Macy, III. 1996. Growth of long-
tinned squid, Lo/igo pealei. in the northwest Atlantic. Fish. Bull. 94:
212-236.
Cohen, A. C. 1976. The systematics and distribution of Loligo (Cepha-
lopoda. Myopsida) in the western North Atlantic, with descriptions of
two new species. Malacologia 15: 299-367.
Cooper, K. M., R. T. Hanlon, and B. U. Budelmann. 1990. Physio-
logical color change in squid iridophores. II. Ultrastructural mecha-
nisms in Lolliguncula brevis. Cell Tissue Res. 259: 15-24.
Cronin, T. W., N. Shashar, and L. Wolff. 1994. Portable imaging
polarimeters. IEEE Proc. 12th IAPR Int. Conf. Pattern Recognition
606-609.
DiMarco. R. P., and R. T. Hanlon. 1997. Agonistic behavior in the
squid Loligo plei (Loliginidae, Teuthoidea): fighting tactics and the
effects of size and resource value. Ethology 103: 89-108.
Drew, G. A. 1911. Sexual activities of the squid, Loligo pea/ii (Les.). J.
Morphol. Wistar Inst. ofAnat. and Biol. 22: 327-359.
Driver, P. M., and D. A. Humphries. 1988. Protean Behaviour: The
Bioloi>\ of Unpredictability. Oxford University Press, New York.
Dubas, F., R. T. Hanlon, G. P. Ferguson, and H. M. Pinsker. 1986.
Localization and stimulation of chromatophore motoneurons in the
brain of the squid. Lolliguncula brevis. J. E.\p. Biol. 121: 1-25.
Flamarique, I. N., and C. A. Hawryshyn. 1997. Is the use of under-
water polarized light by fish restricted to crepuscular time periods?
Vision Res. 37: 975-989.
Gilbert, D. L., W. J. Adelman, and J. M. Arnold, eds. 1990. Squid as
Experimental Animals. Plenum Press, New York.
Griswold, C. A., and J. Prezioso. 1981. In situ observations on repro-
ductive behavior of the long-finned squid, Loligo pealei. Fish. Bull. 78:
945-947.
Hanlon. R. T. 1982. The functional organization of chromatophores and
iridescent cells in the body patterning of Loligo plei (Cephalopoda:
Myopsida). Malacologia 23: 89-1 19.
Hanlon, R. T. 1988. Behavioral and body patterning characters useful
in taxonomy of field identification of cephalopods. Malacologia 29: 247-
264.
Hanlon, R. T. 1996. Evolutionary games that squids play: fighting,
courting, sneaking, and mating behaviors used for sexual selection in
Loligo pealei. Biol. Bull. 191: 309-310.
Hanlon. R. T. 1998. Mating systems and sexual selection in the squid
Loligo: How might commercial fishing on spawning squids affect
them? Calif. Coop. Oceanic Fish Invest. Rep. 39: 92-101.
Hanlon, R. T., and J. B. Messenger. 1996. Cephalopod Behaviour.
Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
Hanlon, R. T., R. F. Hixon, and W. H. Hulet. 1983. Survival, growth,
and behavior of the loliginid squid, Loligo plei, Loligo pealei and
Lolliguncula brevis (Mollusca: Cephalopoda) in closed sea water sys-
tems. Biol. Bull. 165: 637-685.
Hanlon, R. T., K. M. Cooper, B. U. Budelmann, and T. C. Pappas.
1990. Physiological color change in squid iridophores. I. Behavior,
morphology and pharmacology in Lolliguncula brevis. Cell Tissue Res.
259: 3-14.
Hanlon, R. T.. M. J. Smale, and W. H. H. Sauer. 1994. An ethogram
of body patterning behavior in the squid Loligo vulgaris reynaudii on
spawning grounds in South Africa. Biol. Bull. 187: 1-10.
Hanlon, R. T., M. R. Maxwell, and N. Shashar. 1997. Behavioral
dynamics that would lead to multiple paternity within egg capsules of
the squid Loligo pealei. Biol. Bull. 193: 212-214.
Horvath, G., and D. Varju. 1997. Polarization pattern of freshwater
habitats recorded by video polanmetry in red, green and blue spectral
ranges and its relevance for water detection by aquatic insects. / Exp.
Biol. 200: 1155-1163.
Kattawar, G. W. 1994. Polarization of light in the ocean. Pp. 203-225
in Ocean Optics. R. W. Spinrad, K. L. Carder, and M. J. Perry, eds.
Oxford University Press, New York.
McConathy, D. A., R. T. Hanlon, and R. F. Hixon. 1980. Chromato-
phore arrangements of hatchlmg loliginid squids (Cephalopoda. Myop-
sida). Malacologia 199: 279-288.
McKiernan, D. J., and D. E. Pierce. 1995. Loligo squid fishery in
Nantucket and Vineyard Sounds. Mass. Div. Mar. Fish. Publ. No.
17648-75-200: 1-200.
NEFSC, Northeast Fisheries Science Center. 1995. Status of fishery
resources off the northeastern United States for 1993. NOAA Tech.
Mem. NMFS-F/NEC. Woods Hole, Massachusetts. 1-138.
Packard, A., and F. G. Hochberg. 1977. Skin patterning in Octopus and
other genera. Symp. Zool. Soc. Loiul. 38: 191-231.
Porteiro, F. M., H. R. Martins, and R. T. Hanlon. 1990. Some obser-
vations on the behaviour of adult squids. Loligo forbesi, in captivity. J.
Mar. Biol. Assoc. UK 70: 459-472.
Saidel, W. M., J. Y. Lettvin. and E. F. MacNichol. 1983. Processing of
polarized light by squid photoreceptors. Nature 304: 534-536.
Sauer, W. H. H., M. J. Roberts, M. R. Lipinski, M. J. Smale, R. T.
Hanlon, D. M. Webber, and R. K. O'Dor. 1997. Choreography of
the squid's "nuptial dance." Biol. Bull. 192: 203-207.
Shashar, N., and R. T. Hanlon. 1997. Squids (Loligo pealei and Eu-
prymna scolopes) can exhibit polarized light patterns produced by their
skin. Biol. Bull. 193: 207-208.
Shashar, N., P. S. Rutledge, and T. W. Cronin. 1996. Polarization
vision in cuttlefish a concealed communication channel? J. Exp. Biol.
199: 2077-2084.
62 R T. HANLON ET AL.
Shashar, N., R. T. Hanlon, and A. M. Petz. 1998. Polarization vision alopods. Vol. I, N. Voss, M. Vecchione. R. B. Toll, and
helps detect transparent prey. Nature 393: 222-223. M. J. Sweeney, eds. Smithsonian Institution Press. Washington.
Stevenson, J. A. 1934. On the behavior of the long-finned squid (Loligo DC
pealii. (Lesueur)). Can. Field-Nat. 48: 4-7. Verrill, A. E. 1880-1881. The cephalopods of the northeastern coast of
Summers, W. C. 1983. Loligo pealei. Pp. 1 15-142 in Cephalopod Life America. Part II. The smaller cephalopods. including the 'squids' and
Cycles. Vol. I, P. R. Boyle, ed. Academic Press. London. the octopi, with other allied forms. Trans. Conn. Acad. Sci. 5: 259-
Vecchione, M., T. F. Brakoniecki, Y. Natsukari, and R. T. Hanlon. 446.
1998. A provisional generic classification of the family Loligin- Wolff, L. B., and A. G. Andreou. 1995. Polarization camera sensors.
idae. Pp. 215-222 in Systematic! and Biogeography of Ceph- Image Vis. Comput. 16: 497-510.
Reference: Biol. Bull. 197: 63-71. (August 1999)
Concurrent Signals and Behavioral Plasticity in Blue
Crab (Callinectes sapidus Rathbun) Courtship
PAUL J. BUSHMANN*
Smithsonian Environmental Research Center. 647 Coulee's Wharf Road, Edgewater, Maryland 21037
Abstract. Behavioral flexibility and behavioral regulation
through courtship signals may both contribute to mating
success. Blue crabs (Callinectes sapidus} form precopula-
tory pairs after courtship periods that are influenced by
female and perhaps male urine-based chemical signals. In
this study, male and female crabs were observed in 1.5-in
circular outdoor pools for 45 min while the occurrence and
sequence of courtship behaviors and pairing outcomes were
recorded. These results were then compared with trials in
which males or females were blindfolded; lateral antennule
(outer flagellum) ablated; blindfolded and lateral antennule
ablated; or had received nephropore blocks. The relative
importance of visual and chemical sensory systems during
blue crab courtship were then determined and urine and
non-urine based chemical signals for both males and fe-
males were examined. Courtship behaviors varied consid-
erably in occurrence and sequence; no measured behavior
was necessary for pairing success. Male or female blind-
folding had no effect on any measured behavior. Males and
females required chemical information for normal courtship
behaviors, yet blocking male or female urine release did not
affect courtship behaviors. Males required chemical infor-
mation to initiate pairing or to maintain stable pairs. Male
urine release was necessary for stable pairing, suggesting
that male urine signals may be involved in pair maintenance
rather than pair formation. Females that could not receive
chemical information paired faster and elicited fewer male
agonistic behaviors. The results demonstrate a great vari-
ability and flexibility in blue crab courtship, with no evi-
dence for stereotyped behavioral sequences. However, these
behaviors appear regulated by urine- and nonurine-based
redundant chemical signals emanating from both males and
females. Although urine-based signals play roles in blue
Received 30 March 1998; accepted 1 June 1999.
* Current address: Anne Arundel Community College, 101 College
Parkway. Arnold. MD 21012. E-mail: pjbushman@mail.aacc.cc.md.us
crab courtship, chemical signals from other sites appear to
carry sufficient information to elicit a full range of behav-
ioral responses in males and females.
Introduction
Courtship and mating success depend upon correct be-
havioral responses by both males and females. One might
expect a degree of plasticity in these behaviors (Hazlett,
1995). Because behavior can quickly track changes in en-
vironmental conditions (West-Eberhard, 1989). flexibility in
the occurrence and timing of reproductive behaviors might
help insure successful mating. Many invertebrates do ex-
hibit plasticity in their behaviors (Carlson and Copeland.
1978; Dejean, 1987; Elner and Beninger, 1995) and this
variability may be the rule for most animal species (Lott,
1991).
Conversely, one might also expect courtship and repro-
ductive behaviors to be controlled and regulated by conspe-
cific communication signals. By eliciting appropriate be-
havioral responses, these signals could enhance mating
success and help to prevent interspecies mating. Courtship
and mating in a fluctuating environment could be aided by
multiple or redundant signals, which would make the trans-
mission of adequate and correct information more likely.
Multiple or redundant signals have been found in both
invertebrate and vertebrate species (van den Hurk and Lam-
bert. 1983; Linn /., 1984; Rand et /., 1992).
Chemical communication signals appear to be nearly
universal in the animal world. For aquatic crustaceans,
chemical communication signals have been well docu-
mented in courtship and reproduction (Ryan, 1966; Atema
and Engstrom, 1971; Bales, 1974; rev. in Dunham. 1978,
1988; Gleeson, 1980; Borowsky, 1984, 1985), while visual
(Christy and Salmon, 1991) and acoustic (Salmon and
Horch, 1972) signals have received less study. Recent stud-
ies with a variety of animal taxa have begun to examine
63
64
P. J. BUSHMANN
multiple signals and signal interactions (Hazlett, 1982;
Waas and Colgan, 1992; Stauffer and Semlitsch, 1993;
Hughes, 1996).
Like many crustaceans (Hartnoll, 1969), the blue crab
Callinectes sapidn.\ Rathbun practices a polygynous mating
system involving a complex coordination of female ecdysis,
maturation, and copulation. The mating process has been
well described (Hay, 1905; Churchill, 1921; Van Engel,
1958; Gleeson, 1980). Immature females nearing their final
maturational molt, termed prepubertal females, are ap-
proached and courted by mature males. Pairing success
results in females being held beneath males in a "cradle
carry" posture for a period of precopulatory guarding. They
are released for their molt, mated while still soft, and carried
again for a period of postcopulatory guarding. This latter
guarding protects the female while she is soft and prevents
subsequent inseminations by other males (Jivoff, 1997a).
Females are thought to receive only one copulation in their
lifetime while males mate repeatedly (Van Engel, 1958),
although multiple inseminations are possible and occur oc-
casionally (Jivoff, 1997a).
Blue crab courtship can be divided into three phases:
mate attraction, pair formation, and pair maintenance. In
each phase a precise signaling system would seem impor-
tant to help insure mating success. The coupling of molt and
reproductive condition requires individuals to ascertain the
physiological state of prospective partners. Signals can
function in the reduction of agonistic behaviors (Tinbergen,
1953; Bastock, 1967), and during mating female blue crabs
must in some way guard against injury or death by aggres-
sive, cannibalistic males. Reproductive behaviors and se-
quences might, therefore, be tightly regulated by commu-
nication signals, making appropriate responses more likely
and increasing the eventual mating success of the partici-
pants (Ryan, 1990; Reynolds, 1993).
Chemoreception and vision are the two best studied sen-
sory modalities in blue crab courtship. Teytaud (1971) re-
ported a role for visual signals in male recognition by
pre-pubertal females. However, Gleeson ( 1980) showed that
males did not respond to female visual stimuli alone, and
pairing could proceed in darkness. Chemical signals are
important tor both male (Gleeson, 1980) and female
(Teytaud, 1971; Gibbs, 1996) mate recognition. Some ma-
ture males respond with a courtship display to chemical
compounds in pre-pubertal female urine (Gleeson, 1980;
Gleeson et al., 1984) and reception of these chemical sig-
nals occurs via the aesthetasc sensilla on the lateral filament
(outer flagellum) of the male antennules (Gleeson, 1982).
This signaling theme appears common in crustaceans: urine
carries chemical courtship signals (Ryan, 1966; Bushmann
and Atema, 1997; Bamber and Naylor, 1997) and the an-
tennules appear to be the site of distance chemoreception
(Ache, 1975; Ameyaw-Akumfi and Hazlett, 1975; Devine
and Atema, 1982; Cowan, 1991). The presence of a male
chemical signal has not been firmly established, although
Gleeson ( 1991 ) showed female attraction to water that con-
tained males and Gibbs (1996) demonstrated disruption of
pairing with male antennule ablation.
In this study, the occurrence and variability of courtship
behaviors observed during blue crab pair formation were
examined. These behaviors were then compared with those
generated by male and female pairs with vision, distance
chemoreception, both senses, or urine release impaired.
This allowed a determination of the relative importance of
visual and chemical sensory systems during blue crab court-
ship and an examination of urine- and nonurine-based
chemical signals for both males and females.
Materials and Methods
Adult male crabs (125 mm-170 mm carapace width)
were collected from the Rhode River, an upper Chesapeake
Bay subestuary, with baited commercial crab traps. Premolt
prepubertal females (96 mm-127 mm carapace width) were
purchased from two local businesses which hold molting
females for the soft crab industry. Females ranged in molt
stage from late D to D 3 (Drach. 1939). Animals were held
in floating cages in the Rhode River or flow-through sea-
water tanks for no more than 48 h before participation in the
study.
Behavioral interactions were observed in outdoor circular
pools (150 cm d. X 20 cm h.) with three centimeters of
washed river sand as substrate. Prior to a trial, pools were
filled with 15 cm of new river water filtered through a felt
bag with 10 /nm mesh. A trial began by randomly selecting
a male crab and placing him into a pool. Ten minutes later,
a randomly selected prepubertal female was placed into the
middle of the pool, inside an opaque plastic cylinder de-
signed to prevent interactions prior to the start of the trial.
After 10 min acclimation, the cylinder was removed, allow-
ing the animals to freely interact. Three pools were started
and watched simultaneously, and the ensuing behaviors
were recorded by hand for 45 min. Carapace width and molt
stage were recorded for each animal.
Prior to trials either a male or a female from each pair was
subjected to an experimental treatment. They were as fol-
lows:
1. Nephropore Occlusion: Blue crabs possess bilateral
nephropores, located anteriorly and just ventral to the
eye stalks. Each opening is found in a pit in the
carapace. A chitinous flap opens to allow urine to exit.
A modification of a successful cannulation technique
was used to prevent urine release. Each pit was first
dried by blotting and a drop of acetone, then filled
with a viscous cyanoacrylate glue. The glue was im-
mediately hardened with a catalytic accelerator. This
sealed the nephropore flap shut. Animals were oc-
cluded 30 min prior to a trial. The blocks were
CONCURRENT SIGNALS IN BLUE CRABS
65
checked for a tight bond with the carapace immedi-
ately before and after a trial, n = 12 males (M:
URINE). 14 females (F:URINE).
3. Antennule Ablation: the distal lateral filament (outer
flagellum), containing the aesthetasc sensilla, of both
antennules was removed, n = 12 males (M:
ANTENN), 12 females (FiANTENN).
4. Blindfolding: two strips of black plastic (50 X 10 mm)
were fastened with cyanoacrylate glue to the dorsal
and ventral carapace so that each wrapped over and
covered an eye stalk, n = 13 males (M:BLIND), 12
females (F:BLIND).
5. Antennule ablation and blindfolding: animals received
both antennule ablation and blindfolding treatments.
n = 12 males (M: ANT-BLIND). 12 females (F: ANT-
BLIND).
6. Sham treatment: both animals in a pair were subjected
to sham operations. Antennules were held with for-
ceps without ablation, nephropores were treated with
acetone and accelerator but not glued, and blindfolds
were attached similarly, but lateral to the eye stalks so
that vision was not impaired, n = 10.
7. Intact: No treatments or sham operations were per-
formed on either animal, n = 12.
Blue crab reproductive and agonistic behaviors have been
well described over the years (Churchill. 1921; Van Engel,
1958; Teytaud, 1971; Jachowski. 1974; Gleeson. 1980).
This study analyzed one agonistic and five reproductive
behaviors. These behaviors were common, unmistakable,
and reliable indicators of the nature of the interaction oc-
curring. They were:
1 . Male Strike: an agonistic behavior in which the male
strikes or seizes any female body part with either
chelae without subsequent attempts at cradle carry.
2. Male Displav: A courtship behavior in which the male
raises high on his walking legs, spreads his chelae
laterally, and raises and rotates his 5th walking legs
(periopods) laterally.
3. Female Present: a courtship behavior in which the
female faces away from the male and holds her body
in a cradle carry posture, with or without spread
chelae.
4. Female Rock: a courtship behavior in which the fe-
male rocks her body from side to side.
5. Initiation of Pair Formation: the male seizes the fe-
male and attempts to pull her into a cradle carry
position. Females often resist, males may make many
attempts, and pairing may or may not become estab-
lished.
6. Stable Pair Formation: this was scored at the end of a
trial. Pairs were in stable cradle carry if both female
and male struggling had ceased, and the animals had
been paired for at least 10 min.
Comparisons of the intact and sham-treated groups
showed no differences in the frequency of occurrence of any
measured behavior or pairing outcome. These two groups
thus appeared to represent samples of the same population
and their data were pooled to yield 22 intact control trials.
Behaviors of these pairs were examined to determine a
normal range of behavioral variability and sequence. Be-
haviors were scored once if they occurred in a given trial.
The number of trials in which behaviors occurred for the
intact control group was then compared with those gener-
ated by the treatment groups. Overall differences between
treatment and control groups were evaluated with a Chi-
square test for multiple independent samples (Siegel and
Castellan. 1988). Where significance was found, differences
between specific treatment groups and the control were
evaluated with a Fisher exact test (FAT) (Siegel and Cas-
tellan, 1988). The mean times between trial start and both
the first behavioral interaction and Initiation of Pair For-
mation were also compared between the control and treat-
ment groups. Overall differences were evaluated with anal-
ysis of variance (Jaccard. 1983), while mean differences
between specific treatments and the control were evaluated
with a non-directional r-test (Jaccard, 1983).
Results
Male and female blue crabs in intact control pairs showed
great variability in the occurrence of their behaviors. During
courtship, no behavior occurred with a high frequency (Ta-
ble I). Male Strike, Male Display, Female Present and
Female Rock occurred in only 41. 41, 56, and 36 percent of
intact control trials, respectively. Pairing was initiated at a
high rate, however (82% of trials), with 50% of trials
resulting in Stable Pair Formation. No single behavior
more likely led to the initiation of pairing or stable pairing,
nor did the exhibition of any behavior preclude these out-
comes (Table I). There was no single sequence of behaviors
Table I
Fret/iiencv of coiin.\lui> uncl agonistic behaviors in intact blue crah
pairs. The number of trials in which each behavior occurred is shown
for all trials, those trials in which Initiation of Pair Formation occurred,
and those trials in which a stable pair was fanned
Trials (%) with Trials ('',', ) with
Imitation of Stable Pair
Occurrence in Pair Formation Formation
Behaviors 22 trials (%) (n = 181 (n = 111
Male Strike
9(41)
6(33)
2(18)
Male Display
9(41)
1(1(56)
3 (30)
Female Present
12(56)
10(56)
4(36)
Female Rock
8(36)
8(44)
3(27)
Initiation of Pair
Formation
18(82)
Stable Pair Formation
11 (50)
66
P. J. BUSHMANN
Figure 1. Flow chart showing behavioral pathways from first encoun-
ter, through courtship and/or male agonistic behavior, to stable pairing
success or failure. The circled numbers represent the number of trials
following that particular pathway.
that predominated, nor any single sequence that invariably
led to greater or lesser pairing success. Neither male or
female courtship behaviors were correlated with female
molt stage (early premolt D vs. late premolt D ? ) or the
relative sizes of males and females.
However, some general trends emerge from courtship
sequences examined together with male agonistic behavior
(Fig. 1 ). Most pairs ( 18 of 22) exhibited some sequence of
courtship behaviors prior to pair formation (x 2 = 8.91, P =
0.003). The presence of male agonistic behavior signifi-
cantly reduced the likelihood of stable pairing (FAT, P =
0.040). Of the nine pairs in which males exhibited Male
Strike, only two (22%) formed stable pairs. Of the remain-
ing 13 pairs in which males did not exhibit Male Strike, nine
(69%) formed stable pairs (Fig. 1 >.
Examination of male agonistic and display behaviors
revealed overall differences between treatment and control
groups (x 2 = 20.45. P < 0.05; r = '7.62, P < 0.05). The
incidence of Male Strike was significantly diminished
(FAT, P = 0.009) if females were antennule ablated (F:
ANTENN) (Fig. 2A). Scores for females antennule ablated
and blindfolded (F:ANT-BLIND) closely approached sig-
nificance (FAT, P = 0.050). Male Display was significantly
reduced when males were antennule ablated (M:ANTENN)
(FAT, P = 0.009) or antennule ablated and blindfolded
(M: ANT-BLIND) (FAT, P = 0.049), but were unaffected
by female or male nephropore occlusion (F:URINE or M:
URINE) (Fig. 2B). Blindfolding alone (M:BLIND and
F:BLIND) had no effect on any measured behavior.
When the behaviors Female Present and Female Rock
were examined, there were significant overall differences
between treatment and control groups (x~ = 45.78, P <
0.05; x 2 = 20.2. P < 0.05). The incidence of Female
Present was reduced when females were antennule ablated
(FAT. P = 0.035) or antennule ablated and blindfolded
(FAT, P = 0.009) (Fig. 2C). This behavior was also reduced
by male antennule ablation (FAT, P = 0.001 ). Female Rock
(Fig. 2D) was reduced in incidence when females were
antennule ablated and blindfolded (FAT, P = 0.009): fe-
male antennule ablation alone did not significantly reduce
the occurrence of this behavior (P = 0.083). Female Rock
also occurred less frequently when males were antennule
ablated and blindfolded (FAT, P = 0.009). Male or female
nephropore occlusions or blindfolding had no significant
effect on either female courtship behavior.
Initiation of Pair Formation occurred frequently (80% of
trials) in the intact control group (Fig. 2E). There were
significant overall differences between groups in the occur-
rence of this behavior (x 2 = 34.8, P < 0.05). It occurred
significantly less often than the control group when males
were antennule ablated (FAT. P = 0.007), while the reduc-
tion for antennule ablated and blindfolded males ap-
proached statistical significance (P = 0.062). Examination
of stable pairing at the trials' conclusions showed significant
overall differences between treatment groups (x 2 = 31.36,
100 ,
80
60
40
20
100
80
60
40
20
|
g 100
8 80
60
40
20
X o
z 1
I 80
g 60
1 "0
20
j/i
2 100
>- 80
60
40
20
100
80
60
40
20
Male Display
lUul I-
Male Strike
1 1 !..
Female Present
I.
Female Rock
Initiation of Pair Formation
h.lillll
Stable Pair Formation
Illllllll
Treatments
Figure 2. The percentage of trials in which Male Strike. (2A). Male
Display (2B), Female Present (2C), Female Rock (2D). Initiation of Pair
Formation (2E), and Stable Pair Formation (2F) occurred for the intact
control and treatment groups. Differences between intact control and
treatment groups were evaluated with a Fisher exact test. Stars indicate
statistical significance at a = 0.05.
CONCURRENT SIGNALS IN BLUE CRABS
67
S 16
i ,.
O 20
o 12
Figure 3. Mean lime to first observed behavior (3A) and Initiation of
Pair Formation (3B) for the intact control and treatment groups. Bars
represent mean standard error. Differences between intact control and
treatment groups were evaluated with a non-directional t-test. Stars indicate
statistical significance at a = 0.05.
P < 0.05). Fewer pairs were stable (Fig. 2F) if the males
were antennule ablated (FAT, P = 0.016) or antennule
ablated and blindfolded (FAT, P = 0.002). The incidence of
stable pairing was also reduced when male nephropores
were occluded (FAT, P = 0.016). This was the only sig-
nificant effect observed with any nephropore occlusion.
An examination of the mean time between a trial's start
and the first observed behavior (Fig. 3 A) showed significant
differences between treatment groups (ANOVA F = 2.73,
p = 0.009). The mean time to first behavior was signifi-
cantly less than the control group when males were blind-
folded (t = 2.97, P = 0.026), when males were blindfolded
and antennule ablated (t = 2.28, P = 0.032), and when
females were antennule ablated (t = 3.69, P = 0.001).
Overall differences were found (ANOVA F = 2.29, P =
0.030) when the time between trial start and Initiation of
Pair Formation was evaluated (Fig. 3B). In this comparison
only the female antennule-ablated trials showed a signifi-
cant reduction in time (t = 3.90, P = 0.001). Time differ-
ences between the male blindfolded group and the intact
controls closely approached significance (t = 2.01, P =
0.06), while those for the male blindfolded and antennule
ablated group were not significant (t = 1.46, P = 0.170).
Discussion
Arthropod behavior has generally been considered ste-
reotyped. Studies of some insects, such as many moth
species, have demonstrated stereotypic courtship behavior:
specific chemical signals elicit specific and predictable re-
sponses (Kaissling, 1979; Charlton and Carde, 1990). Other
insect species have shown greater flexibility, with individ-
uals basing their behavioral responses upon current condi-
tions and context (Carlson and Copeland, 1978; Dejean,
1987).
Similarly, the behavior of many crustacean species is not
based upon stereotyped responses but instead shows great
plasticity and can be modified as context changes (Ra'anan
and Cohen, 1984; Finer and Beninger, 1995; Hazlett, 1995).
The current study demonstrates such flexibility in Calli-
nectes sapidus courtship behavior. Courtship is variable in
that no single behavior must occur, nor does any behavior
invariably lead to successful pairing. No single behavior
occurred more than approximately half the time, yet the
odds of successful pairing remained high. This suggests that
courtship follows multiple behavioral pathways, all poten-
tially leading to successful pair formation. Such flexible
courtship would be useful for both males and females in a
species that mates in a fluctuating estuarine environment.
With intense male competition for females (Jivoff, 1997b)
and only one chance for females to receive sperm, it max-
imizes the chances of an encounter producing pair forma-
tion, with eventual mating and reproductive success.
However, blue crab mating behavior is not without con-
straints and regulation. In the intact control group most pairs
displayed some courtship behaviors prior to pair formation,
and male agonistic behavior reduced the likelihood of stable
pairing. This demonstrates the importance of controlling
male aggression during courtship and, together with the
treatment trials, illustrates the role that communication sig-
nals often serve in this regard (Tinbergen, 1953). For blue
crabs, the most likely path to successful pairing, and there-
fore successful reproduction, involves courtship and re-
duced male aggression.
The treatment trials suggest behavioral regulation
through chemical communication signals and that both fe-
male and male chemical signals play important roles in
courtship and pairing. Males with ablated antennules
showed reduced instances of Male Display, Initiation of
Pair Formation and Stable Pair Formation. For the male,
loss of distance chemoreception affected behavioral expres-
sion and directly reduced courtship success. The relevant
chemical information did not seem to reside solely in female
urine, however, because females with occluded nephropores
induced male behaviors at frequencies similar to intact
controls. Although the results were less clear, females also
appeared to exhibit fewer instances of courtship behaviors
when their antennules were ablated, while pairing initiation
or stability was unaffected. The physical act of pairing is
initiated by the male, and evidently an antennule-ablated
female is still attractive to males. However, an unreceptive
female can likely flee and decline pairing in the wild.
Blocking male urine release had no effect on female court-
ship behaviors, again suggesting that the relevant chemical
compounds are not restricted to urine.
68
P. J. BUSHMANN
It is now generally recognized that many chemical signals
are mixtures or blends and thus can serve as multiple or
redundant signals (van den Hurk and Lambert. 1983; Vetter
and Baker, 1983; Linn < t al. 1984). In blue crabs and other
brachyurans, a chemical signal in female urine that induces
male courtship behavior has been well described (Ryan.
1966; Gleeson. 1980; Seifert. 1982; Bamber and Naylor,
1997). The present study does not refute the existence of
this signal, but rather suggests urine is only one source of
courtship signals and is not obligatory for the initiation of
male or female courtship behaviors. There appears to be
chemical information from non-urine sources capable of
eliciting the same behaviors when nephropores are oc-
cluded. It is only when all chemical signals are lost through
antennule ablation that behavior is negatively affected.
These statements appear at odds with Ryan's (1966) work
showing no male responses to seawater that had contained
nephropore-blocked premolt Portiimis sanguinolentus fe-
males. It may be that the relevant female P. sanguinolentus
signal is sent only in urine. In addition, the females in
Ryan's study were isolated in 8-1 buckets during signal
release, while females in the current study were placed in
larger tanks in the presence of a male. This more naturalistic
behavioral context may have elicited female nonurine signal
release and male responses not seen in the earlier study.
Lastly. Ryan used molten paraffin rather than glue as
blocks; this may have affected the animals differently from
the blocks used here. These apparent interspecific differ-
ences in behaviors and signals should be more closely
examined.
Blue crab courtship thus appears regulated by female and
male concurrent chemical signals emanating from multiple
sources. It is unknown if the concurrent signals demon-
strated here are different compounds or if they are the same
compound released at different sites. This knowledge awaits
the purification and structural description of these chemical
courtship signals. The release sites of the non-urine chem-
ical compounds are likewise unknown. In lobsters (Hoimi-
nis (imericanus), the gill current has been implicated as a
method for transporting chemical signals to a receiver
(Atema, 1985). Because blue crabs possess a similar cur-
rent, it is possible that the gills themselves or structures
within the gill cavity are sources of chemical signals. Teg-
umental glands, found in blue crabs and other arthropods
(Johnson, 1980; Talbot and Demers, 1993) have been sug-
gested as chemical signal sources in several crustacean
species (Berry, 1970; Kamiguchi, 1972; Bushmann and
Atema, 1996) and also may play a role here.
Loss of chemical signals in some instances had indirect
effects on behavior. Males were less aggressive toward
antennule-ablated females. Ablation evidently alters either
female behavior or her signaling patterns in a way that
affects male agonistic behavior. Similarly, female courtship
behaviors were reduced when male chemical reception was
impaired. Male antennule ablations must alter male behav-
iors or communication signals in a way that makes them less
attractive to females and less capable of inducing female
courtship behavior. This is consistent with field work
(Gibbs, 1996) demonstrating that antennule-ablated males
in crab traps are less able to attract prepubertal females.
There is evidence for an obligatory male urine-based
signal involved in pair maintenance during precopulatory
guarding. When male nephropores were occluded, initiation
of pair formation was not affected yet there was reduced
incidence of stable pairing. This was the only evidence for
a urine-based signal in this study. However, female anten-
nule ablation did not reduce the incidence of stable pair
formation. It is possible that the direct contact involved in a
cradle carry produces other avenues for signal reception,
such as contact chemoreceptors on the dactyls or elsewhere
on the exoskeleton (Fuzessery and Childress, 1975). Al-
though the observed reduction in stable pairing could have
resulted from some male trauma associated with the occlu-
sion procedure, occluding females produces no such pattern
and blue crabs and lobsters appear capable of suspending
urine release for periods of several hours without ill effect
(Bushmann. unpub. data, Breithaupt and Atema, 1993).
Visual signals seem to play no role in influencing court-
ship behaviors or outcomes. Blindfolded males and females
courted, received courtship, and paired with success rates
equal to the intact controls. This is consistent with previous
observations for blue crabs and lobsters that visual signals
are of secondary importance during social interactions
(Gleeson, 1980; Snyder et al.. 1993: Kaplan et al.. 1993).
Thus, the primary function of the male courtship display is
likely not transmission of a visual signal. However, it may
be an excellent method for transmitting both chemical and
hydrodynamic signals to a potential partner. Rotation of the
periopods causes a strong and highly turbulent flow of water
directed forward of the animal (Gleeson, 1991; Bushmann,
unpub. data). This flow would likely entrain any chemical
signal emanating from the gills or nephropores. In addition,
some crustaceans use hydrodynamic information during ag-
onistic interactions and prey capture (Barron and Hazlett,
1989; Breithaupt ct al., 1995). The highly turbulent, di-
rected flow generated by male paddle waving could provide
directional or other information to females.
Many aspects of the male courtship display remain un-
clear. It must have some energetic cost and may draw
attention by predators, yet it need not occur for successful
pairing and occurred in less than half the observed encoun-
ters. In this study its occurrence was not correlated with
female premolt stage, the relative sizes of males and fe-
males, or pairing success during the encounter. The function
of this rather spectacular behavior and the stimuli leading to
its initiation require further investigation.
Loss of female chemoreception appeared to accelerate
rather than retard pairing. When females were antennule-
CONCURRENT SIGNALS IN BLUE CRABS
69
ablated, males showed little agonistic behavior, females
exhibited fewer courtship behaviors, and pairs formed more
quickly than in the intact control group (Fig. 3B) and they
remained stable. This is at odds with Gibbs (1996), who
found males to be more aggressive toward antennule-
ablated females and the time required for pairing to be
unaffected. The present study suggests that females use
chemical information and courtship behaviors to lengthen
courtship periods, perhaps as a way of better evaluating
potential partners. Loss of chemical information through
female antennule ablation would then result in less female
evaluation and faster pairing.
The significant reduction in time until first behavior seen
in the male blindfolded group was probably a general be-
havioral rather than specific communication effect. Blind-
folded males, without visual stimuli, may have been less
wary and more likely to begin moving about the pool after
trial start. This male movement would result in more rapid
encounters with females. The time until Initiation of Pair
Formation was not significantly shortened, however (Fig.
3B), and blindfolding had no effect on any measured be-
havior.
Several studies have shown that lateral antennule ablation
affects behavior by interfering with chemical reception
(Ache, 1975; Ameyaw-Akumfi and Hazlett, 1975; Gleeson,
1980; Cowan, 1991). However, in any ablation experiment
there is always a question of false-negative responses due to
a general dampening of behavior caused by the procedure
itself (Dunham, 1978). In the present study, while ablated
males showed reduced reproductive behaviors, agonistic
responses were unaltered. Antennule-ablated females, while
not exhibiting many courtship behaviors, were nonetheless
courted and carried by males. These ablations appeared to
affect certain reproductive behaviors, presumably those de-
pendent upon chemical signals, rather than causing a gen-
eral reduction in behavioral responses.
A second potential problem concerns the blocks applied
to the nephropores to prevent urine release. Correct inter-
pretation of results depends upon an effective block. Several
lines of evidence suggest that these blocks prevented urine
release. First, they are the initial step in the attachment of a
urine cannula. This cannula can collect urine from blue
crabs for several days without leaking (Bushmann, unpub.
data). Second, three urine blocked animals were held after
their trials. These individuals were swollen from fluid re-
tention within 6 h and died within 12 h. Lastly, the water
from four blocked animals held individually in 2-1 tanks
showed reduced ammonia levels compared to water from
four unblocked crabs (Bushmann, unpub. data). Ammonia
levels from blocked crab water were not zero, because
ammonia is also excreted across the gills (Mantel and
Farmer, 1983). Taken together, these observations suggest
that the blocks used in this experiment were effective in
preventing urine release.
In summary, Callincctes sapidus courtship illustrates
both behavioral plasticity and the importance of behavioral
regulation through a signaling system. The concurrent and
seemingly redundant chemical signals discussed here may
be different compounds or the same compound released
from different sites. Chemical rather than visual signals
from both male and female seem to play crucial roles in
courtship and pairing. Although these signals influence the
initiation of behaviors and pairing success, there appear to
be many different pathways leading to pairing success, and
no single behavior and perhaps no single signal is necessary
for pairing success. Courtship behaviors and chemical sig-
naling may operate in a more complex and flexible manner
than previously demonstrated.
Acknowledgments
The author thanks Dr. Anson H. Mines for his assistance,
support, and review of this manuscript. This work was
funded through a Smithsonian Postdoctoral Fellowship to
PB, and an NSF grant OCE-971 1843 to AHH.
Literature Cited
Ache, B. W. 1975. Anlcnnular mediated host location by symbiotic
crustaceans. Mar. Behav. Phyxiul. 3: 125-130.
Ameyaw-Akumfi, C., and B. A. Hazlett. 1975. Sex recognition in the
crayfish Procambarus clarkii. Science 190: 1225-1226.
Atema, J. 1985. Chemoreception in the sea: adaptations of chemorecep-
tors and behavior to aquatic stimulus conditions. Soc. Exp. Biol. Semin.
Ser. 39: 387-423.
Atema, J., and D. G. Engstrom. 1971. Sex pheromone in the lobster.
Hoinarus americanus. Nature 232: 261-263.
Bamber, S. D., and E. Naylor. 1997. Sites of release of putative sex
pheromone and sexual behaviour in female Carcinus maenas (Crusta-
cea: Decapoda). Esttiarine. Coastal Shelf Set. 44: 195-202.
Barren, L. C., and B. A. Hazlelt. 1989. Directed currents: a hydrody-
namic display in hermit crabs. Mar. Behav. Physiol. 15: 83-87.
Bastock, M. 1967. Cotirtxliip: an Elhological Study. Aldiline Publishing
Company, Chicago.
Berry, P. F. 1970. Mating behavior, oviposition and fertilization in the
spiny lobster Paniilirux linnuinix (Linnaeus). South African Associa-
tion for Marine Biological Research Investigational Report no. 24, 16
PP
Borowsky, B. 1984. Effects of receptive females' secretions on some
male reproductive behaviors in the amphipod crustacean Microdeuto-
pus gryllotalpa. Mar. Biol. 33: 266-271.
Borowsky, B. 1985. Responses of the amphipod crustacean Gammarus
palustix to waterbome secretions of conspecifics and congenerics.
J. Chem. Ecol. 11: 1545-1552.
Breithaupt, T., and J. Atema. 1993. Evidence for the use of urine
signals in agonistic interactions of the American lobster. Biol. Bull.
185: 318.
Breithaupt, T., B. Schmit/., and J. Tautz. 1995. Hydrodynamic orien-
tation of crayfish (Prucumharux clarkii) to swimming fish prey.
J. Comp. Physiol. A 177: 481-491.
Bushmann, P., and J. Atema. 1996. Nephropore rosette glands of the
70
P. J. BUSHMANN
lobster Homarus americanus: possible sources of urine pheromones. J.
Crustiic. Biol. 16(2): 221-231.
Bushmann, P.. and J. Atema. 1997. Shelter sharing and chemical
courtship signals in the lobster. Homarus americanus. Can. J. Fish.
Ac/iuit. Sci. 54(3): 647-654.
Carlson, A. D., and J. Copt-land. 1978. Behavioral plasticity in the flash
communication systems of fireflies. Am. Sci. 66(3): 340-346.
Charlton, R. E., and R. T. Card(943e. 1990. Behavioral interactions in
the courtship of Lymantna dispur (Lepidoptera: Lymantnidae). Ann.
Entinnol. SIM Am. 83(1): 89-96.
Christy, J. H.. and M. Salmon. 1991. Comparative studies of reproduc-
tive behavior in mantis shrimps and fiddler crabs. Am. Zool. 31:
329-337.
Churchill, K. P., Jr. 1921. Life history of the blue crab. Bull. U.S. Bur.
Fish. 36: 95-128.
Cowan. I). F. 1991. The role of olfaction in courtship behavior of the
American lobster Homarus americanus. Biol. Bull 181: 402-407.
Dejean, A. 1987. Behavioral plasticity of hunting workers of Serras-
truma serru/a (Hymenoptera: Formicidae. Myrmicinae) presented with
different arthropods. Sociobiology 13(3): 191-208.
Devine, D. V., and J. Atema. 1982. Function of chemoreceptor organs
in spatial orientation of the lobster. Homarus americanus: differences
and overlap. Biol. Bull. 163: 144-153.
Drach, P. 1939. Mue et cycle d'intermue chez les crustaces decapodes.
,4iiii. Inst. Oceanogr. 19: 103-391.
Dunham, P. J. 1978. Sex pheromones in Crustacea. Biol. Rev. Camb.
Plains. Soc. 53: 555-583.
Dunham, P. J. 1988. Pheromones and behaviour in Crustacea. Pp.
375-392 in Endocrinology of Selected Invertebrate Types, H Laufer
and G. H. Downer, eds. Liss, New York.
Eales, A. J. 1974. Sex pheromone in the shore crab Carcinus maenas.
and the site of its release from females. Mar. Behav. Physiol. 2:
345-355.
Elner, R. W., and P. G. Beninger. 1995. Multiple reproductive strate-
gies in snow crab. Cliionoecetes opilio: Physiological pathways and
behavioral plasticity. / Exp. Mar. Biol. Ecol. 193: 93-1 12.
Fuzessery, Z. M., and J. J. Childress. 1975. Comparative chemosen-
sitivity to amino acids and their role in the feeding activity of bathy-
pelagic and littoral crustaceans. Biol. Bull. 149: 522-538.
Gibhs III, D. S. 1996. Field and laboratory evidence of pheromone
mediated mating behavior in the blue crab, Callinectes sapidus. M.S.
thesis. The College of William and Mary.
Gleeson, R. A. 1980. Pheromone communication in the reproductive
behavior of the blue crab, Callinecles sapidiis. Mar. Behav. Pliysiol. 7:
119-134.
Gleeson, R. A. 1982. Morphological and behavioral identification of the
sensory structures mediating pheromone reception in the blue crab,
Callinectes sapidus. Biol. Bull. 163: 162-171.
Gleeson, R. A. 1991. Intrinsic factors mediating pheromone communi-
cation in the crab Callinecles sapidus. Pp. 1 7-32 in Crustacean Sexual
Biology, R. T. Baur and J. N. Martin, eds. Columbia University Press,
New York.
Gleeson, R. A., M. A. Adams, and A. B. Smith HI. 1984. Character-
ization of a sex pheromone in the blue crab, Callinectes sapidus:
Crustecdysone studies. J. Chem. Ecol. 10: 913-921.
Hartnoll, R. G. 1969. Mating in the Brachyura. Crustaceana 16: 161-
181.
Hay, VV. P. 1905. The life history of the blue crab (Callinecles sapidus).
Rep. U.S. Bur. Fish. 1904: 395-413.
Hazlett, B. A. 1982. Chemical induction of visual orientation in the
hermit crab Clibanarius vittatus. Anim. Behav. 30(4): 1259-1260.
Hazlett, B. A. 1995. Behavioral plasticity in Crustacea: why not more? /
E.\p. Mar. Biol. Ecol. 193: 57-66.
Hughes, M. 1996. The function of concurrent signals: visual and chem-
ical communication in snapping shrimp. Anim. Behav. 52: 247-257.
Jaccard, J. 1983. Statistics for the Behavioral Sciences. Wadsworth,
Belmont, CA.
Jachowski, R. L. 1974. Agonistic behavior of the blue crab. Callinectes
sapidus Rathbun. Behaviour 50: 232-253.
Jivoff, P. 1997a. The relative roles of predation and sperm competition
on the duration of the post-copulatory association between the sexes in
the blue crab. Callinectes sapidus. Behav. Ecol. Sociobiol. 40: 175-
185.
Jivoff, P. 1997b. Sexual competition among male blue crab, Callinectes
sapidus. Biol. Bull. 193: 368-380.
Johnson. P. T. 1980. Histology of the Blue Crab. Callinectes sapidus. A
Model for the Decapoda. Praeger Publishers, New York.
Kaissling, K. E. 1979. Recognition of pheromones by moths, especially
in saturnids and Bombyx mori. Pp. 43-56 in Chemical Ecolog\:
Odour Communication in Animals. F. J. Ritter. ed. Elsevier. Amster-
dam.
Kamiguchi. Y. 1972. A histological study of the "sternal gland" in the
female freshwater prawn, Palaemon paucidens, a possible site of origin
of the sex pheromone. J. Fac. Sci. Hokkaido Univ. Ser. VI, Zool. 18(3):
356-365.
Kaplan, L. J., C. Lowrance, J. Basil, and J. Atema. 1993. The role of
chemical and visual cues in agonistic interactions of the American
lobster. Biol. Bull. 185: 320-321.
Linn. C. E., L. B. Bjostad, J. W. Du, and W. L. Roelofs. 1984.
Redundancy in a chemical signal: behavioral responses of male
Trichoplusia ni to a 6-component sex pheromone blend. J. Chem. Ecol.
10(11): 1635-1658.
Lott, D. F. 1991. Intraspecific Variation in the Social Systems of Wild
Vertebrates. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
Mantel, L. H., and L. L. Farmer. 1983. Osmotic and ionic regulation.
Pp. 53-161 in The Biology of Crustacea Vol. 5, L. H. Mantel, ed.
Academic Press, New York.
Ra'anan, Z., and D. Cohen. 1984. The effect of group interactions on
the development of size distribution in Macrobrachium rosenbergii (de
Man) juvenile populations. Biol. Bull. 166: 22-31.
Rand, A. S., M. J. Ryan, and W. Wilczynski. 1992. Signal redundancy
and receiver permissiveness in acoustic mate recognition by the Tun-
gara frog, Physa/aemus pustii/osus. Am. Zool. 32: 81-90.
Reynolds, J. D. 1993. Should attractive individuals court more? Theory
and test. Am. Nat. 14: 914-927.
Ryan, E. P. 1966. Pheromone: evidence in a decapod crustacean. Science
151: 340-341
Ryan, M. J. 1990. Sexual selection, sensory systems and sensory ex-
ploitation. O.v/: Sun 1 . Evoi Biol. 7: 157-195.
Salmon, M., and K. W. Horch. 1972. Acoustic signalling and detection
by semi-terrestrial crabs of the family Ocypodidae. Pp 60-96 in Be-
havior of Marine Animals. Current Perspectives in Research. Vol. I,
Invertebrates. H. E. Winn and B. L. Olla. eds. Plenum Press, New
York.
Seifert, P. 1982. Studies on the sex pheromone of the shore crab.
Carcinus maenas, with special regard to ecdysone excretion. Ophelia
12(2): 147-158.
Siegel, S., and N. J. Castellan Jr. 1988. Nonparametric Statistics for the
Behavioral Sciences. 2nd ed. McGraw-Hill, New York.
Snyder, M. J., C. Ameyaw-Akumfi, and E. S. Chang. 1993. Sex
recognition and the role of urinary cues in the lobster, Homarus
americanus. Mar. Behav. Physio/. 24: 101-116.
Stauffer, H. P., and R. D. Semlitch. 1993. Effects of visual, chemical
and tactile cues of fish on the behavioural responses of tadpoles. Anim.
Behav. 46: 355-364.
Talbot, P., and D. Deniers. 1993. Tegumental glands of Crustacea. Pp.
CONCURRENT SIGNALS IN BLUE CRABS
71
151-191 in The Crustacean Integument. M. N. Horst and J. A. Free-
man, eds. CRC Press, Boca Raton.
Teytaud, A. R. 1971. The laboratory studies of sex recognition in the
blue crab, Callinectes sapidus Rathbun. Sea Grant Technical Bulletin
No. 156. University of Miami Sea Grant Program. 62 pp.
Tinbergen, N. 1953. Social Behaviour in Animals with Special Refer-
ence to Vertebrates. Chapman and Hall. London.
Van den Hurk, R., and J. G. D. Lambert. 1983. Ovarian steroid
gluconurides function as sex pheromones for female zebrafish, Brachy-
danio rerio. Can. J. Zool. 61: 2381-2387.
Van Engel, W. A. 1958. The blue crab and its fishery in Chesapeake
Bay. Part I Reproduction, early development, growth and migration.
Commer. Fish. Rev. 20: 6-17.
Vetter, R. S., and T. C. Baker. 1983. Behavioral responses of male
Heliothis virescens in a sustained-flight tunnel to combinations of
seven compounds identified from female sex pheromone glands.
/ Chem. Ecol. 9: 747-759.
Waas, J. R., and P. W. Colgan. 1992. Chemical cues associated with
visually elaborate aggressive displays of three-spine sticklebacks.
J. Chem. Ecol. 18(2): 2277-2284.
West-Eberhard, M. J. 1989. Phenotypic plasticity and the origins of
diversity. Annu. Rev. Ecol. Syst. 20: 249-278.
Reference: BinL Bull 197: 72-81. (August 1999)
Translocation of Photosynthetic Carbon From
Two Algal Symbionts to the Sea Anemone
Anthopleura elegantissima
HILARY P. ENGEBRETSON AND GISELE MULLER-PARKER*
Department of Biology and Shannon Point Marine Center, Western Washington University,
Bellingham, Washington 98225-9160
Abstract. The intertidal sea anemone Anthopleura el-
egantissima contains two symbiotic algae, zoochlorellae
and zooxanthellae, in the Northern Puget Sound region.
Possible nutritional advantages to hosting one algal symbi-
ont over the other were explored by comparing the photo-
synthetic and carbon translocation rates of both symbionts
under different environmental conditions. Each alga trans-
located 30% of photosynthetically fixed carbon in freshly
collected anemones, although zoochlorellae fixed and trans-
located less carbon than zooxanthellae. The total amount of
carbon translocated to the host was equivalent because
densities of zoochlorellae were two to three times greater
than were densities of zooxanthellae. In A. elegantissima
maintained under high and low irradiance ( 100 and 10 /xmol
photons/rrr/s) at 20C and 13C for 21 days, both algae
fixed and translocated carbon at greater rates at 20C (trans-
location rates: 0.38 pg C /zoochlorella/h; 1.12 pg C /zoo-
xanthella/h) than at 13C (translocation rates: 0.06 pg
C /zoochlorella/h; 0.37 pg C /zooxanthella/h). However,
zoochlorellate anemones received 3.5 times less carbon at
20C than at 13C because the higher temperature caused a
significant reduction in the density of zoochlorellae. Envi-
ronmental variables, like temperature, that influence the
densities of the two symbionts will affect their relative
nutritional contribution to the host. Whether these differ-
ences in carbon translocation rates of the two algal symbi-
onts affect the ecology of their anemone host awaits further
investigation.
Received 12 January 1998; accepted 3 June 1999.
* To whom correspondence should be addressed. E-mail: gisele
biol.wwu.edu
Introduction
The temperate sea anemones Anthopleura elegantissima
and Anthopleura xanthogrammica host both dinoflagellate
zooxanthellae and green algae known only generally as
zoochlorellae (Muscatine, 1971). Both algal symbionts pho-
tosynthetically fix inorganic carbon and translocate some of
the products to the animal host. Zooxanthellae in corals, as
well as in A. elegantissima, translocate carbon to the host
mainly as glycerol (Muscatine, 1967; Trench, 1971; Battey
and Patton, 1987). Glycerol is used by the host to support its
basal metabolism, while lipids that are also translocated by
the algae are used to create lipid stores (Battey and Patton,
1987). We do not know what products are translocated by
marine zoochlorellae to their host, although unpublished
work by Minnick and McCloskey (cited in Verde and Mc-
Closkey, 1996) indicates that zoochlorellae translocate sev-
eral amino acids in addition to glycerol. For zoochlorellae in
the freshwater green hydra, maltose is the principal form of
translocated photosynthate (Mews and Smith, 1982).
Further understanding of the nutritional relationship be-
tween Anthopleura and the two algae may come from
comparisons of the amount of carbon translocated from the
algae to the host. Previous studies have suggested that
zoochlorellae do not translocate as much carbon as zoo-
xanthellae. Using I4 C, O'Brien (1980) found that zoochlo-
rellae in excised tentacles translocate from zero to 3.6% of
the total carbon fixed by the algae to the epidermal tissues
of Anthopleura xanthogrammica. Zooxanthellae in intact
anemones translocate as much as 50% of the total I4 C-
labelled carbon fixed to the host fraction of A. elegantissima
(Trench, 1971). Based on carbon budgets, Verde and Mc-
Closkey (1996) calculate that zooxanthellae will have pho-
tosynthetic products available to supply A. elegantissima
72
CARBON TRANSLOCATION IN ANEMONES
73
with 48% of its respiratory carbon requirement, while zoo-
chlorellae will only he able to satisfy 9% of the anemone's
respiratory needs. Verde and McCloskey conclude that the
higher net photosynthesis and lower algal growth demand of
zooxanthellae combine to provide more photosynthetic car-
bon to a zooxanthellate host anemone than is the case for an
anemone that contains zoochlorellae as its endosymbiont.
These studies show that zooxanthellae appear to be the
"better" symbiont with respect to carbon supplied to the
host.
It is important to directly compare carbon translocation
rates of zoochlorellae and zooxanthellae under different
temperatures and irradiance levels, because intertidal A.
elegantissima are exposed to extreme seasonal fluctuations
in these parameters (Dingman. 1998). Furthermore, both
irradiance and temperature are thought to influence the
distribution of these two algae within anemones. Field ob-
servations of the distribution of Anthopleura xanthogram-
mica in British Columbia, Canada, by O'Brien and Wytten-
bach (1980) led the authors to suggest that zooxanthellae
and zoochlorellae populations in anemones may be regu-
lated by temperature. In the lower latitude, warmer regions
of Anthopleura' s range zooxanthellae are the dominant
symbiont, while zoochlorellae are more abundant in anem-
ones in the higher latitude, colder regions of Anthopleura 's
range (Secord, 1995). Are these distribution patterns related
to differences in carbon translocation of the two algae?
Saunders and Muller-Parker (1997) determined that in-
creased temperature caused a reduction in the density of
zoochlorellae in Anthopleura elegantissima tentacles over
time. How do such changes in algal density affect the rate of
carbon translocation to the host?
This study compares carbon fixation and translocation
rates of both zoochlorellate and zooxanthellate anemones
collected from a single site and kept under different envi-
ronmental conditions likely to be encountered in the field.
The effects of irradiance and temperature on translocation
of fixed carbon from zooxanthellae and zoochlorellae to A.
elegantissima are examined by measuring the distribution of
radioactively labelled carbon in the algae and in the animal
host, and relating the carbon translocation rates to popula-
tion densities of the respective algae.
Materials and Methods
Collection of anemones and determination of symbiont
complement
Anthopleura elegantissima was collected from a rocky
intertidal area located on Anaco Beach, Fidalgo Island,
Washington (48 29'; 122 42') in June and July of 1994.
Ambient seawater temperature was 11C. Both zooxanthel-
late and zoochlorellate anemones were collected from the
same large boulder, at one tidal height (+0.6 m). Nonsym-
biotic (algae-free) anemones were collected from dark crev-
ices in a nearby rock jetty. The anemones were placed in
flow-through ambient seawater tables at Shannon Point
Marine Center for one day before experiments began.
The anemones were separated by color and excised ten-
tacles from several anemones were examined microscopi-
cally to verify that anemones that appeared brown in the
field actually contained zooxanthellae, that green anemones
contained zoochlorellae, and that white anemones were
algae-free.
The symbiont complement of all anemones was con-
firmed by counting the number of zoochlorellae and zoo-
xanthellae in homogenized anemone samples after 14 C in-
cubation. Zoochlorellate anemones from the field contained
an average of 99.0% (2.0 SD, ;; == 18) zoochlorellae,
while zooxanthellate anemones contained an average of
97.3% (3.2 SD. ;; = 18) zooxanthellae. Three field anem-
ones that contained mixed populations of both symbionts
contained from 40% to 60% of each alga (average = 53%
zoochlorellae) within their tissues.
Experimental treatments: symbiont. light, and temperature
To examine the effects of irradiance and temperature on
zooxanthellate and zoochlorellate anemones, a 2 X 2 X 2
factorial experiment was designed with factors of anemone
symbiont type, irradiance level, and temperature. Two ex-
periments were run sequentially in one incubator. For each,
28 anemones, consisting of 14 zoochlorellate anemones and
14 zooxanthellate anemones, were placed in individual
50-ml beakers containing 35 ml of 5 /xm-filtered seawater.
For the first experiment the anemones were incubated at
20C; for the second experiment the anemones were incu-
bated at 13C. The beakers containing the anemones were
arranged randomly within the incubator under a bank of
fluorescent lights providing a mean irradiance of 100 /j,mol
photons/nr/s. For each experiment, half of each group of
anemones was covered with mesh for the low irradiance
treatment (10% of full irradiance; see Saunders and Muller-
Parker. 1997, for details). The lights were set to a natural
daylength cycle of 14 h:10 h (lighf.dark). The anemones
were fed every three days with freshly hatched Anemia
nauplii and were last fed two days prior to 14 C incubation.
The anemones were maintained under the experimental
conditions for 21 days prior to measuring carbon fixation
and translocation rates.
Carbon fixation and translocation
The amount of carbon photosynthetically fixed by the
algal symbionts and translocated to the anemone host was
measured using the I4 C method (O'Brien, 1980; Battey and
Patton, 1987), with some modifications. One hour prior to
the I4 C incubation period each anemone was transferred to
an individual clear plastic vial (Nunc* tube). Exactly 10 ml
74
H P. ENGEBRETSON AND G. MULLER-PARKER
of 5 /xm-filtered seawater was added to each vial and the
anemones were returned to their treatment conditions.
The I4 C incubations were always begun at the same time
of day (0900 h) to minimize variation due to any factors
associated with the natural photoperiod of the anemone. The
addition of 14 C-bicarbonate to each vial was noted as time
zero. After thorough mixing, 100 /j,l of the seawater was
subsampled to determine the total activity of the seawater in
the vial, which ranged from 13.6 to 21.3 juCi/anemone.
Anemones in vials that were covered completely with foil to
exclude light served as controls for each experiment. These
controls were used to account for dark fixation of I4 C by the
algae and/or the animal under each set of conditions. Sep-
arate controls were run for zoochlorellate and for zooxan-
thellate anemones. All anemones were incubated with 14 C
for 1 .5 h under the appropriate temperature and irradiance
conditions they had experienced for 21 days. After incuba-
tion, the anemones were rinsed thoroughly with non-la-
belled seawater, making sure that seawater retained in the
coelenteron was also expelled. The seawater in the vials was
replaced, and all of the vials were covered completely with
foil. The vials were then returned to the appropriate incu-
bation conditions for the dark chase period, which was
1.75 h for most experiments. Following the dark chase
period, the anemones were rinsed again and individually
homogenized in seawater with a motor-driven teflon tissue
grinder (60 ml volume). Homogenate volume (= anemone)
was measured and 1 ml of the homogenate was frozen for
later protein analysis. A 0.5 ml sample of the homogenate
was transferred to a 7-ml plastic scintillation vial and acid-
ified with 0.3 ml 6 N HCI under a heat lamp in a fume hood
to remove unincorporated inorganic I4 C label. Assay of
homogenate was used to determine the amount of I4 C fixed
by the whole anemone.
The algae were separated from the host fraction to mea-
sure the distribution of I4 C in both fractions. Ten ml of the
homogenate was centrifuged in a table top swinging bucket
centrifuge for 10 min. The algal pellet was rinsed two times
and the final algal pellet was resuspended in 5 ml of filtered
seawater. The combined supernatant was the animal frac-
tion of the homogenate and the resuspended pellet was the
algal fraction. The final animal fraction volume was mea-
sured and 1-nil samples of the animal and algal fraction
were frozen for later analysis. Half-milliliter (0.5-ml) sam-
ples of each fraction were acidified with 0.3 ml 6 N HCI, as
described above. The acidified homogenate, animal, and
algal samples in the scintillation vials were then neutralized
with 0.3 ml 6 /V NaOH, 5 ml of Ecolume scintillation fluid
was added, and disintegrations per minute (DPM) of each
sample counted in a Packard TriCarb 1900TR liquid scin-
tillation counter.
To compare trunslocution of 14 C by freshly collected field
anemones to the anemones in the experimental treatments,
anemones gathered from the field were subjected to I4 C
analysis the day after collection. These anemones were kept
under a light bank of fluorescent lamps at a photosyntheti-
cally saturating irradiance of 309 ^tmol photons/nr/s in a
flow-through ambient seawater table ( 1 1C) until I4 C anal-
ysis.
Bioniciss parameters
The protein content of the homogenate and animal frac-
tions of each anemone was determined by the method of
Lowry (Lowry el al., 1951). using bovine serum albumin
(BSA) as a standard. Two replicates of both homogenate
and animal fractions from each anemone were analyzed on
a Hitachi 100-40 spectrophotometer. To ascertain the algal
biomass and proportion of zoochlorellae and zooxanthellae
in each anemone, cell counts were done on the frozen algal
fractions. The number of each alga (zoochlorellae and zoo-
xanthellae) in each sample was counted using a hemacy-
tometer viewed under a compound microscope. Six repli-
cate counts of algal numbers were done for each sample.
The mean of the replicate counts was normalized to weight
of anemone homogenate protein to provide an estimate of
algal density in each anemone.
Percent carbon translocation
The percent of fixed I4 C translocated to the host during
the 1.75-h dark chase time was determined by dividing the
DPM calculated for the whole animal fraction by DPM in
the whole homogenate fraction. Any dark carbon fixation by
the algae and host was accounted for by subtracting the
mean DPM per nig protein of the dark control fractions for
the appropriate symbiont type from the DPM per mg protein
of each experimental anemone fraction (homogenate or
animal) before calculating the percent translocation. For all
symbiotic anemones, dark fixation accounted for less than
10% of the total carbon fixed by anemones in the light. For
the nonsymbiotic anemones, dark fixation accounted for
86% of the total carbon fixed. Because the data were in the
form of percentages, they were arcsine transformed for
statistical analysis.
Rates of carbon fixation anil translocation
Although the percent of fixed carbon translocated to the
host is important, it does not indicate the actual rate of
carbon received by the anemone under different environ-
mental conditions. For that information, the rates of carbon
fixation and translocation must be examined. The specific
activity of I4 C in the seawater was used to calculate the
actual amount of carbon fixed and translocated. The weight
of carbon dioxide (all forms) present in the seawater was
determined by the alkalinity method described in Parsons et
al. ( 1984). The weight of the total inorganic carbon present
in the seawater was then multiplied by the rate of uptake (or
CARBON TRANSLOCATION IN ANEMONES
75
100 -
c 80 -
S
|
f 60 -
ro
O
! "0 -I
c
- 20 -
I
10
15
1
20
I
25
Time (h)
Figure 1. The effects of symbiont type and dark chase period on the
percent of carbon translocated to the host anemone, n = 2 for each group;
1 SD of the mean.
translocation) of the labelled carbon in the sample, as de-
termined by dividing DPM in the homogenate (or animal)
fraction sample (corrected for DPM in the dark control) by
the total activity (DPM) of the I4 C added and the hours of
incubation with I4 C. The result is the rate of carbon fixation
(or translocation), as amount of C fixed (or translocated) per
hour.
Carbon fixation and translocation rates can be expressed
on the basis of both anemone biomass (protein) and on the
basis of an individual algal cell. Comparison of rates nor-
malized to these two parameters shows how algal density
affects photosynthesis and translocation. The rate of carbon
fixed by anemones was calculated by using the homogenate
fractions in the above calculation and normalizing to either
anemone protein biomass or to number of algae. The rate of
carbon translocated to the animal was calculated by using
the animal fractions in the above calculation.
All analyses of variance and multiple range test statistics
were examined with a significance level of 5%. Statistics
were calculated using Statistix 4. 1 by Analytical Software.
Results
Percent C translocation over time
A I4 C pulse-chase time course experiment was conducted
with field anemones to determine if and how the length of
the dark chase time affected the percent of carbon translo-
cated to the host by the two symbionts. A 2 X 6 factorial
analysis of variance showed that symbiont type had a sig-
nificant effect on percent translocation (P < 0.000). Over
the entire chase time period, the percent of fixed carbon
translocated to the host by zooxanthellae is significantly
higher than the percent of fixed carbon translocated by
zoochlorellae (Fig. 1). The length of the chase time period
also significantly affected the percent of carbon translocated
to the host anemone (P = 0.031). but there was no inter-
action between symbiont type and chase period. Tukey's
(HSD) multiple range test indicated that only chase time
periods of 10.2 h and 22 h are significantly different from
each other. To permit direct comparison of the effects of
external factors (temperature and irradiance) on percent
translocation. we used a short dark chase period ( 1.75 h) to
compare C translocation of zoochlorellae and zooxanthellae
in all subsequent experiments.
Percent transl
There was no significant difference in the percent of
carbon translocated from the algae to the animal in zoo-
chlorellate, zooxanthellate. and mixed anemones collected
from the field and incubated under saturating irradiance and
at ambient seawater temperature (comparison by ANOVA).
Percent carbon translocated averaged 30% for all field
anemones under these conditions (Fig. 2).
The percent C translocated was higher for anemones
maintained under the experimental treatments than for field
anemones, and zoochlorellae translocated a greater percent
of carbon (up to 65%; Fig. 2). Both temperature and sym-
biont type are significant main effects on percent transloca-
tion. Both symbionts translocated greater percentages of
fixed carbon at 20C than at 13C (2X2X2 factorial
analysis, P = 0.013). Additionally, zoochlorellae translo-
cated a higher percent of fixed carbon than zooxanthellae
(P = 0.036) at both temperatures. Irradiance was not a
significant main effect on the percent of carbon translocated
to the host (P = 0.437). No interaction effects were signif-
icant. Although these results show that hosting zoochlorel-
Field
Zoochlorellate
Zooxanthellate
100 n
80 -
60 -
40 -
20 -
T
I
I
1
v v V
A
A
Figure 2. Percent of carbon translocated to the anemone host after a
1.75 h dark chase period. Field anemones were incubated at 11C and a
light intensity of 309 jixmol photons/nr/s (for Zoochlorellate anemones.
n = 4; lor zooxanthellate and mixed anemones, n = 2). Experimental
Zoochlorellate and zooxanthellate anemones were incubated under their
treatment conditions: high light (HL. 100 /j,mol/nr/s ) or low light (LL, 10
/j,mol/nr/s) at either 13 or 20"C (20 or 13). n = 5 for each group; 1 SD
of the mean.
76
H. P. ENGEBRETSON AND G. MULLER-PARKER
Zoochlorellate
Zooxanthellate
u.io -
'c
AA
f 0.10 -
CL
T
O)
"S 0.05 -
1
O
01
=3
n nn -
r 1 ] r*-\
-! B
Figure 3. The rate of carbon fixation by zoochlorellate (D) and zoo-
xanthellate () anemones incubated under their treatment conditions: high
light (HL. KM) jamol/rrr/s) or low light (LL, 10 /xmol/nr/s) at either 13 or
20 C (20 or 13). it = 5 for each group; 1 SD of the mean. A. The rate
of carbon fixation per mg anemone protein. B. The rate of carbon fixation
per algal cell.
lae at higher temperatures results in a greater percent of
fixed carbon to the anemone, carbon translocation rates are
needed to compare the actual amounts of carbon received by
zoochlorellate and zooxanthellate anemones under field and
experimental conditions.
Rates of carbon fixation and translocation
The rate of carbon fixation by zoochlorellate and zoo-
xanthellate anemones maintained under high and low irra-
diance at 13C and 20C for 21 days was significantly
affected by an interaction between temperature and symhi-
ont type (P = 0.009). While zooxanthellate anemones fixed
carbon at the same rate at both temperatures, zoochlorellate
anemones fixed about three times more carbon at 13C than
at 20"C for rates expressed on the basis of anemone biomass
(Fig. 3a). Carbon fixation and translocation rates expressed
on an algal cell basis are needed to compare these processes
at the level of the individual algal cell with that of the
symbiotic association. When the rate of carbon fixation is
normalized to algal numbers instead of to anemone protein
biomass, none of the interaction effects were significant and
both algae fixed carbon at a lower rate at 13C than at 20C
(2.3 times less and 3 times less, respectively; P = 0.004:
Fig. 3b). The rate of carbon fixation per algal cell is signif-
icantly greater under high irradiance than under low irradi-
ance (P = 0.045), and at both temperatures the zoo.xanthel-
lae fixed carbon at a significantly greater rate than did the
zoochlorellae (P = 0.000).
As shown in Figure 4a for carbon fixation rates normal-
ized to anemone biomass, (he rate of carbon translocated to
the host anemone is significantly affected by an interaction
between temperature and symbiont type (P = 0.009).
While zooxanthellate anemones experienced similar rates of
carbon translocation at both temperatures, rates of translo-
cation in zoochlorellate anemones were almost 3.5 times
less at 20C than at I3C (Fig. 4a). At 13C. rates of
translocation are comparable for both zoochlorellate and
zooxanthellate anemones, and these rates were higher at the
high irradiance level at both temperatures (Fig. 4a). When
carbon translocation rates are normalized to algal cell num-
ber, a significant interaction between temperature and sym-
biont type is again observed (P = 0.039; Fig. 4b). In this
case, the rate of carbon translocation was also greater per
Zoochlorellate
Zooxanthellate
08 -,
I o.oe H
I
"S 4 -
i
, 1__
i
o
0.02 -
ro
O
_ n nn
n
4 -i
|3H
2>
ro
I 2
S
^2
1 1
O
S
B
Figure 4. The rate of carbon translocation by zoochlorellate (D) and
zooxanthellate () anemones incubated under their treatment conditions:
high light (HL, 100 /nmol/nr/s) or low light (LL. 10 /^mol/nr/s) at either
13 or 20"C (20 or 13). ;i = 5 for each group; I SD of the mean. A. The
rate of carbon translocation per mg anemone protein. B. The rate ot carbon
translocation per algal cell.
CARBON TRANSLOCATION IN ANEMONES
Table I
Rales of carbon fixation and iranslocation by algae in zoochlorellate. zooxanthellate and mixed field anemones collected during summer,
normalized to anemone protein biomass or to alga
77
ANEMONE TYPE
CARBON
FIXED
CARBON
TRANSLOCATED
fj.g C fixed/mg
protein/h
pg C fixed/
alga/h
/^g C translocated/mg
protein/h
pg C translocated/
alga/h
Zoochlorellate
Zooxanthellate
Mixed
Results of 1-way ANOVA
0.110 0.03
0.145 0.06
0.199 0.02
NS
0.275 0.14
1.236 1.13
0.684 0.08
NS
0.034 0.007"
0.038 0.004"
0.065 0.0 12 b
P = 0.014
0.091 .06
0.390 0.042
0.221 0.01
NS
For zoochlorellate anemones, n = 4; for zooxanthellate and mixed anemones, n = 2. NS denotes the parameters (column headings) that are not
significantly different among the three anemone types. Tukey's HSD Multiple Range Test indicated that both zoochlorellate and zooxanthellate anemones
experienced similar rates of translocation per mg protein, while mixed anemones experienced a significantly greater rate of translocation per mg protein
(a and b are used to indicate these differences among anemone types).
zooxanthella than per zoochlorella at both 13C and 20C;
however, while zooxanthellae translocated approximately
2.5 times less carbon at 13C as at 20C, zoochlorellae
translocated almost 4 times less carbon at 13C as at 20C
(comparisons between temperatures use pooled rates from
both irradiance levels, because irradiance did not affect the
rate of carbon translocation per algal cell).
Although our sample size for field anemones is small,
data obtained from these anemones provide a valuable com-
parison to treatment anemones. When mixed anemones are
included in the comparison of carbon fixation and translo-
cation rates of field anemones, the carbon fixation rates of
zoochlorellate, zooxanthellate, and mixed field anemones
are not significantly different from each other, whether
expressed on the basis of anemone protein biomass or algal
cell (Table I). Although algal cell-based translocation is not
significantly different, the rate of carbon translocation per
mg protein in A. elegantissima is significantly affected by
symbiont type (Table I). However, Tukey's HSD Multiple
Range Test indicated that both zoochlorellate and zooxan-
thellate anemones experienced similar rates of translocation
per mg protein, while mixed anemones experienced a sig-
nificantly greater rate of translocation per mg protein.
Algal density in anemones
Zoochlorellate field anemones contained significantly
higher algal densities than did zooxanthellate field anemo-
nes (Fig. 5; P = 0.000). Mixed anemones had algal densities
between those of zooxanthellate and zoochlorellate anemo-
nes; the density of algae in mixed anemones was not sig-
nificantly different from the density of algae in either zoo-
xanthellate or zoochlorellate anemones.
A two-way ANOVA performed on the algal density
within the anemones after 21 days under the experimental
treatments showed that the interaction between temperature
and symbiont type was significant (P = 0.001). All anem-
ones held at 20C contained similar densities of algae;
however, at 13C zooxanthellate anemones had signifi-
cantly fewer algae per mg anemone protein than did
zoochlorellate anemones (Fig. 5). Anemones held in the
laboratory under all experimental treatments contained sig-
nificantly fewer algae than did anemones freshly collected
from the field (P = 0.000).
Discussion
Percent translocation and translocation rates
In the field, zoochlorellate and zooxanthellate anemones
receive the same amount of photosynthetic carbon from
their symbionts during the summer in northern Puget Sound
(Fig. 2, Table I). These results suggest that during summer
50 -
C. 40 -
Field
Zoochlorellate
Zooxanthellate
'o
o.
ID
C
o
30 -
20 -
en
1
Figure 5. Density of algae in field anemones (n = 20, 17, and 3 for
zoochlorellate. zooxanthellate, and mixed anemones respectively) and in
zoochlorellate (D) and zooxanthellate anemones after 21 days under
high light (HL, 100 jumol/nr/s) or low light (LL. 10 /j.mol/nr/s) at either
13 or 20C (20 or 13). n = 7 for each group; 1 SD of the mean.
78
H. P. ENGEBRETSON AND G. MULLER-PARKER
there is no selective advantage, with respect to carbon, of
hosting one symbiont over the other under saturating irra-
diance levels and ambient temperature. However, under
different environmental conditions imposed in a laboratory
experiment, zoochlorellae translocated a greater percent of
fixed carbon to the host than did zooxanthellae, and both
algal symbionts translocated a significantly greater percent
of the carbon they fixed at 20C than at 13C (Fig. 2). The
implications of these results are discussed below.
In our study, zoochlorellae translocated a much greater
percent of the fixed carbon than shown by the previous
studies of Muscatine ( 197 1 ), O'Brien (1980), and Verde and
McCloskey (1996). However, the percent carbon translo-
cated by both algae in A. elegantissima is comparable to
values obtained for other temperate cnidarian symbioses
(Sutton and Hoegh-Guldberg, 1990; Davy et at., 1997).
Muscatine (1971), using I4 C analysis, determined that zoo-
chlorellae translocate only 1 .0% to 3.6% of the carbon they
fix. However, Muscatine used only the tentacles and not
whole anemones in his experiments; in addition, for some
experiments the animal and algal fractions from tentacles
were homogenized and separated before incubation with
I4 C. O'Brien (1980) found that zoochlorellae translocated
1.3% to 3.9% of the carbon they fixed. O'Brien also used
only tentacles of A. xanthogrammica. He dissected the
epidermis of the anemone from the algae-containing gastro-
dermis after 14 C incubation and used the epidermis as the
animal fraction and the gastrodermis as the algal fraction for
translocation calculations. Any labelled carbon that the al-
gae had translocated to the gastrodermal tissues of the host
was counted as fixed carbon retained by the algal fraction.
In addition, any host mechanisms acting upon translocation
would be lost due to the excision of the tentacle from the
remainder of the anemone body.
The 14 C method employed in this study accounts only for
short-term carbon products fixed and released by the algae
from inorganic carbon supplied in the external environment.
There is substantial evidence for zooxanthellae that recently
fixed carbon is released to the host (Sutton and Hoegh-
Guldberg, 1990; Wang and Douglas, 1997). In contrast,
translocation of carbon based on the growth-rate method
takes into account the daily carbon budget of the symbiotic
algae (Muscatine et al, 1984). Because carbon required for
algal growth may be supplied from the host animal (Trench,
1979), any contribution of host-derived carbon is wholly
missed by the I4 C method as applied here. This may explain
the discrepancy between our results and those of Verde and
McCloskey (1996), who found that zoochlorellae may have
only minimal excess carbon available to translocate to the
host. The algae may selectively translocate photosyntheti-
cally fixed carbon while concurrently obtaining carbon for
growth from the anemone host. This comparison also illus-
trates the importance of defining the time scales used to
assess carbon translocation. Zoochlorellate and zooxanthel-
late anemones receive the same amount of translocated
carbon during short-term (hours) I4 C incubations (our re-
sults), while growth rate comparisons based on longer time
intervals (days to weeks) show that zoochlorellae translo-
cate less carbon (Verde and McCloskey, 1996). The appro-
priate time scale for comparisons of these two algae will
depend on the metabolic fate of the translocated carbon and
on the external supply of carbon derived from host feeding.
Higher carbon fixation rates by both algae at the high
irradiance level at both temperatures also resulted in greater
carbon translocation rates (Figs. 3, 4). It appears that the
symbiotic algae simply translocate fixed carbon at a higher
rate under high irradiance because they have more photo-
synthetic product available. These results indicate that, with
similar algal densities, anemones located in areas exposed to
high solar irradiance should receive larger amounts of fixed
carbon from their symbionts than should anemones located
in areas of low light. The same is true for temperature. Both
zoochlorellae and zooxanthellae fixed and translocated car-
bon at greater rates at 20C. However, the advantage of
greater carbon translocation at the higher temperature and
irradiance level on an algal cell basis is offset by lower algal
densities under these conditions, reducing the amount of
carbon received by the anemone (see below).
Algal density and carbon translocation in anemones
Zoochlorellate anemones from the field contained ap-
proximately two to three times the density of algae as did
zooxanthellate anemones (Fig. 5), as has been found by
others (Verde and McCloskey, 1996; Dingman, 1998).
Thus, although an individual zoochlorella translocates car-
bon to the host anemone at a lesser rate than does a zoo-
xanthella (Table I; Fig. 4b), both anemone types receive
fixed carbon at similar rates because of increased densities
of zoochlorellae in field anemones (Fig. 5). Interestingly,
although the zoochlorellae are numerically more abundant,
volume comparisons indicate that they occupy the same
"space" as the larger zooxanthellae within the anemones
(unpub. data). Therefore, both anemone types in the field
maintain similar ratios of algal to animal biomass and
receive similar amounts of photosynthate.
Anemones in all experimental treatments contained sig-
nificantly fewer algae than did field anemones, and both
types of anemone had lower algal densities at the higher
temperature (Fig. 5). This may be related to differences in
summer field conditions and laboratory incubator condi-
tions. Although anemones were maintained at relatively low
constant irradiances in the lab (an order of magnitude lower
than noon irradiance levels in the field), they probably
received more light on a daily basis than field anemones
because of tide-related changes in water depth and rapid
light extinction due to high plankton levels in summer. Field
anemones also experienced pronounced daily changes in
CARBON TRANSLOCATION IN ANEMONES
79
water temperature during periods of exposure to low tide.
Changes in density of symbionts may result from differ-
ences in both algal growth rate and algal expulsion rate
under the experimental treatments. Although we did not
measure these parameters in our study, zooxanthellate and
zoochlorellate A. elegantissima have higher algal expulsion
rates at 20C than at 13C (Saunders, 1995). McCloskey el
al. ( 1996) also found that algal expulsion rates increase with
increasing irradiance, and concluded that algal densities in
A. elegantissima are regulated by expulsion of excess algae.
In mixed anemones, the presence of the dominant symbiont
is more likely due to that alga's ability to grow at a rate that
meets or exceeds the rate of expulsion by the anemone and
the growth rate of the other algal species. It is likely that
greater numbers of algae were lost from zoochlorellate
anemones than were lost from zooxanthellate anemones at
20C since, as noted earlier, zoochlorellate anemones from
the field contain higher densities of algae than do zooxan-
thellate anemones.
With respect to translocation of photosynthetic carbon,
the relative abundance of zooxanthellae and zoochlorellae
in A. elegantissima determines the amount of carbon trans-
located within anemones. How does the advantage of
greater carbon translocation at the higher temperature and
irradiance level on an algal cell basis affect the amount of
carbon received by anemones when these also contain lower
algal densities (Fig. 5)7 A zoochlorellate anemone held at
13C under high light receives 0.048 /xg C/mg protein/h
from its algae (Fig. 4a). To maintain this rate of carbon
translocation at 20C. the anemone would require an algal
density of only 9.6 X 10 4 algae/mg protein because indi-
vidual zoochlorellae translocate 2.5 times more at the higher
temperature. However, the density of zoochlorellae at 20C
was one-fourth (26%) of this density (Fig. 5), showing that
the higher translocation rate per cell was not sufficient to
compensate for the reduced density of zoochlorellae at the
higher temperature. A similar calculation for a zooxanthel-
late anemone shows that it needs 2.97 X 10 4 algae/mg
protein at 20C to maintain a translocation rate equivalent to
that obtained at 13C. However, zooxanthellate anemones
held at 20C contained 3.5 X 10 4 algae/mg protein (Fig. 5),
about 18% more than required to maintain the translocation
rate obtained at 13C. This slightly elevated density of
zooxanthellae was not sufficient to yield any significant
difference in translocation rate (Fig. 4a). Using carbon
translocation at 13C as the basis of comparison, zoochlo-
rellate anemones lost more algae than they should have at
20C, and zooxanthellate anemones kept more algae than
they needed to at this temperature. This comparison sug-
gests that the nutritional contribution of the algae is not
important to the host anemone and there is no regulation of
algal densities to maintain certain carbon translocation
rates. However, the cost to the host anemone of harboring
symbionts at different densities is unknown. Should reduced
algal densities lower the cost of maintaining the symbionts.
then simply comparing carbon translocation rates is insuf-
ficient for assessing benefit to the host.
Application to the field
The Anthopleura elegantissima-zoo\anthe\\a nutritional
relationship has been examined by determining the percent
contribution of translocated carbon to animal respiration
(CZAR). Shick and Dykens (1984) indicated that CZAR
was greater for low intertidal (34%) than for high intertidal
anemones (18%) due to self-shading of the anemone during
exposure to air. while Fitt el al. (1982) demonstrated that
CZAR for fed anemones (13%') was less than that for
starved anemones (45%). In the only study to compare
CZAR of anemones harboring both symbionts, Verde and
McCloskey (1996) showed that CZAR for zooxanthellate
anemones was much greater than CZAR for zoochlorellate
anemones. The use of CZAR as a tool of comparison hinges
on the assumptions that the algae will translocate all un-
needed fixed carbon, that the anemone will use all of the
translocated carbon, and that the form in which the fixed
carbon is translocated does not matter to the anemone. Some
of these assumptions may not apply to temperate anemone
symbioses.
While there may be energetic advantages to the anemone
to maintaining an algal population within its tissues, these
advantages may be quite limited for temperate anemones
(Davy el al.. 1997). Anthopleura elegantissima may not rely
on carbon supplied by zooxanthellae for growth. Tsuchida
and Potts (1994) demonstrated that A. elegantissima clones
gained or lost weight in response to whether they were fed
or not, regardless of whether they were kept in the light or
dark, or whether they contained zooxanthellae or were al-
gae-free. Similar results for zooxanthellate and zoochlorel-
late anemones were obtained by Blevins (1991). The het-
erotrophic supply of carbon appears to be the primary
source of nutrition for these anemones. Indirect evidence for
high rates of feeding under field conditions is provided by
high ammonium concentrations in anemone-dominated
tidepools (Jensen and Muller-Parker, 1994). Moreover,
Davy el al. (1996) showed that reduced photosynthetic
production of zooxanthellae in temperate anemones due to
cloud cover, depth, and other environmental conditions
could decrease the alga's translocatable carbon to just 0.7%
of that fixed. Reliance on external carbon sources will be
pronounced during seasonally low irradiance during the
winter months. During such times the algae may represent a
liability to the host, especially because algal densities in A.
elegantissima during the winter season are the same as
densities in midsummer (Dingman, 1998). In contrast with
tropical symbiotic associations (Muscatine et al.. 1981;
1984; Davies, 1984), temperate symbiotic cnidarians like
Anthopleura must often depend on sources outside of their
80
H. P. ENGEBRETSON AND G. MULLER-PARKER
algal complement for their respiratory carbon requirements
as well as their growth needs (Davy el ai. 1997).
On the other hand, during warm and sunny periods,
translocated photosynthate may be an important source of
carbon. Clark and Jensen ( 1982) proposed that a period of
high yield during such conditions may be sufficient for the
anemone hosts to keep the symbionts year-round. Because
their study of the anemone Aiptasia pallida showed that
temperature also affects the nature of the translocated prod-
ucts, it will be important to compare the metabolites trans-
located by zoochlorellae and zooxanthellae under the range
of environmental conditions experienced by anemones in
the field. The nature of these metabolites, and the ability of
the anemone host to use translocated compounds, may be
more important than the amount of carbon translocated.
Temperate symbioses exposed to pronounced seasonal vari-
ations in environmental factors are ideal systems in which to
explore variation in the nutritional contribution of algal
symbionts to the host and the consequences for the associ-
ation.
The quantity of carbon translocated, as examined in this
study, is only one factor in the symbiosis between zoochlo-
rellae, zooxanthellae. and the anemone host in temperate
regions. While this factor has justifiably received the great-
est attention in tropical algal-cnidarian symbioses, it is not
at all clear if provision of carbon is the most important
benefit of the symbiosis to temperate A. elegantissima. If it
was, our results suggest that zooxanthellae should predom-
inate given their translocation potential under high temper-
ature. Other selective advantages not directly related to
carbon translocation must also be considered for this dual
symbiosis. For example, there may be different energetic
costs to hosting zooxanthellae and zoochlorellae associated
with photooxidative stress resulting from photosynthesis,
since host anemones must protect against toxic effects of
reactive oxygen species (Shick, 1991). It would be interest-
ing to compare antioxidant defenses in zooxanthellate and
zoochlorellate anemones. There may be behavioral costs
associated with harboring these two algae. If photosynthesis
of zooxanthellae and zoochlorellae results in different ex-
pansion and contraction behaviors of anemones in the field,
these may affect primary productivity and feeding on zoo-
plankton (Shick and Dykens, 1984), as well as gas and
dissolved organic matter exchanges with the environment.
Ecological consequences of harboring different symbionts
must also be considered. For example, Augustine and Mul-
ler-Parker (1998) have shown that selective predation on
zooxanthellate anemones by a sculpin favors the survival
and propagation of zoochlorellate anemones. Future studies
should also focus on long-term comparisons of the growth
and asexual reproduction of zooxanthellate and zoochlorel-
late anemones under a variety of environmental conditions.
Continuing studies of this dual symbiosis in a temperate
environment should prove useful to researchers studying
tropical symbioses as well.
Acknowledgments
We thank two anonymous reviewers for their helpful
comments. This study was supported by a Project Develop-
ment Award from Western Washington University to Gisele
Muller-Parker.
Literature Cited
Augustine, L., and G. Muller-Parker. 1998. Selective predation by the
mosshead sculpin Clinocottus globiceps on the sea anemone Antho-
pleura elegantissima. and its two algal symbionts. Limnol. Oceanogr.
43: 711-71?.
Batley, J. F., and J. S. Patton. 1987. Glycerol translocation in Condy-
lactis gigantea. Mar. Biol. 95: 37 \6.
Blevins, J. K. 1991. Comparative growth and metabolism of zooxanthel-
late and zoochlorellate Anthopletira elegantissima. Master's thesis.
Western Washington University. 41 pp.
Clark, K. B., and K. R. Jensen. 1982. Effects of temperature on carbon
fixation and carbon budget partitioning in the zooxanthellal symbiosis
of Aiptasia pallida (Verrill). / E.v/>. Mar. Biol. Ecol. 64: 215-230.
Davies, P. S. 1984. The role of zooxanthellae in the nutritional energy
requirements of Pocillopora eydoitxi. Coral Reefs 2: 181-186.
Davy, S. K., I. A. N. Lucas, and J. R. Turner. 1996. Carbon budgets in
temperate anthozoan-dinoflagellate symhioses. Mar. Biol. 126: 773-
783.
Davy, S. K., J. R. Turner, and I. A. N. Lucas. 1997. The nature of
temperate anthozoan-dinoflagellate symbioses. Proc. 8 th Int. Coral Reef
Symp. 2: 1307-1312.
Dingman. H. C. 1998. Environmental influence on algal symbiont pop-
ulations in the sea anemone Ant/iopleiiru elegantissima. Master's the-
sis. Western Washington University. 92 pp
Fitt, W. K., R. L. Pardy, and M. M. Littler. 1982. Photosynthesis,
respiration, and contribution to community productivity of the symbi-
otic sea anemone Anthopleura elegantissima (Brandt, 1835). / Exp.
Mar. Biol. Eco/. 61: 213-232.
Jensen, S., and G. Muller-Parker. 1994. Inorganic nutrient fluxes in
anemone-dominated ddepools. Pac. Sci. 48: 3243.
Lowry, O. H., N. J. Rosebrough, H. L. Farr, and R. J. Randall. 1951.
Protein measurement with the Folin phenol reagent. J. Biol. Chan. 193:
265-275.
McCloskey, L. R., T. G. Cove, and E. A. Verde. 1996. Symbiont
expulsion from the anemone Anthopleiint elegantissima (Brandt) (Cni-
dana; Anthozoa). J. E\p. Mai. Biol. Ecol. 195: 173-186.
Mews, L. K., and D. C. Smith. 1982. The green hydra symbiosis. VI.
What is the role of maltose transfer from alga to animal? Proc. R. Soc.
Loiul. B 216: 347-413.
Muscatine, L. 1967. Glycerol excretion by symbiotic algae from corals
and Tridacna and its control by the host. Science 156: 516-519.
Muscatine, L. 1971. Experiments on green algae coexistent with zoo-
xanthellae in sea anemones. Pac. Sci. 25: 13-21.
Muscatine, L.. L. R. McCloskey, and R. E. Marian. 1981. Estimating
the daily contribution of carbon from zooxanthellae to coral animal
respiration. Liuinoi. Oceanogr. 26: 601-61 1.
Muscatine, L., P. G. Falkowski, J. W. Porter, and Z. Duhinsky. 1984.
Fate of photosynthetic fixed carbon in light- and shade-adapted colo-
nies of the symbiotic coral Stylophora pistilUitu. Proc. R Soc. Ltmd. B
222: 181-202.
O'Brien, T. L. 1980. The symbiotic association between intracellular
CARBON TRANSLOCATION IN ANEMONES
81
zoochlorellae (Chlorophyceae) and the coelenterate Anthopleura \uii-
thoxrammica. J. E\p. Zoo/. 211: 343-355.
O'Brien, T. L., and C. R. Wyttenbach. 1980. Some effects of temper-
ature on the symbiotic association between zoochlorellae (Chloro-
phyceae) and the sea anemone Anthopleura xanthogrammica. Trans.
Am. Microse. Sue. 99(2): 221-225.
Parsons, T. R., Y. Malta, and C. M. Lalli. 1984. A Manual of Chemical
and Biological Methods for Seawaler Analysis. Pergamon Press. Ox-
ford, England. Pp. 115-119, 140-148.
Saunders, B. K. 1995. The effects of temperature and light on popula-
tions of symbiotic algae in the sea anemone Anthopleura elegontissima.
Master's thesis. Western Washington University. 52 pp.
Saunders, B. K., and G. Muller-Parker. 1997. The effects of temper-
ature and light on populations of two algae in the temperate sea
anemone Anthopleura elegantissima (Brandt, 1835). J. Exp. Mar. Biol.
Ecol 211: 213-224.
Secnrd, D. L. 1995. Host specificity and symbiotic interactions in sea
anemones. Ph.D. dissertation. University of Washington, Seattle, WA.
88 pp.
Shick, J. M. 1991. A Functional Biology of Sea Anemones. Chapman and
Hall, London.
Shick, J. M.. and J. A. Dykens. 1984. Photobiology of the symbiotic sea
anemone Anihoplenra elexuntiviima: photosynthesis, respiration, and
behavior under intertidal conditions. Biol. Bull. 166: 608-619.
Sutton, D. C., and O. Hoegh-Guldberg. 1990. Host-zooxanthella inter-
actions in four temperate marine invertebrate symbioses: assessment of
effect of host extracts on symbionts. Biol. Bull. 178: 175-186.
Trench, R. K. 1971. The physiology and biochemistry of zooxanthellae
symbiotic with marine coelenterates. 1. Liberation of fixed 14C by
zooxanthellae in vitro. Proc. floy. Sue. Loiul. B. Ill: 237-250.
Trench, R. K. 1979. The cell biology of plant-animal symbiosis. Annu.
Rev. Plant Physiol. 30: 485-53 1 .
Tsuchida, C. B., and D. C. Potts. 1994. The effects of illumination, food
and symbionts on growth of the sea anemone Anthopleura elcxan-
tissima (Brandt, 1835). I. Ramet growth. J. Exp. Mar. Biol. Ecol. 183:
227-242.
Verde, E. A., and L. R. McCloskey. 1996. Photosynthesis and respira-
tion of two species of algal symbionts in the anemone Anthopleura
elegantissima (Brandt) (Cnidaria; Anthozoa). J. Exp. Mar. Biol. Ecol.
195: 161-171.
Wang, J.-T.. and A. E. Douglas. 1997. Nutrients, signals, and photo-
synthate release by symbiotic algae. Plant Physiol. 114: 631-636.
Reference: Biol. Bull 197: 82-93. (August 1999]
Morphology and Epithelial Ion Transport of the
Alkaline Gland in the Atlantic Stingray
(Dasyatis sabina)
GREGORY M. GRABOWSKI. 1 JOHN G. BLACKBURN, 2 AND ERIC R. LACY 3 ' 4
Department of Biology, University of Detroit Mercy, 4001 W. McNichols, P.O. Box 19900, Detroit,
Michigan 48219; 2 Department of Physiology, 3 Department of Cell Biologv and Anatomy,
Medical University of South Carolina, 171 Ashley Avenue, Charleston, South Carolina 29425;
and 4 Marine Biomedicine and Environmental Sciences, Medical University of South Carolina,
221 Fort Johnson Road, Charleston, South Carolina 29412
Abstract. The alkaline glands are two fluid-filled sacs that
lie on the ventral, posterior surface of each kidney in skates
and rays. In this study, the morphology, transepithelial ion
transport, fluid constituents, and histochemistry of the alka-
line glands of the Atlantic stingray, Dasyatis sabina, were
investigated. The duct from each gland joined the corre-
sponding vas deferens and the resulting two common ducts
emptied into the cloaca. Dark burgundy, aqueous fluid (pH
8.0-8.2) was secreted into the sacs by a simple columnar
epithelium with extensive rough endoplasmic reticulum and
large secondary lysosomes containing lipofuscin and mem-
brane fragments. Zonulae occludentes were deep (22
fibrils), reflecting an electrically tight epithelium (732
ohms/cm 2 ). Carbonic anhydrase activity was localized his-
tochemically within the intercellular spaces and less in-
tensely in the mid-basal cytoplasm.
In vitro electrophysiology showed that baseline short-
circuit current (Isc, 29.1 /A A/cm 2 ) was reduced 67.0% after
Cl~ removal from the medium. Cl removal also com-
pletely abolished luminal alkalinization (baseline 4.5 0.7
/LtEq of acid/cnr/h). Luminal exposure to the chloride-
bicarbonate exchange inhibitor, DIDS, reduced Isc by 38%.
Simultaneous administration of DIDS and bumetanide
(Na + /K + /Cl ~ cotransport inhibitor) to the serosal side of
Received 12 April 1999; accepted 14 June 1999.
Send correspondence to Eric R. Lacy. Marine Biomedicine and Envi-
ronmental Sciences, Medical University of South Carolina, 221 Fort John-
son Road. Charleston. SC 29412.
A portion of this work was presented in abstract form (The FASEB
Journal, Part I, #3024, 1992).
the tissue caused the Isc to decrease >100%. Serosal expo-
sure to ouabain (Na-K, ATPase inhibitor) decreased Isc
48%, whereas amiloride (sodium ion channel blocker) and
acetazolamide (carbonic anhydrase inhibitor) had no statis-
tically significant effect on Isc or alkalinization rates. Taken
together the results suggest the presence of apical epithelial
bicarbonate exchangers that are chloride or sodium depen-
dent, basal sodium and HCO^ transport, and an Isc that is
not totally dependent on Na + -K + ATPase.
Introduction
Early anatomical studies of the male skate and stingray
urogenital system reported a pair of blind-ended sacs, each
of which opened into the cloaca. These structures were
described initially as urinary bladders or sperm storage sacs
(Borcea, 1906; Daniel, 1934), but the only evidence to
support this functional nomenclature is the proximity of the
sacs' openings to those of the ureters and vas deferens
within the cloaca.
The sacs secrete and store a watery fluid of high pH
(8.0-9.2), thus their name, alkaline gland (Maren et al.,
1963). On the basis of the high pH of the fluid, Smith ( 1929)
speculated that it neutralized the potentially deleterious
effects of acidic urine in the cloaca on the extruded sperm.
As yet, however, no studies on the physiological function of
the alkaline gland have been published.
A few reports, from various skate species (little skate,
Raja erinacea; barndoor skate, R. stabuliforis; big skate, R.
ocellata), have described the gland's morphology and epi-
thelial transport physiology (H.W. Smith. 1929; Maren et
82
STINGRAY ALKALINE GLAND
83
al.. 1963; Masur. 1984; P. L. Smith, 1981, 1985). These
morphological accounts show that the gland lumen has
mucosal "villar projections" lined by a simple columnar
epithelium (Maren et al.. 1963; Masur, 1984). The mucosa
generates and maintains a hundred-fold concentration gra-
dient of OH ions and a 50-fold gradient of CO 2 from plasma
to gland lumen; these are some of the steepest alkaline
gradients across any epithelium in nature (Maren el al.,
1963). Given the unique epithelial transport properties of
the alkaline gland, physiologic studies have focused on the
mechanisms of fluid and bicarbonate secretion (Maren et
al., 1963; Smith, 1981, 1985).
Chloride and bicarbonate are the two main anions con-
stituting alkaline gland fluid in the skate. In vitro experi-
ments indicate that chloride secretion accounts for most, if
not all, of the short-circuit current (Isc) (Maren et al.. 1963;
Smith. 1981. 1985). These results led to speculation that
chloride-dependent bicarbonate transport might be involved
in fluid alkalinization. Although definitive evidence was
lacking, secreted chloride was believed to recirculate into
the epithelial cell by way of a Cr/HCOJ exchanger located
at the apical plasma membrane (Maren et al., 1963; Smith,
1981. 1985). Carbonic anhydrase, an enzyme associated
with many bicarbonate-secreting tissues, was identified bio-
chemically in the alkaline gland of some but not all skate
species studied (Maren et al., 1963). The concentration of
carbonic anhydrase in the tissue was correlated with the pH
of the alkaline gland fluid produced (Maren et al., 1963),
suggesting that this enzyme has a role in bicarbonate secre-
tion for some skate species.
The present study uses transmission and scanning elec-
tron microscopy and freeze fracture to elucidate the ultra-
structural organization of the alkaline gland in a stingray
species, Dasyatis sabina, the Atlantic stingray. The pres-
ence and distribution of carbonic anhydrase activity, nerve
fibers, and lipofusion were identified histochemically. These
results are correlated with in vitro electrophysiological data
and rates of fluid alkalinization. Some of the regulatory
mechanism of ion transport were probed with various met-
abolic inhibitors. The composition of the fluid removed
from the alkaline glands was analyzed.
Materials and Methods
Sexually mature male Atlantic stingrays (Dasvatis sa-
bina, wing span ~45 cm) purchased from Gulf Specimens
Inc. (Panacea, FL) or captured along the coast of South
Carolina were allowed to acclimate in a 16,000-1 holding
tank for at least 5 days prior to experimentation. Water in
the holding tank was drawn from Charleston (South Caro-
lina) Harbor (650-850 mosm/1) and maintained at room
temperature. Stingrays were fed shrimp twice a week and
kept on a 12-h light/dark cycle. After acclimation, animals
were anesthetized with MS222 (3-aminobenzoic acid ethyl
ester, 0.5 g/1, Sigma Chemical Co.) and double pithed. The
body cavity was opened by a ventral midline incision; the
alkaline gland fluid was aspirated with a 25-gauge needle
and saved at 4C for further analysis; the alkaline gland was
removed for use in morphology or electrophysiology exper-
iments.
Light and electron microscopy
Fixative (2.5% paraformaldehyde, 5.0% glutaraldehyde,
and 0.25% picric acid; Ito and Karnovsky. 1968) was in-
jected into both sacs of the gland immediately after the fluid
was removed. After 1 h the puboischiac bar was severed,
and the alkaline gland was freed from surrounding tissue
with fine forceps. Each gland was excised at its junction
with the cloacal wall and placed in the same fixative for
24 h. The tissue was then rinsed, trimmed into 1-mnr pieces
with a razor blade, and stored in 0.1 M sodium cacodylate
buffer.
Alkaline gland fluid was centrifuged at 200 X g for 10
min. The pellet was fixed for 4 h in the same fixative
injected into the gland sacs (Ito and Karnovsky, 1968). Both
pellet and pieces of fixed gland were then postfixed (1.0%
osmium tetraoxide in 0.1 M sodium cacodylate buffer),
dehydrated in graded ethanols, and embedded in Epon-
Araldite. Sections were cut, stained (semithin sections
stained with alkalinized toluidine blue and ultrathin sections
with uranyl acetate and lead citrate), and examined using a
light microscope or a JEOL 1 200 EX electron microscope.
Additional gland tissue, fixed as described above but in
aldehydes only, was cryoprotected in graded concentrations
of glycerols to a final concentration of 30% glycerol for
freeze fracture. The tissue was then frozen rapidly in liquid
propane, followed by fracturing and replication in a Balzer
360 M device (Balzers, Fiirstentum Liechtenstein). Replicas
were supported on 200-mesh copper grids and examined
with the transmission electron microscope.
Aldehyde-fixed tissue was also used for scanning electron
microscopy. It was first postfixed in 1.0% osmium tetraox-
ide in 0. 1 M sodium cacodylate buffer, followed by dehy-
dration in graded ethanols, and then critical point dried
using a Sorvall critical point dryer (Newtown, CT). Tissue
was coated with gold/palladium for 3 min at 2.5 kV and 20
mA using an E5100 sputter coating unit (Polaron Instru-
ments, Doylestown, PA) and examined with a JEOL 35C
scanning electron microscope.
Lipofuscin staining
Alkaline gland tissue and paniculate matter from gland
fluid of four stingrays were stained for lipofuscins using the
Long Ziehl-Neelsen technique (Bancroft and Cook, 1984).
The pellet, as described above, and gland tissue were fixed
in Bouin's solution for 2 h, followed by dehydration in
graded ethanols, clearing in xylene, and embedding in par-
84
G. M. GRABOWSKI ET AL
aftin. Five-micrometer-thick sections were deparaffinized in
xylene taken stepwise to water and stained in filtered carbol
fuchsin for 1-3 h at 56C. After staining, sections were
washed in water, differentiated in 1% acid-alcohol, and
counter stained in aqueous methylene blue. Slides were then
rinsed in water, dehydrated, cleared in xylene. and mounted
on glass slides. Lipofuscin appeared bright magenta, and
nuclei stained blue against a pale magenta background.
Silver staining of neural tissue
Nerve fibers in alkaline glands were localized using the
silver precipitate method of Sevier and Munger (1965).
Five-micrometer-thick paraffin sections of Bouin's fixed
tissue were incubated in 20% silver nitrate for 15 mm,
washed with distilled water, and developed in ammoniacal
silver (10% silver nitrate precipitated with 28%-30% am-
monium hydroxide, plus 2% formalin). After a 2-min rinse
in 5% sodium thiosulfate. slides were washed in distilled
water, dehydrated, cleared in xylene, and mounted.
Localization of carbonic anhydrase activity (CAM)
Alkaline glands were fixed in a solution of 2.0% parafor-
maldehyde, 2.5% glutaraldehyde, and 0.4% CaCK in 0.1 M
sodium cacodylate buffer for localization of carbonic anhy-
drase activity (CAH) using the Hansson's technique (Hans-
son, 1967: Maren. 1980b: Sugai and Ito, 1980; Lacy,
1983b). Fixed tissue was frozen in 8% sucrose and sec-
tioned at 10 M 111 on an IEC CTF cryostat (International
Equipment Company). Sections were floated on Hansson's
medium (1.86 mM CoSO 4 . 55.9 mM H 2 SO 4 , 3.73 mM
KH,PO 4 , and 158 mM NaHCO,) for 1-5 min. Sections
were rinsed by floating on Sorensen's phosphate buffer (pH
8.0) for 1 min and then transferred onto 2% ammonium
sulfide for 1-2 min. This was followed by rinsing sections
on Sorensen's phosphate buffer at pH 5.0 and then mount-
ing them in heated glycerin jelly on glass slides for obser-
vation with a light microscope (Sugai and Ito, 1980; Lacy,
1983b). After the sections were incubated on 2% ammo-
nium sulfide, low-pH buffers were used to prevent the black
precipitate indicative of CAH activity from degrading. For
electron microscopy, sections were postfixed in 1.0% os-
mium tetraoxide in Sorensen's phosphate buffer (pH 5.0)
f or 30-45 min, stained en bloc with 1.0% uranyl acetate in
maleate buffer (pH 5.2). dehydrated in graded ethanols, and
embedded flat in epoxy resin. Ultrathin sections were
stained and examined as described above.
Acetazolamide ( 10~ 5 and 10~ 6 M) in Hansson's medium
was used to inhibit CAH, thereby serving as a negative
control. For evaluation of nonspecific activity, sections were
incubated either in ammonium sulfide without prior incu-
bation on Hansson's medium, or on bicarbonate-free Hans-
son's medium.
Morplioinctric analysis
Ratios of basal cells to columnar cells were determined
from counts made of cross-sectioned glands at the light
microscopic level (epoxy resin sections, 50 X). The size and
distribution of intramembranous particles observed in freeze
fracture replicas were measured on electron micrographs
using a scale magnification loupe (Baxter. Atlanta, GA).
The luminal surface area of columnar epithelial cells was
estimated by measuring the cell diameters of luminal
plasma membranes from scanning electron micrographs.
Constituents of alkaline gland fluid
Fluid from the alkaline glands of five stingrays was
pooled, cooled to 5C, and centrifuged as described above.
The supernatant was then frozen by placing the tube in dry
ice and shipped overnight to Mayo Medical Laboratories
(Rochester. MN) for analysis of its composition.
Electrophysiology
Each sac of the alkaline gland was freed in situ from
suiTOunding connective tissue, excised, and placed in a petri
dish of oxygenated elasmobranch Ringer (NaCl. 280.0 mM;
KC1. 5.0 mM; MgCU 3.3 mM; CaCl 2 . 3.8 mM; NaHCO v
10.0 mM; urea, 350.0 mM; dextrose, 5.0 mM; 800 mOsm/1;
pH 6.9). The Ringer was gassed with 95% O : /5% CO 2 ,
unless otherwise noted, and used at room temperature.
Each sac was mounted between two halves of an Ussing
chamber (4-mm diameter). Each half of the chamber was
connected to a 20-ml circulation reservoir (Medical Re-
search Apparatus, Clearwater, FL). The short-circuit current
(Isc) and transepithelial potential difference (PD) were mea-
sured using a voltage-current clamp (Physiological Instru-
ments. San Diego, CA). Before tissue was mounted in the
Ussing chamber, electrode polarization and fluid resistance
was compensated with the VCC600 voltage-current clamp.
Calomel electrodes (Fisher, Atlanta, GA) placed in a satu-
rated KC1 solution were connected to the Ussing chamber
via salt bridges (4% agar in elasmobranch Ringer) to mea-
sure the PD. Platinum electrodes (Fisher. Atlanta, GA) were
placed directly into the Ussing chamber to measure Isc. The
PD and Isc were displayed on a Soltec 1242 strip chart
recorder (Soltec Corp.. Sun Valley, CA). Transepithelial
resistance was calculated using the open-circuit PD, and the
closed-circuit Isc of the mounted tissue. All readings were
in reference to the luminal medium.
Transport inhibitors
Once baseline electrophysiological parameters were es-
tablished, the percent change of Isc was calculated after the
tissue was exposed to the following transport inhibitors:
ouabain. Na"/K + ATPase inhibitor ( 10~ 4 M. serosal): bu-
metanide, Na + /K + /Cl cotransport inhibitor (10 3 M. se-
STINGRAY ALKALINE GLAND
85
rosal); DIDS (4,4'-diisothiocyanatostilbene-2,2'-disulfonic
acid, CT/HCO^ exchange inhibitor (10"' M, luminal);
amiloride, sodium channel inhibitor, (10 3 M. luminal and
serosal); acetazolamide, carbonic anhydrase inhibitor (10~ 5
M, luminal). Chloride was substituted in the medium with
isomolar concentrations of gluconate. All reagents were
purchased from Sigma Chemical Co.. St. Louis, MO.
Alkalinization rates
The alkalinization rate of the luminal medium was mea-
sured using the pH stat technique on glands mounted in the
Ussing chamber. Unbuffered (bicarbonate-free) Ringer
bathing the luminal side of the gland was gassed with 100%
oxygen during experiments and 30 min prior to tissue
mounting. The serosal-bathing medium consisted of buff-
ered elasmobranch Ringer, gassed with 95% oxygen/5%
carbon dioxide. The rate of fluid alkalinization (/u,Eq of
acid/cnr/h) was then determined via titration using 0.01 M
sulfuric acid. The pH of the luminal medium was main-
tained at pH 5.5 for at least six consecutive intervals of 5
min each. The pH was monitored using a pH microelectrode
(Microelectrode, Londonderry, NH) connected to a Beck-
man pH meter (Omega 40, Fullerton, CA).
Two experiments were performed to determine the pres-
ence of either chloride-dependent or sodium-dependent bi-
carbonate transport. Alkalinization rates were measured af-
ter each manipulation. Baseline values were made from
tissues bathed on both sides with elasmobranch Ringer. The
medium was changed on the luminal and serosal sides to
iso-osmotic elasmobranch Ringer free of chloride or so-
dium. In the first experiment, chloride-containing Ringer
was added back to the luminal side; in the second experi-
ment, sodium-containing Ringer was added back to the
serosal side. After a new alkalinization rate was established,
a bicarbonate transport inhibitor, SITS (4-acetamido-4'-
isothiocyanatostilbene-2,2'-disulfonic acid, 10~ 3 M), was
added to the luminal medium in both experiments.
The buffering capacity of the various Ringers was deter-
mined after each experiment, using the pH stat method. The
buffering capacity of each medium was then subtracted
from the alkalinization rate derived under the experimental
conditions.
Statistical analyses
Statistical significance was evaluated using a two-tailed-
paired t test, with the level of significance set at P < 0.05.
Results
Gross anatom\
The alkaline gland of the Atlantic stingray, Dasyatis
sabina, consists of a pair of blind-ended, bladder-like sacs
located within the pelvic girdle ventral to the posterior pole
of the kidney and lateral to the vas deferens. In the animals
we examined, the glands were retroperitoneal and symmet-
rically aligned along the vertebral column. They were easily
distinguished from surrounding tissue by their deep bur-
gundy color. Each sac of the gland held a maximum of 4-5
ml of fluid. The mediocaudal portion of each gland nar-
rowed to a single duct, which joined the respective sperm
duct (vas deferens) on the same side of the animal. The
resultant common duct for sperm and alkaline gland fluid
was about 3-mm long and pierced the body wall to open on
the crest of the urinary papilla in the cloaca.
Microscopv
The mucosa of the alkaline gland was highly folded and
lined by a simple columnar epithelium (Figs. 1, 2). A rich
capillary network lay immediately beneath the basement
membrane. Within each fold were an arteriole and venule
and dense tracts of nerve fibers (Figs. 1-3).
Two populations of epithelial cells were distinguished on
the basis of their apical membrane exposure to the lumen
(Fig. 1 ). The length of the long axis of the apical cell surface
differed significantly in the two populations (P < 0.05, n =
141); in one (84.4% of the total cells) the long axis of the
apical cell surface was 7.2 0.14 ^m; in the other (15.6%),
the long axis was about twice that length (14.92 0.49
/u,m). All cells that contacted the lumen had the same
ultrastructural organization, despite the difference in lu-
menal membrane area.
Columnar epithelial cells had a prominent, basally lo-
cated pleomorphic nucleus and exceptionally large and
abundant secondary lysosomes (Figs. 1, 2). The secondary
lysosomes stained positively for lipofuscin (data not shown)
and were dark green-brown in unstained sections. (Fig. 3).
The smooth-surfaced endoplasmic reticulum was evenly
distributed throughout the cytoplasm. Mitochondria bearing
lamellar cristae were located in the upper two-thirds of the
cell, and Golgi complexes were abundant in the perinuclear
region (Fig. 2). Many membrane-bound vesicles were
present in the Golgi region and adjacent to the apical plasma
membrane. Some of these vesicles were seen fusing with
larger vesicles as well as with the apical plasma membrane
(Fig. 2).
Basal cells were also present in the lower third of the
epithelium (Fig. 4) in a ratio of about 1 basal cell to 20
columnar cells. These cells, which ranged from 1.4 to 2.6
/j,m in diameter, were not highly interdigitated with adjacent
columnar cells and were not observed in contact with an-
other basal cell. The cytoplasm of basal cells surrounded a
proportionately large nucleus and contained only a few
organelles, which were limited to the endoplasmic reticu-
lum, and small vesicles containing material of various de-
grees of electron density.
The apical surface of the columnar cells was elaborated
86
G. M. GRABOWSKI ET AL
Figure 1.
Figure 3.
.
STINGRAY ALKALINE GLAND
87
into microplicae (Figs. 1, 2). The basolateral plasma mem-
brane was relatively straight nearest the lumen, but closer to
the basal lamina it was interdigitated with itself and adjacent
cells (Fig. 2). Freeze fracture of the lateral plasma mem-
brane revealed some areas consisting only of large in-
tramembranous particles (99 A 0.1, n = 52) (Fig. 5)
loosely arranged as single particles or in groups of up to 20
particles. Outside these areas was a mixture of large and
small intramembranous particles. No rod-shaped particles
were observed in either the apical or basolateral plasma
membrane. The zonulae occludentes were deep ( 1 .4 0.7
jam, n = 19 replicas) and composed of 21.8(4.5) fibrils
(Fig. 6). Most of the fibrils were parallel to the apical
plasma membrane, with those constituting the basal one-
fourth of the zonulae occludentes forming a loose anasto-
mosing network (Fig. 6).
Ultrastructural observations of the solids from alkaline
gland fluid showed cellular debris including multivesicular
bodies, spherical particles with electron-dense cores that
stained positively for lipofuscin, membrane whorls, and a
few necrotic spermatozoa (Fig. 7).
Localization of carbonic anhydrase activity
Carbonic anhydrase activity (CAH) was indicated by a
black precipitate at both the light and electron microscopic
level (Figs. 8, 9). A minimum of 2 min in the incubation
medium was required for the precipitate to develop, at
which time CAH appeared first within the intercellular
space of columnar cells. In electron micrographs, CAH was
localized in the intercellular space between columnar cells
but excluded from the zonulae occludentes (Fig. 9). Adja-
cent to the basement membrane, CAH was observed only
within the intercellular space formed by invaginations of the
plasma membrane or interdigitation of cytoplasmic folds
(Fig. 9). Regions of the basolateral plasma membrane that
contacted the basement membrane did not exhibit CAH.
After 3-10 min of incubation, the precipitate appeared in the
basal two-thirds of columnar cell cytoplasm (Fig. 8).
Control sections incubated on bicarbonate-free Hansson's
medium or on ammonium sulfide alone were similar to
unstained sections that were rinsed only on Sorensen's
phosphate buffer, and showed no positive staining (data not
shown). Complete inhibition of CAH occurred at acetazol-
amide concentrations of 10~ 5 M in Hansson's medium (data
not shown). Lower concentrations of acetazolamide (10~ 6
M) failed to inhibit CAH activity for incubation periods
longer than 2 min.
Analysis of alkaline gland fluid (AGF)
Table I shows the analyzed constituents of AGF. Sodium
and chloride were the dominant ions, with K + , Mg + + ,
Ca + + , and Fe ++ in detectable amounts. The osmolality was
near that of plasma (750-875 mOsm), and significant con-
centrations of protein and urea were measured. The pH
varied between 8.0 and 8.2.
Electrophysiology
Baseline parameters. The baseline PD was 14.5 1.9
mV, Isc was 29.1 4.2 juA/cm 2 , and transepithelial resis-
tance was calculated to be 732.4 184.6 ohm cnr
(n = 18).
Transport inhibitors. The effect of specific ion transport
inhibitors on the baseline Isc is shown in Table II. The
serosal addition of ouabain, a Na + /K + ATPase inhibitor,
resulted in an almost 48% decrease of Isc within 45 to 50
min. Bumetanide, a Na + /K + /CF cotransport inhibitor, de-
creased the Isc approximately 70% within 30 min, and
DIDS, a Cr/HCO 3 -exchange inhibitor, placed on the lumi-
nal side of the epithelium decreased the Isc almost 38%
within 30 to 40 min. The Isc was completely inhibited, and
in fact was slightly reversed, after consecutive addition of
bumetanide within 30 min of DIDS addition to the lumenal
surface. The effect of luminal exposure to acetazolamide, a
carbonic anhydrase inhibitor, on Isc was sporadic, and pro-
duced only a 16% overall reduction of Isc. Amiloride, a
sodium ion channel inhibitor, placed in either the luminal or
serosal media had no significant effect on the Isc (data not
shown). The removal of chloride from the bathing media on
both sides of the tissue with the substitution of gluconate
resulted in a 67% reduction in Isc by 45 min.
Alkalinization rates. Two experiments investigating de-
Figure 1. Scanning electron micrograph of a transected mucosal fold. The asterisk is located in the center
of an arteriole. A network of capillaries (arrows) lies directly beneath the epithelium, which has prominent
secondary lysosomes (arrowheads). Bar = 50 /im.
Figure 2. Transmission electron micrograph (TEM ) of the simple columnar epithelium of the alkaline gland.
Arrows indicate secondary lysosomes located in the supranuclear region. Arrowheads indicate a nerve fiber
closely adjacent to the epithelium. Note the numerous vesicles in the apical cytoplasm. Bar = 2 fj.m.
Figure 3. Light micrograph (LM) of nerve fibers (arrows) in the subepithelial lamina propna stained black
using the Sevier Munger silver technique. Nerve libers were closely associated wilh blood vessels (asterisks) and
the epithelium (e). Note the multiple darkly staining secondary lysosomes in the apical cytoplasm of the
epithelium. Bar = 4 /j.m.
Figure 4. TEM of a basal cell (BO located between adjacent columnar cells (CC). Note the large proportion
of the nucleus relative to the BC cytoplasm. Basal lamina (BL). Bar = 2 /tim.
Figure 5.
G. M. GRABOWSKI ET AL
Figure 7.
Table I
Analyzed constituents of alkaline gland fluid
STINGRAY ALKALINE GLAND
Table II
Effects of ion transport inhibitors on the short-circuit current (Isc)
Component
Concentration
Na +
286 mA/
K +
3.7 mA-/
Cl
113.0mA/
Mg + +
1 .68 mA-/
Ca + +
0.84 mA/
Cu + +
0.58 mA/
Zn + +
0.87 mAf
Fe f *
0.61 mM
Urea
271 mA/
Progesterone
0.012 ju,A/
Estradiol
0.16 pM
Norepinephrine
ND
Epinephnne
ND
Dopamine
ND
Testosterone
4.3 tiM
Protein
5.9 mg/ml
Osmolality
875 mosm
mosm = milliosmoles. ml = milliliter, mg = milligram. pM = pico-
moles. fj.M = micromoles, mM = millimoles. ND = none detected.
pendent and independent bicarbonate transport mechanisms
are shown in Table III. The baseline alkalinization rate of
control tissues varied from about 4 to 7.5 /uEq of acid/cnr/h
depending upon the animal used.
Chloride-dependent bicarbonate secretion was demon-
strated by a significant decrease in alkalinization rate when
both sides of the gland were exposed to chloride-free Ringer
(Table III, Experiment 1 ). Alkalinization returned to control
levels when chloride was added back to the luminal side of
the tissue. SITS ( 10~ 3 M), a bicarbonate transport inhibitor,
when applied to the luminal medium, had no statistically
significant effect on the alkalinization rate after luminal
exposure to chloride (Table III). However, the results varied
widely from tissue to tissue.
In the second experiment, the fluid alkalinization rate
decreased significantly, 55%, after luminal and serosal ex-
% Decrease
Treatment
of Isc
n
Ouabain (ICT- 1 A/). S
47.8 2.9
4
Bumetanide (10~ 3 Ml S
69.7 5.5
8
DIDS (10"' A/1. L
37.9 5.9
6
DIDS <10~' A/1, L + Bumetanide (10~ 3 A/), S
105.9 12.2
5
Acetazolanude (1()~ 5 A/1. L
16.0 9.0
3
Values are means SE, L = Luminal, S = Serosal. n = number of
mounted glands. DIDS = 4,4'-diisothiocyanatostilbene-2,2'-disulfomc
acid.
posure to sodium-free media (Table III). The alkalinization
rate increased immediately with the readdition of serosal
sodium-containing Ringer. Addition of the bicarbonate
transport inhibitor, SITS ( 10~ 3 A/), to the luminal medium
caused a significant decrease (24%) in the alkalinization rate
compared to the values after sodium readdition (Table III).
Discussion
Results of this study extend the presence of alkaline
glands in the Elasmobranchii to include stingrays. Our gross
anatomical explorations of several species of shark spiny
dogfish, Squalus aciintlmix; black tip, Carcharhinns lini-
batus; smooth dogfish, Miistelus canis; scalloped hammer-
head, Sph\rna lewini, and Atlantic sharpnose. Rhizoprion-
odon terraenovae did not reveal the presence of alkaline
glands in these elasmobranchs. This finding is consistent
with the notion that alkaline glands are present only in
skates and rays and not in sharks. Furthermore, this study is
the first to elucidate the morphology, ion transport mecha-
nisms, enzyme histochetnistry, and fluid composition of the
alkaline gland in a species of stingray.
The gross anatomy of the Atlantic stingray alkaline gland
is similar to that described for several species of skates
Figure 5. Transmission electron micrograph (TEM) of freeze fracture replica of a loose cluster of large
intramembranous particles (arrows) found on the P fracture face of the lateral plasma membrane. Bar = 270 nm.
Figure 6. TEM of freeze fracture replica of the zonula occludens between two columnar cells. Note that
numerous strands are arranged in a parallel array near the gland lumen (asterisk), but the more basal strands form
an anastomosing network (P fracture face). Bar = 200 nm.
Figure 7. TEM of solid constituents from centrifuged alkaline gland fluid. Arrows indicate degenerate
sperm with outer plasma membrane separated from the sperm head. Arrowheads indicate masses ot membranes.
Asterisks show roughly globular particles that composed the greatest part of the alkaline gland paniculate matter.
Bar = 2 /j.m.
Figure 8. Light micrograph of carbonic anhydrase activity in epithelial cells lining the alkaline gland.
Typical staining pattern in sections incubated for 3-10 mm on Hansson's medium. Enzyme activity was strongly
present in the intercellular spaces (arrows), as well as in the mid to basal cytoplasm of columnar cells. Bar =
7 jiiii.
Figure 9. TEM of carbonic anhydrase activity in sections incubated for 2 min on Hansson's medium.
Enzyme activity appears as electron-dense precipitate (arrows) confined to the intercellular space. N = nuclei
of columnar cells. Note the absence of CAH activity along the basal lamina (BL). Bar = 2 ;am.
90
G. M. GRABOWSKI ET AL
Table III
In \ilro alkalini-alion mles cj ' alkiilinc ^ln
Experimental conditions
Alkalinization rate
of acid/cnr/h)
Experiment I
Elasmobranch Ringer (Control)
3.88 0.63
Chloride-free Ringer, L&S
-1.93 1.89*
Chloride readdition. L
3.65 1.17**
Addition of SITS ( 1 m/W), L
1.45 2.22
Experiment 2
Elasmohranch Ringer (Control )
7.65 0.67
Sodium-free Ringer. L&S
3.49 0.41*
Sodium readdition. S
5.64 0.62**
Addition of SITS ( 1 nW). L
4.30 0.45**
Values are means SE; n = 5 lor each experiment. L = luminal. S =
serosal. SITS == 4-acetamido-4'-isothiocyanatostilbene-2.2'-disulfonic
acid.
* Significant difference compared to control, ** .significant difference
compared to respective chloride or sodium free conditions, *** significant
difference compared to respective chloride or sodium readdition. P < 0.05.
(Maren et ai, 1963). However, one significant difference is
the relationship between the alkaline gland duct and the
sperm duct. In skates, Maren et al. (1963) reported that the
alkaline gland ducts and sperm ducts have separate open-
ings onto the urinary papilla. In the stingray, the alkaline
gland duct joins the sperm duct, and the resultant common
duct then opens onto the urogenital papilla. This anatomical
arrangement in the Atlantic stingray allows mixing of sperm
and alkaline gland fluid (AGF), suggesting that AGF may
facilitate successful fertilization by its actions on spermato-
zoa. Furthermore, the confluence of the two ducts in the
Atlantic stingray may explain the presence of some necrotic
sperm and cell membranes in AGF, because residual sperm
in the common duct would have retrograde access to the
alkaline gland lumen. The absence of spermatozoa in the
AGF supports the contention that the gland is not a hona
fide sperm storage organ, thus contradicting reports by early
anatomists (Borcea, 1906; Daniel. 1934).
Morphological features of columnar cells composing the
epithelium of the alkaline gland of the Atlantic stingray are
generally consistent with preliminary reports of the alkaline
gland of the little skate (Maren et al.. 1963; Masur. 1984).
Those cells exhibited a well-developed Golgi apparatus and
endoplasmic reticulum, suggesting a high degree of active
protein synthesis. The many vesicles we observed in the
cytoplasm, especially those budding from the Golgi appa-
ratus and fusing with larger vesicles or with the apical
plasma membrane, support that idea. Although basal cells
were morphologically distinct from columnar cells, we are
uncertain whether they are a separate population of mature
cells or are immature columnar cells.
A striking microscopic feature of stingray alkaline gland
epithelial cells was large secondary lysosomes that imparted
a dark green-black color to the gland and were distinctive in
unstained tissue sections. An accumulation of myelin fig-
ures and lipofuscin granules in these secondary lysosomes
was strongly suggestive of increased lysosomal processing
of lipid membrane (Reed et ai, 1965; Harman, 1990).
Interestingly, such features were also observed in epithelial
cells of mammalian male reproductive organs such as the
epididymis and seminal vesicle (Pappenheimer and Victor,
1954; Nicander, 1958; Mitchinson et al. 1975). Mitchinson
et ill. ( 1975) suggested that the spermatozoa in the lumen of
those organs may be the source of the intracellular lipofus-
cin granules, whereby epithelial cells perform a "salvaging"
function and store insoluble fatty acids as lipofuscin. A
similar process may occur in alkaline gland epithelial cells:
the necrotic sperm and cell debris observed in the lumen of
the gland would be the extracellular source of the intracel-
lular lipofuscin granules.
The composition of stingray AGF differs from that pre-
viously reported for three species of skates (Maren et ai,
1963) in several ways. Stingray AGF is a deep burgundy
color and nearly opaque; in contrast, skate AGF is clear to
slightly yellow. Stingray AGF has significant amounts of
protein and urea; skate AGF is reported to lack protein and
have only about one-third the concentration of urea found in
the Atlantic stingray (Maren et ai, 1963). Furthermore, the
ionic concentration was different: stingray AGF had one-
half the concentration of K + and Cl~ reported for skate
AGF but 4 times more Mg + + and Ca + + . The present study
is the first to show AGF with immunodetectable steroid
hormones. However, the immunological methods used an-
tibodies to human hormones, which raises the possibility
that the results may be due to nonspecific binding.
A recent study (Biillesbach et ai, 1997) probed the pos-
sibility that AGF contained relaxin, a peptide hormone
found in mammalian reproductive tissues and secreted flu-
ids. The fact that relaxin in mammalian seminal fluid stim-
ulates sperm motility (Essig et ai, 1982; Weiss. 1989) was
the basis for the investigation in the stingray. Biillesbach
and colleagues (1997) showed that stingray AGF contains a
unique relaxin-like molecule with an apparent molecular
mass of 1 3 kDa formed by two polypeptide chains of 4 and
9 kDa. This molecule is the only member of the relaxin
family known to be glycosylated. The relaxin-like molecule
of stingray AGF did not alter stingray sperm motility in
vitro (Biillesbach et ai, 1997), but this finding does not rule
out the possibility that the AGF relaxin-like molecule acts
on a different aspect of sperm function such as capacitation
or that it functions in the female reproductive tract.
The lumen of the stingray alkaline gland was not lined by
the villar projections described in the skate (Maren et ai.
1963). but it did have mucosal folds, each of which con-
tained a major arteriole and venule. The apical plasma
membrane of the columnar epithelial cells was elaborated
into microvilli characteristic of a secreting epithelium.
STINGRAY ALKALINE GLAND
91
Freeze fracture replicas showed that the only distinguishing
intramembranous particles were in the basolateral plasma
membrane. The size and distribution of the particles form-
ing these clusters was comparable to those forming gap
junctions in mammalian cells. Apical and basolateral
plasma membranes did not reveal any rod-shaped particles
that would suggest proton transport (Brown and Montesano,
1980).
The zonulae occludentes of columnar cells consisted of
about 22 strands, suggesting that the epithelium is electri-
cally tight and imparts a high transepithelial resistance
(Claude and Goodenough. 1973; Claude, 1978). Our in vitro
electrophysiological data showed that the transepithelial
resistance was 732 ohm cm 2 , confirming the tight junction
morphology. The presence of "very tight" zonulae occlu-
dentes and a high transepithelial resistance suggests that
there is little paracellular solute transport across the epithe-
lium of the alkaline gland (Bowman el al, 1992; Byers and
Marc-Pelletier. 1992). Therefore, regulation of ion transport
appears to occur primarily across the plasma membrane.
Maren et al. (1963) and Smith (1981. 1985) have dem-
onstrated that both bicarbonate and chloride are secreted in
the little skate alkaline gland and that chloride is the main
anion responsible for most of the Isc. This finding was
extended to the stingray alkaline gland in the present study
in which Isc decreased almost 70% when chloride was
removed from the bathing medium. Using intracellular mi-
croelectrodes. Smith (1981, 1985) showed that the apical
plasma membrane was dominated by a large chloride con-
ductance, whereas the basolateral plasma membrane con-
tained a barium-sensitive potassium channel. However, the
mechanisms involved in the alkalinization process have
never been clearly established in this gland, despite specu-
lation that a Cr/HCO 3 exchanger may exist in the apical or
basolateral plasma membrane or in both membranes (Maren
et al.. 1963; Smith. 1981. 1985).
In the present study, the marked reduction in Isc after
serosal addition of bumetanide. an inhibitor of Na + /K + /Cl~
cotransport. suggests that this transporter is located in the
basolateral plasma membrane. If so. it may be the main
conductive pathway for chloride entry into the cell. The
remaining Isc could be due to the secretion of intracellular
chloride or another anion. such as bicarbonate. To test this
latter possibility we added the stilbene, DIDS, which effec-
tively inhibits bicarbonate cotransporters (Wiederholt et til..
1985; Melvin and Turner. 1992) as well as chloride chan-
nels (Bretag. 1987) to the luminal side of the epithelium.
The resultant 38% decrease of Isc. and its further reduction
to nominal levels after the consecutive addition of serosal
bumetanide. substantiates this assumption. Furthermore,
complete reduction of the Isc by consecutive addition of
DIDS and bumetanide suggests a pathway for chloride
secretion across the epithelial cells via a Na + /K + /CP co-
transporter at the basolateral plasma membrane, and a chin-
ride channel at the apical plasma membrane.
Chloride movement across the epithelial basolateral
plasma membrane, via a putative Na + /K + /CF cotrans-
porter in epithelial cells in stingray alkaline gland, appears
to be driven in part by Na^/K + ATPase, as shown by the
serosal addition of ouabain, which decreased the Isc by
48%. In contrast, ouabain completely abolished chloride
secretion and Isc in the little skate alkaline gland (Smith.
1985).
The lack of significant alkalinization rates after the tissue
was exposed to medium free of chloride and sodium sug-
gests that there is little independent transport of bicarbonate.
If a significant portion of the alkalinization process involves
an apical Cl /HCO, exchanger as our results suggest
the absence of luminal chloride could impede that process,
resulting in the accumulation of intracellular bicarbonate.
Such a scenario has been observed in the rat parotid acini:
SITS, an inhibitor of bicarbonate transport, increased intra-
cellular pH and was thought to stimulate bicarbonate secre-
tion via anion channels (Pirani et al.. 1987; Melvin and
Turner. 1992). Chloride channels in a number of different
epithelia. including pancreatic duct, sweat gland duct, and
respiratory epithelia, have been shown to transport bicar-
bonate (Gray et al.. 1989; Tabcharani et at.. 1989; Kunzel-
mann et a I.. 1991 ) at a conductance as high as 50% of the
conductance of chloride.
The remaining Isc may be accounted for by a Na + /HCOJ
symport, as demonstrated in this study by using pH stat
methodology. Such mechanisms for bicarbonate transport
have been demonstrated in renal proximal tubule (Yoshi-
tomi et til.. 1985), corneal endothelial cells (Wiederholt et
ill.. 1985), and gastric oxyntic cells (Curci et al.. 1987).
Alkalinization of the luminal medium in the present study
was dependent on the presence of both apical chloride and
serosal sodium. The changes attributed to the absence and
readdition of sodium suggests the presence of a Na + /HCO^
symport. The alkalinization rate attributed to the readdition
of serosal sodium, and its reduction by luminal SITS, is
indirect evidence that a Na 4 /HCO^ symport may be located
at the apical plasma membrane. The stilbene. SITS, blocks
not only bicarbonate transport via Na'/HCO, symporters
(Curci et al.. 1987; Fitz et al., 1989; Wiederholt et al..
1985), but also Cl /HCO, exchangers (Stewart et al..
1989).
Maren and co-workers (1963) demonstrated a possible
relationship between CAH and higher pH levels in AGF of
various skate species. They showed that inhibition of CAH
/;; vivo reduced the pH of newly formed fluid to levels found
in species that did not have glandular CAH. This was
accomplished using intravenous injections of acetazolamide
at least 10 times higher than the dose we used. In a study of
rat distal colon, the need for high (millimolar) concentra-
tions of acetazolamide to inhibit bicarbonate transport was
92
G. M. GRABOWSKI ET AL
attributed to the drug's poor cellular penetration, the distri-
bution of CAH within the cell, and the requirement of 99%
inhibition of CAH for a significant decrease of Isc to occur
(Feldman et al., 1988). The effectiveness of acetazolamide
in reducing the Isc of the stingray alkaline gland is ques-
tionable because of the erratic results from tissue to tissue.
However, concentrations of acetazolamide greater than
10~ 4 M were not used in the present study, because reports
have indicated that the drug interferes with other ion trans-
port mechanisms (Nellens et al.. 1975; Weiner and Mudge.
1985). Because the response to acetazolamide in our exper-
iments was not consistent, we conclude that, in the stingray
alkaline gland, either higher concentrations of acetazol-
amide are required to reduce the Isc, or bicarbonate secre-
tion is not completely dependent on the presence of CAH.
We chose Hansson's technique (Hansson, 1968) to local-
ize CAH after indirect immunoperoxidase staining methods
failed. Antibodies to mammalian carbonic anhydrase I and
II failed to recognize stingray carbonic anhydrase, which
has significant structural and kinetic differences from forms
found in higher vertebrates (Maynard and Coleman, 1971;
Maren, 1980b).
The presence of CAH in the intercellular space of epi-
thelial cells has been demonstrated not only in the alkaline
gland in the present study, but also in other tissues such as
the gall bladder, duodenum, and sweat gland (Hansson,
1968), as well as in the teleost opercular epithelium (Lacy,
1983b) and the elasmobranch rectal gland (Lacy. 1983a).
This subcellular site may indicate the presence of either a
membrane-bound or soluble form of CAH (Maren. 1980a).
The exclusion of CAH activity from portions of the plasma
membrane that contact the basement membrane suggests
that its function is important in areas of cell-cell contact.
Another possibility is that a soluble form of CAH exists in
the intercellular space. The mechanisms that would prevent
its diffusion along the basal aspect of the cell are unknown.
In any case, CAH in intercellular spaces suggests that a
bicarbonate reservoir may exist between epithelial cells
(Lacy, 1983a) or that membrane-bound CAH may transport
carbon dioxide, protons, or bicarbonate into or out of the
cell (Enns. 1967; Wistrand. 1984).
The exclusion of CAH from the apical region of the
alkaline gland epithelial cells shown in the present study has
been demonstrated in mitochondria-rich cells of the turtle
bladder and interfoveolar epithelial cells of the rat stomach,
both of which are thought to subserve bicarbonate secretion
(Sugai and Ho. 1980; Fritsche et al.. I991a). A pattern
similar to that seen in the alkaline gland was displayed in
microvillated cells and microplicated cells under conditions
inhibiting acid secretion (Fritsche et al., I991b).
The difference in distribution pattern and stain develop-
ment of CAH in the alkaline gland may reflect the presence
of at least two carbonic anhydrase isozymes (Carter and
Parsons. 1971 ). The appearance of CAH in the intercellular
space after relatively short incubation periods may indicate
a high-affinity membrane-bound carbonic anhydrase
isozyme. A low-affinity cytoplasmic form of carbonic an-
hydrase in the stingray alkaline gland is suggested by the
longer incubation periods necessary for intracellular stain
development.
Acknowledgments
This work was supported, in part, by the Slocum-Lunz
Foundation (GMG), National Science Foundation (ERL #
DCB 8903369), and the University Research Council, Med-
ical University of South Carolina.
Literature Cited
Bancroft, J. D., and H. C. Cook. 1984. Pigments. Pages 144-158 in
Manual of Histnlogical Techniques. Churchill Livingstone, New York.
Borcea, I. 1906. Recherches sur la systeme urogenital des Elasmo-
branches. Arch. Zoo/. Exper. Gen. 4(4): 199-484.
Bowman, P. D., M. du Bois, R. R. Shivers, and K. Dorovini-Zis. 1992.
Endothelial tight junctions. Pages 305-320 in Tix/ir Junctions. M.
Cereijido. ed. CRC Press, Ann Arbor. MI.
Bretag, A. H. 1987. Muscle chloride channels. Physiol. Rev. 67(2):
618-724.
Brown, I)., and R. Montesano. 1980. Membrane specialization in the
rat epididymis. I. Rod-shaped intramemhrane particles in the apical
(mitochondria-rich) cell. J. Cell Sci. 45: 187-198.
Biillesbach, E. E.. C. Schwabe, and E. R. Lacy. 1997. Identification of
a glycosylated relaxin-like molecule from the male Atlantic stingray,
Dasyatis sabina. Biochemistry 36: 10735-10741
Byers, S., and R. Marc-Pelletier. 1992. Sertoli-sertoli cell tight junc-
tions and blood-testis barrier. Pages 279-307 in Tight Junctions. M.
Cereijido, ed. CRC Press, Ann Arbor. MI.
Carter, M. J., and D. S. Parsons. 1971. The isoenzymes of carbonic
anhydrase: Tissue subcellular distribution and function significance,
with particular reference to the intestinal tract. J. Physio/. 215: 71-94.
Claude, P. 1978. Morphological factors influencing transepithelial per-
meability: A model for the resistance of the zonula occludens. /
Meiuhr. B,,,l. 39: 219-232.
Claude, P., and 1). A. Goodenough. 1973. Fracture faces of zonulae
occludente from "tight" and "leaky" epithelia. J. Cell Biol. 58: 390-
400.
Curci, S., L. Debellis, and E. Frontier. 1987. Evidence for rheogenic
sodium bicarbonate cotransport in the basolateral membrane of oxyntic
cells of frog gastric fundus. Pflugerx Arch. 408: 497-504.
Daniel, F. J. 1934. Urogenital system. Pages 300-303 in The Elasmo-
hnuich Fishes. F, J. Daniel, ed. University of California, Berkeley. CA.
Enns, T. 1967. Facilitation by carbonic anhydrase of carbon dioxide
transport. Science 155: 44 \1 .
Essig, M., C. Schoenfeld, R. D-Eletto, R. Amelar, L. Dubin, B. G.
Steinetz, M. O'Bryne, and G. Weiss. 1982. Relaxm in human
seminal plasma. Ann. NY Ac ad. Sci. 380: 224-230.
Feldman, G. M., S. F. Berman, and R. L. Stephenson. 1988. Bicar-
bonate secretion in the distal colon in vitro: A measurement technique.
Am. J. Phyxiol. 254: C383-390.
Fitz, J. G., M. Persico, and B. F. Scharschmidt. 1989. Electrophysio-
logical evidence for sodium-coupled bicarbonate transport in cultured
rat hepatocytes. Am. ./. Physiol. 256: G49I-500,
Fritsche, C., J. G. Kleinman, J. L. W. Bain, R. R. Heinen, and D. A.
Rilt'V. 1991a. Carbonic anhydrase in turtle bladder mitochondnal-
rich lurmnal and suhluniinul cells. Am. J. Phvsio/. 260: F43 1-442.
STINGRAY ALKALINE GLAND
93
Fritsche, C., J. G. Kleinman, J. L. W. Bain, R. R. Heinen, and D. A.
Riley. 199lb. Carbonic anhdrase and proton secretion in turtle blad-
der mitochondrial-nch cells. Am. J. Plivxiol. 260: F443-458.
Gray, M. A., A. Harris, L. Coleman, J. R. Greenwell, and B. E. Argent.
1989. Two types of chloride channel on duct cells cultured from
human fetal pancreas. Am. J. Physiol. 257: C240-2.M.
Hansson, H. P. J. 1967. Histochemical demonstration of carbonic an-
hydrase activity. Histocliemie 11: 112-128.
Hansson, H. P. J. 1968. Histochemical demonstration of carbonic an-
hydrase activity in some epitheliu noted for active transport. Ada
Phy.siol. Scaml. 73: 427-434.
Hannan, 1). 199(1. Lipofuscin and ceriod formation: The cellular recy-
cling system. Adv. Exper. Med. Biol. 266: 3-18.
Ito, S., and M. J. Karnovsky. 1968. Formaldehyde-glutaraldehyde fix-
atives containing trinitro compounds. J. Cell Biol. 39: 168a.
Kunzelmann, K., L. Gerlach, U. Frobe, and R. Greger. 1991. Bicar-
bonate permeability of epithelial chloride channels. PflugerArch. 417:
616-621.
Lacy, E. R. 1983a. Carbonic anhydrase localization in elastnobranch
rectal gland. J. Exp. Zool. 226: 163-169.
Lacy, E. R. 1983b. Histochemical and biochemical studies of carbonic
anhydrase activity in the opercular epithelium of the euryhaline teleost.
r'uiidu/ii.s heteroclitus. Am. J. Aiuit. 166: 19-39.
Maren, T. H., J. A. Rawls. J. W. Burger, and A. C. Myers. 1963. The
alkaline (Marshall's) gland of the skate. Comp. Biochem. Physiol. 10:
1-16.
Maren, T. H. 1980a. Current status of membrane-bound carbonic anhy-
drase. Ann. NY Acad. Sci. 341: 246-258.
Maren, T. H. 1980b. Kinetics, equilibrium and inhibition in the Hansson
histochemical procedure for carbonic anhydrase: A validation of the
method. Hixlochem. J. 12: 183-190.
Masur, S. K. 1984. Electron microscopy of the alkaline gland epithelium
of the little skate. Raja erinacea. Bull. Mt. Desert Is. Hint. Luh. 24:
96-97.
Maynard, J. R., and J. E. Coleman. 1971. Elasmobranch carbonic
anhydrase. Purification and properties of the enzyme from two species
of shark. J. Bin/. Client. 246: 4455-4464.
Melvin, J. E., and R. J. Turner. 1992. Cl fluxes related to fluid
secretion by the rat parotid: Involvement of Cr/HCO 3 ~ exchanger.
Am. J. Physiol. 262: G393-398.
Mitchinson, M. J., K. P. Sherman, and A. M. Stainer-Smith. 1975.
Brown patches in the epididymis. J. Pathoi 115: 57-62.
Nellens, H. N., R. A. Frizzell, and S. G. Schultz. 1975. Effect of
acetazolamide on sodium and chloride transport by in vitro rabbit
ileum. Am. J. Phyxiol. 228: 1808-1814.
Nicander, L. 1958. Studies on the regional histology and cytochemistry
of the ductus epididymis in stallions, rams, and bulls. ACTA Morplt.
Neerl. Scuiul. 1: 337.
Pappenheimer, A. M.. and J. Victor. 1954. "Ceroid" pigment in human
tissues. Am. ,/. Putliol. 22: 395-413.
Pirani. D., L. A. Evans, I). I. Cook, and J. A. Young. 1987. Intracel-
lular pH in the rat mandihular salivary gland: The role of Na-H and
Cl-HCO, antipons in secretion. Pftugers Arch. 408: 178-184.
Reed, R., G. McMillan, S. Hartroft, and E. Porta. 1965. Progress of
medical science: Pathology and bacteriology. Am. J. Med. Sci. 250:
1 16-137.
Sevier, A. C., and B. L. Munger. 1965. A silver method for paraffin
sections of neural tissue. J. Neuropathol. Exp. Neural. 24: 130-135.
Smith, H. W. 1929. The composition of the body fluids of elasmo-
branchs. J. Biol. Cliem. 81: 407-419.
Smith, P. L. 1981. Electrolyte transport by the alkaline gland of the little
skate, Raja erinacea. Mechanism of luminal alkalinization. Bull. Mt.
Desert Is. Biol. Lah. 21: 80-83.
Smith. P. L. 1985. Electrolyte transport by alkaline gland of little skate
Raja erinacea. Am. ./. Phyxiol. 248: 346-352.
Stewart, C. P., J. M. Winterhages, K. Heintze, and K. U. Petersen.
1989. Electrogenic bicarbonate secretion by guinea pig gallbladder
epithelium: Apical membrane exit. Am. J. Physiol. 256: C736-749.
Sugai, N., and S. Ito. 1980. Carbonic anhydrase, ultrastructural local-
ization in the mouse gastric mucosa and improvements in the tech-
nique. J. Histochcm, Cytoclwm. 28(61: 511-525.
Tabcharani, J. A., T. J. Jensen, J. R. Riordan, and J. W. Hanrahan.
1989. Bicarbonate permeability of the outward rectifying anion chan-
nel. ./. Mcmhr. Biol. 112: 104-122.
Weiner, I. M., and G. H. Mudge. 1985. Pp. 887-907 in The Pharma-
cological Basis of Therapeutics. 7 th Edition. MacMillan, New York.
Weiderholt, M., T. J. Jentsch, and S. K. Kellar. 1985. Electrogenic
sodium-bicarbonate symport in cultured corneal endothelial cells.
PflugerArch. 405 (Suppl. 1): SI67-171.
Weiss, G. 1989. Relaxin in the male. Biol. Repmd. 40: 197-200.
Wistrand, P. J. 1984. Properties of membrane-bound carbonic anhy-
drase. Ann. NY Acad Sci. 429: 1 95-206.
Yoshitomi. K., B-Ch. Burckhardt, and E. Fromter. 1985. Rheogenic
sodium-bicarbonate cotransport in the peritubular cell membrane of rat
proximal tubule. Pflugers Arch. 405: 360-366.
Reference: Biol. Bull. 197: 94-103. (August 1999)
Waterborne and Surface-Associated Carbohydrates as
Settlement Cues for Larvae of the Specialist Marine
Herbivore Alderia modesta
PATRICK J. KRUG 1 * AND ADRIAN A E. MANZI 2
' Department of Biology, University 1 of California, Box 95 J 606, Los Angeles, California 90095- ] 606;
and 2 Cytel Corp., 9393 Towne Center Drive, San Diego, California 92121-3016
Abstract. Larvae of the specialist marine herbivore Alde-
ria modesta (Opisthobranchia: Ascoglossa) metamorphose
in response to a chemical settlement cue from the alga
Vaucheria longicaulis, the obligate adult prey. Bioactivity
coeluted with both high and low molecular weight carbo-
hydrates in solution, and with insoluble high molecular
weight carbohydrates associated with the algal cell wall.
Larvae metamorphosed in response to water conditioned by
V. longicaulis, as well as to frozen and homogenized algal
tissue. The inducer was efficiently extracted from the algae
with boiling water, but after all soluble activity was ex-
tracted, residual tissue still induced larval settlement. Etha-
nol precipitation of a boiled-water extract followed by gel
filtration chromatography showed that the precipitate con-
tained carbohydrates of > 100, 000 Da molecular weight,
while the supernatant contained only low molecular weight
carbohydrates (<2,000 Da); in both cases all activity was
associated with the carbohydrate peak. An aqueous-insolu-
ble 4% NaOH extract was chromatographed in 7 M urea to
yield a bioactive high molecular weight carbohydrate peak.
Activity was not affected by proteinase K or mild acid
hydrolysis, but was significantly decreased by periodate
treatment. The results indicate that larvae of A. modesta
metamorphose in response to both water-soluble and sur-
face-associated carbohydrates of V. longicaulis, and that the
soluble cue exists as both high and low molecular weight
isoforms.
Received 3 March 1999; accepted 1 June 1999.
* To whom correspondence should be addressed. E-mail: pkrug@
biology.ucla.edu
Abbreviations: BVE = boiled Vaiicheriu extract.
Introduction
Most marine invertebrate species produce free-swimming
larvae that disperse in the plankton until becoming compe-
tent to settle to the bottom and metamorphose into the adult
form (Grahame and Branch, 1985; Levin and Bridges,
1995). Larval recruitment plays a critical role in benthic
marine ecosystems, structuring communities and regulating
population dynamics (Grosberg, 1982; Roughgarden et al.,
1988; Underwood and Fairweather, 1989). Microscopic lar-
vae are generally viewed as passive particles transported by
flow to the benthos (Eckman, 1983. 1990; Butman, 1987).
Following hydrodynamic delivery of larvae to the bottom,
recruitment can be divided into settlement and metamor-
phosis (Chia and Koss, 1988; Pawlik, 1992). Settlement is
characterized by active behaviors with which larvae explore
the physical and chemical characteristics of potential sub-
strata (LeTourneux and Bourget, 1988; Rodriguez et al.,
1993). Larvae may reject a substrate and resume swimming,
becoming resuspended in the water column (Butman et al.,
1988; Butman and Grassle, 1992). Alternatively, larvae may
respond to surface-associated cues and commit to metamor-
phosis, an irreversible developmental transformation into
the adult stage of the organism (Burke, 1983; Pawlik et al.,
1991; Roberts et al., 1991; Pawlik, 1992). Larvae are capa-
ble of fine-scale discrimination among substrata both in the
laboratory and in the field (Keough and Downes, 1982;
Raimondi, 1988).
Recent studies have demonstrated that both surface-asso-
ciated and water-soluble chemical cues can trigger larval
behavioral responses that greatly increase rates of settle-
ment and metamorphosis. Still-water laboratory assays have
demonstrated the importance of surface-associated chemical
cues for inducing larval metamorphosis of barnacles (Maki
94
CARBOHYDRATE SETTLEMENT CUES
95
et til., 1990), bryozoans (Hurlbut, 1991), corals (Morse et
al., 1988), gastropods (Morse et nl., 1984), and polychaetes
(Kirchman et al.. 1982). Hydrodynamic conditions and the
presence of a surface cue associated with adult conspecifics
had an interactive effect on settlement of larvae of the
reef-building polychaete Phragmatopoma califomica in
flow (Pawlik et al., 1991). Waterborne chemical cues also
affect larval settlement processes. Soluble cues secreted by
the adult prey organisms induced settlement and metamor-
phosis in the opisthobranchs Pliestilla sibogae and Adalaria
proximo (Hadfield and Scheuer, 1985; Lambert and Todd,
1994). Larvae of the oyster Crassostrea virginica showed
dramatic behavioral responses to a chemical cue secreted by
adult conspecifics, increasing settlement in both still and
moving water (Tamburri et al., 1992; Turner et al., 1994;
Tamburri et al.. 1996). However, despite decades of re-
search into the nature of larval chemical settlement cues,
relatively little is known about the molecules that regulate
this crucial aspect of the life history of most benthic marine
invertebrates.
A recent study of a population of the opisthobranch
mollusc Alderia modesta revealed several unusual features
that make A. modesta an ideal experimental system for
investigating larval life history and settlement processes
(Krug, 1998a, b). A. modesta is an ascoglossan found in
temperate estuaries in association with its obligate food
source, the yellow-green alga Vaucheria longicaulis (Xan-
thophyta: Xanthophyceae) (Hartog and Swennen, 1952;
Hartog, 1959; Trowbridge, 1993). In southern California, A.
modesta exhibits a reproductive polymorphism that is ex-
tremely rare among marine invertebrates; study populations
contain specimens that produce planktotrophic larvae and
other individuals that produce lecithotrophic larvae (Krug,
1998b). Most lecithotrophic spawn masses contain a mix-
ture of sibling larvae, some of which metamorphose spon-
taneously within 2 days of hatching; the remaining veligers
delay metamorphosis until encountering a chemical cue
derived exclusively from the adult host alga V. longicaulis
(Krug, 1998a). The present work used a bioassay for larval
metamorphosis to determine whether the inductive activity
was soluble or surface-associated in nature, and for bioas-
say-guided isolation of active fractions as a preliminary step
in purifying the settlement cue.
Materials and Methods
Collection of organisms and lan'al bioassay
Alderia modesta (Loven, 1844) and Vaucheria longi-
caulis were collected from mudflats in the Kendall-Frost
Marine Reserve and Northern Wildlife Preserve, and in the
San Diego River Flood Control Channel, San Diego, Cali-
fornia, U.S.A. All algae used in this study conformed to
published descriptions of V. longicaulis from California
(Abbott and Hollenberg, 1976). Patches of V. longicaulis
were grown under continuous lighting in the laboratory, and
blades of algae were pulled free of the sediment base and
rinsed in seawater before use in assays. Adult specimens of
A. modesta were maintained in petri dishes under 1 cm of
seawater. and lecithotrophic egg masses were harvested
daily for 3 days. Egg masses from each day were pooled and
maintained in 0.45 jam-filtered seawater (FSW); water was
changed every other day until hatching. Upon hatching,
larvae were maintained in FSW for 2 days, to allow spon-
taneous metamorphosis to occur in cue-independent larvae
(Krug. 1998a). The remaining larvae were then subsampled
for use in the bioassay. For each experimental treatment, 1 5
larvae were added to each of 3 replicate dishes containing 4
ml FSW. After 2 days, larvae were scored for metamorpho-
sis. Each experiment included a FSW-only treatment as a
negative control and live V. longicaulis as a positive control.
The percentage of metamorphosis for each replicate was
arcsine transformed, and treatments were compared using a
1-way ANOVA. Unplanned comparisons of means were
done using the Scheffe procedure (Day and Quinn, 1989).
Secretion of settlement cue
An experiment was designed to determine whether the
Vaucheria-denved settlement cue was surface-associated or
secreted by the algae. Small patches (1 cm 2 ) of V. longi-
caulis were cut from a growing mat and left attached to the
sediment base. Conditioned seawater (CSW) was made by
placing a patch in 4 ml FSW for either 3 h or 24 h, after
which the CSW was filtered through cotton and placed in a
sterile petri dish; larvae were added directly to the CSW for
the bioassay. Conditioned fresh water (CFW) was made by
placing patches of V. longicaulis in 4 ml deionized water for
24 h. The CFW was filtered through cotton, dried on a
rotary evaporator, and resuspended in an equivalent volume
of FSW for use in the bioassay. The negative control was
FSW aged 24 h and filtered through cotton in parallel with
treatements; the positive control was live V. longicaulis
tissue.
To determine whether Vaucheria longicaulis must be
alive to trigger metamorphosis, pieces of the algae were
frozen at -20C for 3 days. Frozen patches were thawed by
immersion in FSW at room temperature for 1 h prior to use
in the bioassay. To determine whether algal tissue must be
physically intact, blades of live V. longicaulis were pulled
free of a 2 cm 2 sediment base and washed in FSW. The
algae was manually homogenized in 10 ml deionized water
for 20 min. and the suspension sonicated for another 10 min.
The homogenate was centrifuged ( 10 min, 2000 RPM) and
the supernatant removed. The soluble homogenate was as-
sayed by adding 200 /Ltl (high concentration) or 30 ju.1 (low
concentration) aliquots to 4 ml FSW for use in the bioassay.
The negative control was FSW, and the positive control was
live intact V. longicaulis tissue.
96
P. J. KRUG AND A E. MANZI
Sequential extraction with boiling water
Four 20 X 20 cm mats of Vaucheria longicaulis attached
to the natural sediment base were field collected (March
1997) and grown in the laboratory under continuous light-
ing, moistened daily with 50% seawater. After 2 weeks
algal blades had grown 1-2 cm in height, and were har-
vested by cutting with dissecting scissors just above the
sediment base. The V. longicaulis tissue (1.34 g wet weight)
was placed in a beaker containing 50 ml deionized water
and boiled for 10 min. The solution of boiled Vaucheria
extract (BVE) was filtered through 100 /j,m Nitex mesh to
remove Vaucheria residue, and then through a 0.45 ;u,m
filter membrane. The Vaucheria residue was collected off of
the mesh filter, put in 50 ml of fresh deionized water, and
again boiled for 10 min to generate a second extract. This
process was repeated four more times, yielding a total of six
sequential boiling water extracts. The Vaucheria residue
remaining after the sixth extraction was collected from the
filter; this residue was yellow-brown in coloration but the
blades were still physically intact. Each of the six extracts
was assayed by adding a 50 jid aliquot to 4 ml FSW per
replicate assay dish. Pieces of live V. longicaulis were
assayed as a positive control, and equivalently sized pieces
of the V. longicaulis residue remaining after the six sequen-
tial extractions were also assayed.
Biochemical characterization of boiled Vaucheria
longicaulis extract (BVE)
The initial extract made by boiling Vaucheria longicaulis
for 10 min (described above) was subjected to preliminary
biochemical characterization. Six volumes of ethanol were
added to 1 ml of BVE and the solution was precipitated
overnight at 4C. The precipitate was pelleted by centrifu-
gation, the supernatant removed, and the precipitate washed
with ethanol and repelleted. The supernatant and wash eth-
anol were combined and dried on a rotary evaporator. The
precipitate and supernatant residue were individually resus-
pended in 1 ml of MilliQ-purified water, such that the
material in each fraction was present in solution at the same
concentration as in the original extract.
Aliquots (100 ju,l) of the initial BVE and of the resus-
pended solutions of supernatant and precipitate were used in
subsequent assays to determine the dry weight, carbohy-
drate content, protein content, and bioactivity of each sam-
ple. Lyophilized aliquots were weighed to determine dry
mass. Carbohydrate content was determined for duplicate
aliquots from each sample using the phenol-sulphuric col-
orimetric assay (DuBois et al.. 1956). Measurements were
calibrated to a standard curve generated with known con-
centrations of glucose. Protein content was determined us-
ing the BCA colorimetric assay (Pierce Co.) calibrated to a
standard curve generated with commercially supplied albu-
min standards. Bioactivity was determined using the larval
settlement bioassay.
Another 3 ml of BVE was precipitated with 6 volumes of
ethanol overnight, and the supernatant and precipitated ma-
terial were separated as before. The carbohydrate elution
profiles of both the supernatant and precipitate fractions
were determined using a gel filtration column (90 cm X 1
cm) of Sephacryl S-200 resin (Pharmacia Co.). The column
was calibrated for molecular weight using Blue Dextran to
determine the void volume (V ) and glucose to determine
the included volume (V,) for small molecules; size stan-
dards were detected in fractions after collection visually
(Blue Dextran) or by the phenol-sulphuric colorimetric as-
say (glucose). The supernatant residue was dissolved in a
minimal volume and loaded onto the column, eluting with
MilliQ-purified water at a flow rate of 6 ml/h and collecting
0.5 ml fractions. Aliquots were taken from each fraction and
analyzed for carbohydrate content by the phenol-sulphuric
colorimetric assay and for protein content by the BCA
assay; the detection limit for both colorimetric assays was
0.5 /j,g/ml. Based on the resulting carbohydrate elution
profile, fractions representing every 8 ml were pooled and
lyophilized to give 5 total fractions spanning the void vol-
ume and included volume. Each pooled fraction was dis-
solved in water and 150 ^il aliquots were bioassayed. The
precipitated fraction was chromatographed in an identical
manner and fractions were collected, assayed for carbohy-
drate content, and pooled to give five total fractions. Each
pooled fraction was dissolved in water and 75 jul aliquots
were bioassayed. A positive control using live Vaucheria
longicaulis induced 84 10% metamorphosis, while a
negative control using FSW gave 4 4% background
metamorphosis.
Sequential extraction of Vaucheria longicaulis with
solvents of increasing polarity
To determine whether macromolecules associated with
the algal cell wall were bioactive, Vaucheria longicaulis
was sequentially extracted with solvents of increasing po-
larity and harshness to extract molecules of increasing mo-
lecular weight. Lyophilized Vaucheria longicaulis (500 mg)
was homogenized into a fine powder and extracted with
80% aqueous ethanol (50 ml, 7 h, 75C), cold water (50 ml,
4 d, 20C), hot water (50 ml, 24 h, 65C), and 4% sodium
hydroxide (50 ml. 24 h, 20C) (Cleare and Percival, 1972).
The ethanol extract was partitioned into a water-soluble
fraction and a water-insoluble organic fraction. The cold
and hot water extracts were precipitated with ethanol as
before to generate supernatant and precipitate fractions for
each extract. Aliquots corresponding to 250 /ng dry weight
were taken from the water-soluble ethanol extract and from
the cold and hot water supernatant and precipitate fractions
and were assayed directly for bioactivity. An aliquot of the
CARBOHYDRATE SETTLEMENT CUES
97
organic-soluble material from the ethanol extract was dis-
solved in methanol, added to a dry culture dish, the solvent
evaporated, and 4 ml of FSW added prior to the bioassay.
The 4% NaOH extract was exhaustively dialyzed against
MilliQ-purified water and lyophilized, giving a dry material
(44 mg) that was completely insoluble in water but dis-
solved readily in 7 M urea. The S-200 Sephacryl column
was equilibrated in 7 M urea and calibrated for V,, and V, as
before. A portion of the 4% NaOH extract was dissolved in
a minimal volume of 7 M urea and loaded onto the S-200
column. The sample was chromatographed and fractions
were collected and assayed exactly as before, except the
column was eluted with 7 M urea. Fractions comprising the
high molecular weight carbohydrate peak were pooled and
dialyzed exhaustively against water using 10.000 molecular
weight cutoff dialysis tubing. The dialysate was reduced to
a volume of 1 ml on a rotary evaporator and 100 ;ul aliquots
were bioassayed.
Treatment of EVE with proteinase K, sodium periodate,
and mild acid hydrolysis
Chemical and enzymatic treatments were performed to
determine the biochemical nature of the settlement cue. A
solution of sodium periodate (0.37 M, 100 jal) was added to
1 .0 ml of BVE, and the solution was incubated at 4C in the
dark (Hassid and Abraham, 1957). The reaction was
quenched after 24 h by the addition of excess glycerol (20
;u.l ). As a control, 1 .0 ml of B VE was incubated at 4C in the
dark for 24 h, after which excess glycerol (20 /il) was added
followed immediately by periodate as in the treated sample.
Both samples were incubated for 1 h to allow the consump-
tion of excess periodate, and were then dialyzed exhaus-
tively against deionized water for one week. Both treatment
and control samples were lyophilized, dissolved in 300 p.\
FSW, and 100 jul aliquots used as replicate treatments in the
larval settlement bioassay.
Proteinase K (600 /j,g) was added to a sample of BVE
(300 /ill) which had been adjusted to pH 7.8 and incubated
at 50C for 24 h. The proteinase was then inactivated by
heating at 100C for 15 min. A control was done by adding
proteinase to BVE immediately prior to heating at 100C for
15 min. Samples were split into three replicate 100 pil
aliquots and tested in the larval bioassay. A mild acid
hydrolysis was performed by adding concentrated TEA ( 1 .5
/j.1) to BVE (400 fil) to achieve a final concentration of 0. 1
M TFA. The solution was heated at 100C for 75 min
(Lahaye and Ray, 1996) and dried under vacuum to remove
TFA. As control for the presence of residual TFA salts.
BVE (400 jul) was heated in parallel at 100C for 15 min.
and concentrated TFA was added to BVE immediately prior
to drying under vacuum. Samples were dissolved in 300 jiil
FSW, and 100 ju.1 aliquots used as replicate treatments in the
bioassay. Differences between treatment and control sam-
ples were compared using an unpaired two-tailed t-test on
arcsine-transformed percentages for each of the three treat-
ments, as different quantities of BVE were treated and
bioassayed in each case.
Results
Secreted and surface-associated forms of the larval
settlement cue
Previous work had demonstrated that Alderia modesta
larvae metamorphosed specifically in response to living
tissue of Vauchcrid Innxicunlis (Krug, 1998a). The initial
aim of the present study was to determine whether the
settlement cue was secreted into seawater by living algae,
and whether dead or homogenized algal tissue could induce
settlement. Water previously conditioned by the presence of
V. longicaiilis was as active in promoting metamorphosis as
was the living algae (Fig. 1A, and results of a 1-way
ANOVA: df = 4. 22; F = 32.73; P < 0.0001). The
120,
100
BO
40 .
r 1
livc lanchena CSW(3hl CSW(24h) CFW(24h)
live I auciiena dead intact homogenate homogenate FSW
I titiL-lit'na (high cone ) (low cone)
Figure 1. Induction of larval metamorphosis by live Vaiicheria longi-
caiilis, dead tissue, and conditioned water. Percentages of larval metamor-
phosis are given as means + SD (n = 3); arcsine-transformed percentages
were compared with a 1-way ANOVA, with a post-hoc Scheffe test for
unplanned comparisons. Live V. longicaiilis tissue was used as a positive
control and filtered sea water (FSW) as a negative control A. Secretion of
larval settlement cue by living V. longicaulis. Means are percentages of
metamorphosis induced by exposure to Wwc/ima-conditioned seawater
(CSW) or conditioned fresh water (CFW). Duration of conditioning pro-
cess is given in parentheses- Means not joined by a horizontal line differed
significantly (P < 0.001 ). B. Inductive effect of dead or homogenized V.
ln<;ictiulis. Previously frozen and thawed Vaucheria tissue, or aliquots of
homogenized algal tissue, were assayed for inductive effect. Means not
joined by a horizontal line differed significantly (P < 0.0?l.
98
P. J. KRUG AND A. E. MANZI
conditioning process occurred rapidly in the laboratory,
such that water conditioned for 3 h induced the same level
of metamorphosis as water conditioned for 24 h. Fresh
water was also conditioned by the presence of V. longicaulis
(Fig. 1A). There was no statistical difference between the
level of metamorphosis induced by the living algae and any
of the conditioned water treatments, all of which differed
significantly from the seawater-only control (Scheffe test.
P < 0.001).
Vaucheria longicaulis tissue that was frozen and thawed
induced significant larval metamorphosis, indicating that
the algae does not have to be alive to trigger settlement (Fig.
IB. and results of a 1-way ANOVA: df = 4, 16; F = 61.55;
P < 0.0001 ). Homogenates of algal tissue were also active,
confirming that V. longicaulis tissue does not have to be
alive or intact to induce metamorphosis (Fig. IB). Signifi-
cantly higher levels of metamorphosis were induced by
frozen V. longicaulis and the higher concentration of tissue
homogenate than by the negative control (Scheffe test, P <
0.05). The lower concentration of homogenate did not in-
duce significantly more metamorphosis than the negative
control, indicating that the larvae may be dose-responsive to
preparations of the cue; dilution experiments with condi-
tioned seawater support this conclusion (data not shown).
When Vaucheria longicaulis was extracted with boiling
water, the resulting aqueous extract was as active as positive
controls when assayed at an 80-fold dilution (Fig. 2, and
results of a 1-way ANOVA: df = 8, 18; F = 20.45; P <
0.0001). Conditioned seawater had no effect at such a
dilution, indicating that boiling water extracted the settle-
ment cue more efficiently than did the conditioning process.
When the V. longicaulis tissue was re-extracted with boiling
water for a second time, the resulting extract induced a low
level of metamorphosis, but not significantly more than the
negative control when assayed at an 80-fold dilution (Fig.
% metamorphosis
Ml
- 1st -
2nd '
2,5 5,0 7,5 H
I 1
1
^-.b.c
sequential
extract
3rd -
4th '
]"<
c
5th '
c
~~ 6th '
]-
extracted residue -
3 ,a,b
FSW '
h
Figure 2. Serial extraction of Vaucheria longicaulis with boiling wa-
ter. Means + SD (n = 3) are percentages of larval metamorphosis induced
by aliquots of 6 sequential boiling water extracts, tested at an 80-fold
dilution, along with the fully extracted algal residue. Live V. longicaulis
was used as a positive control, and FSW as a negative control. Means not
identified with the same letter differed significantly (P < 0.05, 1-way
ANOVA with a post-hoc Scheffe comparison).
2). Four further extractions with boiling water yielded ex-
tracts that contained no appreciable bioactivity, even when
assayed at higher concentrations. These data indicate that all
of the measurable bioactivity was extracted from V. longi-
caulis in the first two boiling water treatments. The insolu-
ble residue remaining after six sequential extractions had
thus been exhaustively extracted. However, larvae exposed
to this residue metamorphosed at a level comparable to
those exposed to living V. longicaulis (Fig. 2). Significant
bioactivity thus remained associated with the Vaucheria cell
wall residue after all the soluble settlement cue had been
extracted.
High and low molecular weight forms of the soluble
settlement cue
Boiled Vaucheria extract (BVE) was fractionated by eth-
anol precipitation into a supernatant and precipitate, each of
which was diluted back up to the starting volume of BVE
for comparison. Biochemical analysis revealed that the car-
bohydrate content of BVE partitioned equally between the
precipitate and supernatant, while the majority of the protein
in the crude BVE went into the ethanol precipitate (Table I).
There was no significant difference between the bioactivity
in 100 ju.1 of precipitate, supernatant, and BVE (1-way
ANOVA. P > 0.3), although the supernatant consistently
displayed slightly lower activity at several concentrations
tested.
Both the ethanol precipitate and supernatant were further
fractionated by gel filtration chromatography on a Sephacryl
S-200 column. When column fractions were assayed for
carbohydrate content, contrasting elution profiles were ob-
tained for the two samples (Fig. 3). All detectable carbohy-
drate from the supernatant fraction eluted in the included
volume of the column, indicating a molecular weight of
<2,000 Da. In contrast, when the precipitate was chromato-
graphed, all detectable carbohydrate eluted as one peal; in
the void volume, indicating molecules of > 100, 000 Da
molecular weight. When fractions were pooled and bioas-
sayed, there was significant variation in the bioactivity of
different fractions (Fig. 3, and results of a 1-way ANOVA:
df = 11, 24; F = 17.33; P < 0.0001). For the precipitate,
a high level of metamorphosis (54 23% SD) was induced
by the pooled fractions containing the high molecular
weight carbohydrate peak, and a lower level was induced by
the adjacent fraction containing the trailing edge of the
peak. The level of metamorphosis induced by the high
molecular weight peak was not statistically different from
that induced by the positive control (Scheffe test, P = 0.20)
but was significantly higher than the negative control
(Scheffe test, P < 0.05). No bioactivity significantly higher
than the negative control (4 4%) was detected in the low
molecular weight fractions from the ethanol precipitate. The
bioactivity profile of the ethanol supernatant gave the op-
CARBOHYDRATE SETTLEMENT CUES
99
Table I
Comparative dry weight, protein content, carbohydrate content, and
bioactivity (SD) of 100 /J aliquots of a standard solution of boiled
Vaucheria extract (BVE) and the precipitate and supernatant resulting
from ethanol treatment of BVE. The precipitate and supernatant were
dissolved in the starting volume of extract and aliquots were removed
for chemical assays (n = 2) and bioassays (n = 3)
Dry Weight
Carbohydrate
Protein
Bioactivity
Sample
C/ug)
<^g)
(Mg>
(%)
BVE
270 10
6 1
25 1
82 25
supernatant
110 10
4 1
6 1
49 4
precipitate
140 10
3 1
17 1
77 21
posite result. The low molecular weight fraction of the
supernatant, which contained all the carbohydrate, induced
a level of metamorphosis that was not significantly different
from the high molecular weight carbohydrate peak from the
precipitate (Scheffe test, P = 0.79). No other fraction from
the supernatant induced significant metamorphosis. Bioac-
tivity thus co-eluted with the major carbohydrate peak of
both the supernatant and precipitate, although the active
peak from the supernatant contained only low molecular
weight molecules while that from the precipitate contained
molecules of high molecular weight. Identical carbohydrate
I? 01
supernatant
\ precipitate
v ,
t
*Ay^ . A -A
?0 40 50 60 70
30 40 50 60 70
Figure 3. Gel filtration chromatography of the supernatant and pre-
cipitate from ethanol precipitation of boiled Vaucheria extract (BVE).
Fractions were independently chromatographed on a size-calibrated col-
umn of Sephacryl S-200 gel eluting with water. Molecules of molecular
weight > 100,000 Da elute in the void volume (V ), while those of <2,000
Da elute in the included volume (V,). Column fractions (0.5 ml) were
assayed for carbohydrate content by the phenol-sulphuric colonmetric
assay. Fractions were pooled as indicated, lyophilized, and bioassayed for
induction of larval metamorphosis. Percentages of metamorphosis are
means + SD (n = 3).
peak profiles were obtained when sarpples were chromato-
graphed using 7 M urea as a chaotropic agent to disrupt any
potential aggregation of macromolecules, and no major
protein peaks were evident for either sample (data not
shown).
Sequential extraction of Vaucheria longicaulis
Lyophilized Vaucheria longicaulis was sequentially ex-
tracted with solvents of increasing harshness to determine if
bioactivity was persistently associated with molecules of
increasing molecular weight and stronger association with
the algal cell wall. Aqueous extracts were ethanol precipi-
tated to yield supernatant and precipitate fractions, and all
soluble extracts were bioassayed at the same concentration
per unit dry weight. The material extracted with 4% NaOH
was insoluble in water but dissolved readily in 7 M urea, a
chaotropic agent routinely used to solubilize and chromato-
graph high molecular weight polysaccharides. One major
carbohydrate peak was detected in the void volume of the
S-200 column when the 4% NaOH extract was chromato-
graphed with 7 M urea as eluant (Fig. 4). This carbohydrate
peak was exhaustively dialyzed, and the material which
remained in aqueous solution was bioassayed. There was
significant variation in the bioactivity of different extracts
(Fig. 5, and results of a 1-way ANOVA: df = 8, 39; F =
4.64; P < 0.0005). The water-soluble partition of an ethanol
extract of V. longicaulis induced significantly higher levels
of metamorphosis than the water-insoluble organic layer
and the negative control (Scheffe test, P < 0.05), indicating
all bioactive molecules are highly polar. Bioactivity above
the level of the negative control (8 8%) was found in all
water-soluble extracts as well as in the resolubilized 4%
NaOH extract, indicating that molecules of increasing mo-
ml eluted
Figure 4. Carbohydrate elution profile of 4% NaOH extract of
Vaucheria longicaulis powder. Aqueous-insoluble material from the basic
extraction was eluted from Sephacryl S-200 gel with the chaotropic agent
7 M urea. Fractions containing the carbohydrate peak eluting in the void
volume were pooled, dialyzed, and reduced in volume before being bio-
assayed.
100
P. J. KRUG AND A. E. MANZI
metamorphosis
live Vaucheria twiga ac metamorphosed in response to water condi-
tioned with the hard coral Porites compressa (Hadfield,
1977; Hadfield and Scheuer, 1985). Larvae of the dorid
nudibranch Adalaria proxima metamorphosed in seawater
conditioned by the preferred adult prey, the bryozoan Elec-
tro pilosa (Lambert and Todd. 1994). However, metamor-
phosis of A. proxima larvae could only be induced by live
colonies of E. pilosa and not by dead colonies or homoge-
nized extracts (Todd ct ai. 1991 ; Lambert and Todd. 1994).
In contrast, dead and homogenized V. longicaulis tissue
induced metamorphosis in A. modesta.
Secreted settlement cues are also involved in gregarious
settlement of some species. Larvae of the sand dollars
Dendraster excentricus and Echinarachinus parma meta-
morphosed in response to sand beds and seawater condi-
tioned by the presence of adult conspecifics (Burke, 1984;
Pearce and Scheibling, 1990). The most detailed studies on
the effects of a secreted chemical settlement cue have fo-
cused on the oyster Crassostrea virginica. Larvae altered
their swimming speed and turning rate in response to small
basic peptides secreted by adult conspecifics, significantly
increasing settlement in both still and moving water in
response to the dissolved cue (Tamburri et ai, 1992; Turner
ct ill., 1994; Tamburri el /., 1996). These results demon-
strate that soluble chemicals can increase settlement rates by
influencing the behavior of larvae still suspended in the
water column (Turner et al, 1994). The relative importance
of the secretion of the Vaucheria-denved cue to the settle-
ment of Alderia modesta larvae in the field will require
further study. However, the rapidity of the conditioning
process suggests that absorbent mats of V. longicaulis may
become saturated with naturally conditioned water during
high tides, which might induce settlement in larvae that
enter trapped water parcels.
Extracting Vaucheria longicaulis with boiling water
not only demonstrated that the chemical cue is stable to
prolonged periods of boiling, but that a highly concen-
trated solution can be prepared in this manner. The di-
minishing bioactivity of sequential extracts indicates that
a
Figure 6. Effects of proteinase K. mild acid hydrolysis, and sodium
periodate on bioactivity of boiled Vaucheriu extract (BVE). Percentages of
larval metamorphosis are given as means + SD (n = 3) for each treatment
and the corresponding control. Percentages for each treatment and control
were arcsine transformed and compared with a two-tailed impaired t-test (*
= significant at P < 0.05 level); the t values obtained were 2.08 (proteinase
K), 1.20 (mild acid hydrolysis), and -4.46 (sodium periodate).
CARBOHYDRATE SETTLEMENT CUES
101
there is a limited amount of the waterborne cue that can
be extracted with boiling water. However, after repeated
extractions the residual Vaucheria tissue retained signif-
icant activity, indicating that a non-extractable form of
the settlement cue remains associated with the algal cell
wall. This is the first direct demonstration that the same
substrate produces both secreted and surface-associated
forms of a larval settlement cue, each of which is suffi-
cient to induce metamorphosis.
Polysaccharide chemists routinely employ basic solvents
such as NaOH to extract material that remains associated
with plant cell walls following hot water extraction (Cleare
and Percival, 1972). The water-insoluble material extracted
with 4% NaOH contained high molecular weight carbohy-
drates that, when partially resolubilized in 7 M urea and
then dialyzed against water, were active in the larval settle-
ment assay. The bioactivity of this fraction is consistent
with the finding that Vaucheria tissue exhaustively ex-
tracted with boiling water can still induce metamorphosis;
together, these experiments define a surface-associated class
of molecules which differ in their physical properties (size.
solubility) from the water-soluble cue molecules, but share
the same bioactivity. An insoluble inducer associated with
cell wall polysaccharides of the crustose red alga Hydroli-
thon boergesenii triggered metamorphosis in the coral Aga-
ricia humilis (Morse et al, 1988; Morse and Morse, 1991 ).
Larvae of the echinoid Stronglyocentrotus droebachiensis
metamorphosed in response to live tissue or a homogenate
of several species of coralline red algae, but the algae did
not release soluble inducers into seawater (Pearce and
Scheibling. 1990).
The active material in the water-soluble extracts was
further divided into discrete molecular weight classes by
ethanol precipitation. Chromatography revealed that the
carbohydrates in the BVE precipitate were exclusively of
high molecular weight, while those in the supernatant
were all of low molecular weight; in both cases, the
bioactivity co-eluted with the major carbohydrate peak.
Studies of larval settlement inducers for other opistho-
branchs have used ultrafiltration to show that the bioac-
tive molecules are less than 1,000 Da in size (Hadfield
and Pennington, 1990; Gibson and Chia, 1994; Lambert
et al., 1997). Distinct size-classes of water soluble set-
tlement cue molecules have not been previously reported
from other study systems.
The bioactive settlement cue molecules co-eluted with
the carbohydrate peak in each extract, were stable to
boiling and mild acid or base treatment, and some were
firmly associated with the algal cell wall. These results
suggested that the molecules were either composed of, or
tightly associated with, algal carbohydrates. Proteinase K
treatment did not diminish the activity of algal extracts,
but bioactivity was significantly reduced by treatment
with sodium periodate. Periodate reacts with monosac-
charide units of polysaccharides, oxidizing consecutive
hydroxyl groups to aldehydes and cleaving sugar residues
having three consecutive hydroxyl groups to produce
formic acid (Hassid and Abraham, 1957). Taken together,
the data strongly suggest that the larvae of Alderia ino-
desta metamorphose in response to a structural feature of
the polysaccharides produced by Vaucheria longicaulis.
This would account for the bioactivity of molecules of
differing molecular weight, since small oligosaccharides
can contain the same distinctive glycosidic linkages as
are found in the full-length polymer. Consistent with this
hypothesis, the activity of Vaucheria extract was not
diminished by a mild acid hydrolysis using 0.1 M TFA;
the same conditions have been used to fragment matrix
polysaccharides of green algae into smaller oligosaccha-
rides representative of the repeating unit (Lahaye and
Ray, 1996).
Recognition of carbohydrates by larval lectins has been
implicated in settlement induction for several taxonomically
diverse marine invertebrates (Kirchman et al., 1982; Maki
and Mitchell, 1985; Bahamondes-Rojas and Dherbomez,
1990; Bonar et al., 1990; Morse and Morse, 1991). Meta-
morphosis of barnacle larvae in response to glycoproteins is
abolished when the oligosaccharide chains of the proteins
are bound by lectins and thus rendered inaccessible to larval
receptors (Matsumura et al., 1998). The present study
strongly indicates a carbohydrate is the settlement cue for
Alderia modesta, but definitive proof will require the isola-
tion of a pure oligosaccharide that induces metamorphosis.
Preliminary results indicate that inductive fragments are
anionic and contain uncommon sugar residues including
glucuronic and galacturonic acid, rhamnose, and xylose,
which are not recognized by most available enzymes and
lectins (Krug, 1998a). A direct chemical analysis of the
structural features of the polysaccharides of Vaucheria lon-
gicaulis and their bioactivity is currently underway. How-
ever, bioactivity is clearly associated with algal polysaccha-
rides, both soluble and insoluble, making A. modesta an
ideal experimental organism for dissecting the roles of
waterborne versus surface-associated cues in the larval set-
tlement process.
Acknowledgments
We thank Dr. K. Norgard-Sumnicht for experimental
assistance, and Drs. N. Holland, L. Levin, W. Fenical, C.
Derby, and two anonymous reviewers for thoughtful criti-
cisms that greatly improved this manuscript. Access to the
Kendall-Frost Reserve was made possible by Isabelle Kay
and the University of California Natural Reserve System.
P. J. K. was supported by an NSF Predoctoral Fellowship.
102
P. J. KRUG AND A. E. MANZI
Literature Cited
Abbott, I. A., and G. J. Hollenberg. 1976. Marine Algae of California.
Stanford University Press. Stanford.
Bahamondes-Rojas, I., and M. Dherbomez. 1990. Purification partielle
de substances glycoconjuguees capables d'induire la metamorphose
des larves competentes d' Eitbrancluts doriae (Trinchese. 1879), mol-
lusque nudibranche. J. E\p. Mar. Biol. Ecol. 144: 17-27.
Bonar, D. B., S. L. Coon, M. Walch, R. M. Weiner, and W. Fitt. 1990.
Control of oyster settlement and metamorphosis by endogenous and
exogenous chemical cues. Bull. Mar. Sci. 46: 484-498.
Burke. R. D. 1983. The induction of metamorphosis of marine inverte-
brate larvae: stimulus and response. Can. J. Zoo/. 61: 1701-1719.
Burke. R. D. 1984. Pheromonal control of metamorphosis in the Pacific
sand dollar. Dendraster excentricus. Science 225: 442-443.
Bulman. C. A. 1987. Larval settlement of soft-sediment invertebrates:
the spatial scales of pattern explained by habitat selection and the
emerging role of hydrodynamic processes. Oceanagr. Mar. Biol. Ainni.
Rev. 25: 113-165.
Butman. C. A., and J. P. Grassle. 1992. Active habitat selection by
Capilella sp. I larvae: two-choice experiments in still water and flume
flows. / Mar. Res. 50: 699-715.
Butman, C. A., J. P. Grassle, and C. M. Webb. 1988. Substrate choice
made by marine larvae settling in still water and in a flume flow. Nature
333: 771-773.
Chia, F.-S., and R. Koss. 1988. Induction of settlement and metamor-
phosis of the veliger larvae of the nudibranch Onchidoris bilamellata.
Int. J. Invrrtebr. Reprod. Devel. 14: 53-70.
Cleare, M., and E. Percival. 1972. Carbohydrates of the fresh water
alga Tribonema aec/uale. I. Low molecular weight and polysacchandes.
Br Phycol. J. 1: 185-193.
Day, R. W., and G. P. Quinn. 1989. Comparisons of treatments after an
analysis of variance in ecology. Ecol. Monogr. 59: 433-463.
DuBois, M., K. A. Gilles, J. K. Hamilton, P. A. Rebers, and F. Smith.
1956. Colorimetric method for the determination of sugars and re-
lated substances. Anal. C/iem. 28: 350-356.
Eckman, J. E. 1983. Hydrodynamic processes affecting benthic recruit-
ment. Limnol. Oceanogr. 28: 241-257.
Eckman, J. E. 1990. A model of passive settlement by planktonic larvae
onto bottoms of differing roughness. Limnol. Oceanogr. 35: 887-901.
Gibson, G. D., and F.-S. Chia. 1994. A metamorphic inducer in the
opisthobranch Hwninaea callidegcnita: partial purification and biolog-
ical activity. Biol. Bull. 187: 133-142
Grahame, J., and G. M. Branche. 1985. Reproductive patterns of
marine invertebrates. Oceanogr. Mar. Biol. Anna. Rev. 23: 373-398.
Grosberg, R. 1982. Intertidal zonation of barnacles: the influence of
planktonic zonation of larvae on the vertical distribution of adults.
Ecology 63: 894-899.
Hadfield, M. G. 1977. Chemical interactions in larval settling of a
marine gastropod. Pp. 403-413 in Marine Natural Products Chemistry.
D. J. Faulkner and W. H. Fenical, eds. Plenum. New York.
Hadfield, M. G., and J. T. Pennington. 1990. Nature of the metamor-
phic signal and its internal transduction in larvae of the nudibranch
Pheslilla sibogac. Bull. Mar. Sci. 46: 455-464.
Hadfield, M. G., and D. Scheuer. 1985. Evidence for a soluble meta-
morphic inducer in Phcxlilla: ecological, chemical and biological data.
Bull. Mar. Sci. 37: 556-566.
Hartog, C. Den. 1959. Distribution and ecology of the slugs Alderia
modesla and Limapontiu dcpressa in the Netherlands. Beaufortia 7:
15-36.
Hartog, C. Den., and C. Swennen. 1952. On the occurrence of Alderia
modesta (Loven) and Limapontia depressa A. & H. on the salt marshes
of the Dutch Wadden Sea. Beaufortia 2: 1-3.
Hassid, W. Z., and S. Abraham. 1957. Chemical procedures for anal-
ysis of polysaccharides. Methods in Enzymol. 3: 34-50.
Hurlhut, C. J. 1991. Community recruitment: settlement and juvenile
survival of seven co-occurring species of sessile marine invertebrates.
Mar. Biol. 109: 507-515.
Keough, M. J., and B. J. Downes. 1982. Recruitment of marine inver-
tebrates: the role of active larval choices and early mortality. Oecologia
54: 348-352.
Kirchman. D., S. Graham, D. Reish, and R. Mitchell. 1982. Lectins
may mediate in the settlement and metamorphosis of Janita (Dexio-
spira) brasiliensis (Grube). Mar. Biol. Lett. 3: 131-142.
Krug, P. J. 1998a. Chemical and larval ecology of opisthobranch mol-
luscs: variable development modes and settlement requirements for
larvae of Alderia modesta. Ph.D. dissertation. University of California,
San Diego. 227 pp.
Krug, P. J. 1998b. Poecilogony in an estuarine opisthobranch: plank-
totrophy, lecithotrophy, and mixed clutches in a population of the
ascoglossan Alderia modesta. Mar. Biol. 132: 483-494.
Lahaye, M., and B. Ray. 1996. Cell-wall polysaccharides from the
marine alga Ulva "rigida" (Ulvales, Chlorophyta) NMR analysis of
ulvan oligosacchandes. Carbohydr. Res. 283: 161-173.
Lambert, W. J., and C. D. Todd. 1994. Evidence for a water-borne cue
inducing metamorphosis in the dorid nudibranch mollusc Adalaria
pntxima (Gastropoda: Nudibranchia). Mar. Biol. 120: 265-271.
Lambert, W. J., C. D. Todd, and J. D. Hardege. 1997. Partial char-
acterization and biological activity of a metamorphic inducer of the
dorid nudibranch Adalaria proximo (Gastropoda: Nudibranchia). In-
vertebr. Biol. 116: 71-81.
LeTourneux, F., and E. Bourget. 1988. Importance of physical and
biological settlement cues used at different spatial scales by the larvae
of Semibalanus balanoides. Mar. Biol. 97: 57-66.
Levin, L. A., and T. S. Bridges. 1995. Pattern and diversity in repro-
duction and development. Pp. 1 17 in Marine Invertebrate Larvae. L.
McEdward, ed. CRC Press, Oxford.
Maki, J. S., and R. Mitchell. 1985. Involvement of lectins in the
settlement and metamorphosis of marine invertebrate larvae. Bull. Mar.
Sci. 37: 675-683.
Maki, J. S., D. Rittschof, M.-O. Samuelsson, U. Szewzyk, A. B. Yule, S.
Kjelleberg, J. D. Costlow, and R. Mitchell. 1990. Effect of marine
bacteria and their exopolymers on the attachment of barnacle cypns
larvae. Bull. Mar. Sci. 46: 499-51 1.
Matsumura, K., S. Mori, M. Nagano, and N. Fusetani. 1998. Lentil
lectin inhibits adult extract-induced settlement of the barnacle. Balanus
amphitrite. J. Exp. Zoo/. 280: 213-219.
Morse, A. N. C., C. A. Froyd, and D. E. Morse. 1984. Molecules from
cyanobacteria and red algae that induce settlement and metamorphosis
in the mollusc Haliotis rufescens. Mar. Biol. 81: 293-298.
Morse, D. E., and A. N. C. Morse. 1991. Enzymatic characterization of
the morphogen recognized by Agaricia humilis (Scleractinian coral)
larvae. Biol. Bull. 181: 104-122.
Morse, D. E., N. Hooker, A. N. C. Morse, and R. Jensen. 1988.
Control of larval metamorphosis and recruitment in sympatric agariciid
corals. / Exp. Mar. Biol. Ecol. 116: 193-217.
Pawlik, J. R. 1992. Chemical ecology of the settlement of benthic
marine invertebrates. Oceanogr. Mar. Biol. Annu. Rev. 30: 273-335.
Pawlik, J. R., C. A. Butman, and V. R. Starczak. 1991. Hydrodynamic
facilitation of gregarious settlement of a reef-building tube worm.
Science 251: 421-424.
Pearce, C. M., and R. E. Scheibling. 1990. Induction of settlement and
metamorphosis in the sand dollar Echinarachnius parma: evidence for
an adult-associated factor. Mar. Biol. 107: 363-369.
Raimondi, P. T. 1988. Settlement cues and determination of the vertical
limit of an intertidal barnacle. Ecology 69: 400-407.
Roberts, D., D. Rittschof, E. Holm, and A. R. Schmidt. 1991. Factors
CARBOHYDRATE SETTLEMENT CUES
103
influencing initial larval settlement: temporal, spatial, and surface mo-
lecular components. J. Exp. Mar. Biol. Ecol. 150: 203-22 1
Rodriguez, S., F. Patricio Ojeda, and N. Inestrosa. 1993. Settlement of
benthic marine invertebrates. Mar. Ecol. Prog. Ser. 97: 193-207.
Roughgarden, J., S. Gaines, and H. Possingham. 1988. Recruitment
dynamics in complex life cycles. Science 241: 1460-1466.
Tamburri, M. N., R. K. Zimmer-Faust, and M. L. Tamplin. 1992.
Natural sources and properties of chemical mducers mediating
settlement of oyster larvae: a re-examination. Biol. Bull. 183: 327-
338.
Tamburri, M. N., C. M. Finelli, D. S. Wethey, and R. K. Zimmer-
Faust. 1996. Chemical induction of larval settlement behavior in
flow. Biol. Bull. 191: 367-373.
Todd, C. D., M. G. Bentley, and J. N. Havenhand. 1991. Larval
metamorphosis of the opisthobranch mollusc Adalaria proximo (Gas-
tropoda: Nudibranchia): the effects of choline and elevated potassium
ion concentration. / Mar. Biol. Assoc. U. K. 71: 53-72.
Trowbridge, C. 1993. Local and regional abundance patterns of the
ascoglossan opisthobranch Alderia modesta (Loven, 1844) in the
Northeastern Pacific. Ve liger 36: 303-310.
Turner, E. J., R. K. Zimmer-Faust, M. A. Palmer, and M. Lucken-
back. 1994. Settlement of oyster (Crassostrea virginica) larvae: ef-
fects of water flow and a water-soluble chemical cue. Limnol. Ocean-
ogr. 39: 1579-1593.
Underwood, A. J., and P. G. Fairweather. 1989. Supply-side ecology
and benthic marine assemblages. TREE 4: 16-20.
Reference: Biot. Bull. 197: 104-111. (August 1999)
The Velar Ciliature in the Brooded Larva of the
Chilean Oyster Ostrea chilensis (Philippi, 1845)
O. R. CHAPARRO 1 , R. J. THOMPSON 2 *. AND C. J. EMERSON"
1 Institute de Biologia Marina, Universidad Austral de Chile. Casilla 567, Valdivia, Chile;
2 Ocean Sciences Centre, Memorial University of Newfoundland, St. John's, Newfoundland.
Canada A1C 557; and 3 Biology Department, Memorial University of Newfoundland.
St. John's, Newfoundland, Canada A1B 3X9
Abstract. The Chilean oyster (Ostrea chilensis) broods its
offspring almost to the settlement stage (about 8 weeks).
Larvae are maintained inside the infrabranchial chamber of
the female. Samples from all embryo and larval develop-
mental stages were obtained from mantle cavities of brood-
ing females and analyzed by scanning electron microscopy,
with particular attention to the velar structures.
All embryos and the earliest veliger stages of O. chilensis
are devoid of cilia. Cilia first appear when shell length
reaches 290-300 jam, and the first cilia to grow on the
velum form the outer preoral cilia. In larvae 340 /n,m long,
all the ciliary rings on the velum can be distinguished. These
are the apical cilia (AC), inner preoral cilia (IPC), outer
preoral cilia (OPC), and adoral cilia (AOC). The absence of
the apical tuft in both O. chilensis and the closely related
species O. ednlis represents an adaptation to brooding by the
embryos and larvae, but the lack of the postoral cilia (POC)
in O. chilensis and the lack of cilia in the embryonic and
early veliger stages are associated with an extreme brooding
condition in this species.
Introduction
Most bivalve molluscs exhibit external fertilization of the
gametes followed by the development of pelagic larvae. In
some species, however, there is a totally benthic or brooded
larval development, and in other cases a period of brooding
is followed by a pelagic phase (Pechenik, 1979, 1986). In
brooding species the eggs, embryos, and larvae are retained
in the interlamellar spaces of both demibranchs or of the
Received 22 May 1998; accepted 24 May 1999.
* To whom correspondence should be addressed. E-mail: thompson
morgan.ucs.mun.ca
inner or outer demibranchs only; alternatively, they may be
confined to brood sacs, marsupia, mucous masses, capsules,
or other specialized structures (Ockelmann, 1964; Soli's.
1967; Franz, 1973; Mackie et ai, 1974; Heard. 1977;
Mackie. 1984; Tankersley and Dimock. 1992, 1993; Gal-
lardo, 1993).
Brooding is a characteristic common to all members of
the subfamily Ostreinae (Harry, 1985). All species of the
genus Ostrea brood their embryos in the infrabranchial
chamber (Millar and Hollis, 1963; Galtsoff, 1964; Chanley
and Dinamani. 1980; Harry. 1985; Cranfield and Michael.
1989). Brooding in oysters can be very short, as in O.
puelchana (3 days. Morriconi and Calvo, 1980; 3 to 9 days,
Fernandez Castro and Le Pennec, 1988). or very long, as in
O. chilensis (6 to 12 weeks; Toro and Chaparro. 1990). In
addition to having the longest period of brooding, the Chil-
ean oyster produces the fewest eggs (3500 to 152.000) of
any Ostrea species, with the largest egg diameter (approx-
imately 250 /urn), the largest pediveliger at the time of
release (approximately 450 /am), and the shortest pelagic-
phase (minutes to 24 hours) (review by Toro and Chaparro.
1990).
Pelagic larvae possess structures specialized for swim-
ming and feeding, but it is unlikely that brooded larvae have
the same requirements, especially if the brooding period is
long, as in the Chilean oyster (8 weeks). In many species,
brooded larvae do not ingest particles, often because the
brooding female provides nutrition through the biochemical
reserves in large eggs, as in O. chilensis, or through body
fluids or nurse eggs. Strathmann (1978) has described the
adaptations of some nonfeeding brooded larvae. In other
cases, the female concentrates phytoplankton and other sus-
pended material from the external environment for the use
104
VELUM OF OSTREA CHILENSIS
105
of the larvae, as suggested by Buroker (1985) for Ostrea
spp. and by Mackie (1979) for freshwater bivalves (Pisidi-
idae), and as demonstrated in O. chilensis by Chaparro ct al.
( 1 993 ). The present paper examines the velar ciliature of the
larva of O. chilensis, an extreme case in which the larva is
brooded for almost the entire developmental period, and
compares the ciliature morphologically with that of the
planktotrophic larvae of related species, particularly other
ostreids.
Materials and Methods
Samples of oysters (Ostrea chilensis) were obtained at
intervals throughout the brooding period (October to Janu-
ary) during 1992, 1993. and 1994 from a natural bank in the
Quempillen estuary in the northern part of Chiloe Island
(4152'S: 7346'W). in the south of Chile. On each sam-
pling date, several female oysters were opened and their
embryos or larvae removed. In this way. all larval develop-
ment stages were sampled. Larvae were prepared for scan-
ning electron microscopy (SEM) following Hadfield and
laea (1989).
Larvae were anesthetized for about 10 min in a MgCl-,
solution isotonic with seawater, then fixed for 1 h in ice-cold
3% glutaraldehyde in 0.2 M sodium cacodylate buffer. pH
7.4. Fixed samples were rinsed in the buffer solution twice
and post-fixed for 1 h in ice-cold 1% OsO 4 in 0.2 M sodium
cacodylate. pH 7.4. The specimens were then rinsed two or
three times with buffer solution and then once with distilled
water before being dehydrated in a graded series of ethanol
(Cragg, 1985).
For SEM, dehydrated specimens were critical-point dried
from liquid carbon dioxide in a Polaron E3000 drying
apparatus. Dried larvae were attached to aluminum viewing
stubs with double-sided tape and then coated with gold in an
Edwards S150A sputter-coaler. When necessary, larval
shells were broken with a fine needle to expose the internal
structures (Cragg, 1985, 1989). Coated samples were
viewed in a Hitachi S570 scanning electron microscope
operated at an accelerating voltage of 20 kV. Micrographs
were recorded on Polaroid Type 665 positive/negative film,
and stereopairs taken with a 10 tilt angle difference.
Each brood of larvae was processed separately. Although
all larvae from a given brood were at the same develop-
mental stage, as an additional precaution at least 30-50
larvae from each brood were observed by SEM before
micrographs were taken, to ensure that the structures ob-
served were common to all of them. Measurements based on
SEM are approximate, owing to foreshortening effects re-
lated to the depth of field, the tilt angle, and the curvature of
the sample.
Figure 1. Early development stages in Ostrea chilensis. (a) Gastrula;
scale bar 109 /u,m. (b) Dorsolateral view of late trochophore; scale bar 96
jj.m. (c) Lateral view of early veliger; scale bar 109 /nm. In all cases,
embryos or larvae are devoid ot cilia.
Results
Early development stages
The earliest development stages are naked, with no cilia
(Fig. 1). Only when the embryo reaches the earliest veliger
stage, with a shell length of about 290 /xm, is the first ciliary
growth observed. Cilia appear on the upper part of the
velum, and owing to their location and arrangement on the
velum, they are presumed to form the future ring of outer
preoral cilia (OPC) (Fig. 2a, b). These cilia are about 1 1-14
jam long. At this stage they are separate, with a tendency to
join each other in the middle basal part of the cilia. At the
same time, a group of short cilia develops in the mouth
region and begins to cover the food groove. These cilia are
shorter than those in the putative OPC ring, and are ran-
domly distributed (Fig. 2c).
After 25-30 days of brooding (shell length 315-320 /am).
a clear pattern of single or compound cilia has emerged
which persists for the remainder of the larval phase. The
ciliary belts composing the velum are shown schematically
in Figure 3. Larvae exhibit a very well synchronized ciliary
106
O R. CHAPARRO ET AL
growth pattern, with all larvae from the same brood being at
the same developmental stage.
Distribution of cilia on the velum
The ciliature of a larva of shell length 400 jam is shown
in Figure 4A. A concavity about 70-80 /urn in diameter is
visible in the most central and apical sector of the velum
(Fig. 4B). Located in its base is a group of small cilia, the
apical cilia (AC), which are randomly distributed and are
not organized into the apical tuft characteristic of planktonic
veligers, but lie in the same position. Surrounding this
depression is a bare region about 60 /urn wide, delimited by
a single belt of cilia constituting the inner preoral ciliary
(IPO ring.
Figure 2. In a larva of Ostri'u chilcnsix with a shell length of about 300
fitn. the cilia first appear on top of the velum, as well as in the food groox e
and mouth region, (a, b) Superior-lateral view of the cilia that will form the
OPC band; scale bars 60 JLUII and S JLUII respectively; arrows indicate future
OPC. (c) Short cilia covering the adoral food groove (FC) and the mouth
region (ventral aspect); scale bar 80 /jm.
The IPC form a ring of single cilia (Fig. 4C), each one
about 15-20 ;um long. Outside the IPC ring is a naked area,
9-10 ju,m wide, which is surrounded by a large ring of OPC.
Oilier preoral cilia
The OPC form a band, about 10-15 ju.ni wide, of two
rows of cirri, or composite cilia (Waller, 1981), which are
oriented radially from the center of the velum (Fig. 4D, E).
This is the dominant ring in the velum because of its width
and the size and complexity of its cirri. Each cirrus is
roughly 80 ju,m long and is composed of 50-100 cilia.
(H)
Figure 3. Schematic representation of the velum in a laic pedneligcr ol Ihircn < i hilciisi.\ ( "400 /xm shell
length) in lateral view. Ciliar, bands are identified in an enlarged section of the velum. AC: apical cilia; AOC:
adoral cilia; IPC: inner preoral cilia; OPC: outer preoral cilia. S: shell; V: velum. Circled letters refer to the
scanning electron micrographs in Figure 4.
VELUM OF OSTREA CH1LENSIS
107
Figure 4. Ciliature of Ihe laic pedivcliger of Ostreci chilensis. (A) Lateral view; scale bar 160 /urn. (B)
Superior view of the velum showing the AC band in the center; scale bar 60 /xm. (C) Detail of the IPC band
(superior aspect); scale bar 10.9 jam. (D) Transverse section of the velum showing the principal ciliary bands;
scale bar 9.6 /xm. (E) Detail of the OPC band; scale bar 3.0 /urn. Arrow indicates a row of cirri. (F) Lateral view
of the mouth area, showing OPC and AOC bands; scale bar 40 jum. (G) Food groove: scale bar 22 jum. (H)
Ventral ( = frontal) view of the mouth region; scale bar 48 ju.m. F = foot; for other abbreviations see legend to
Fiaure 3.
which are in contact with each other for almost all their
length. The width of the cirrus is about 1 /xm. and each one
is separated from its neighbor by a nonciliated space of
about 1 .5-2 /xm.
Atlornl cilia
The remainder of the velum (adoral area), from the OPC
to the dorsal margin of the shell, is covered by a carpet of
individual, short cilia (8-12 /xm) known as the adoral cilia
(AOC), which also cover the crest and floor of the food
groove (the sides are not visible) and the external part of the
mouth. No differentiation in the form of the AOC is appar-
ent, although in some areas there are a few cilia of different
length, and in the floor of the food groove the cilia are
shorter than the rest of the AOC (Fig. 4F. G). Short cilia can
also be seen on the base of the external part of the mouth
(Fig. 4H). There is no clearly identifiable postoral ciliary
band of the type identified in larvae of Ostrea edulis by
Waller (1981). Below the food groove and close to the
mouth lie several lobes, which resemble the tumescent cells
identified by Waller ( 1981 ) in O. editlix.
Discussion
The inclusion of a pelagic larva in the life cycle of most
marine bivalve molluscs is accompanied by anatomical
adaptations, especially those associated with the velum, and
is characterized by rapid development to the prodissoconch
stage. These features allow the larva to survive for long
periods in the water column, and the velum is an adaptation
for planktonic life (Cragg, 1989). Many papers on the early
development of bivalves have shown the presence of cilia
on some parts of the embryo or larva, or covering the entire
surface (Allen. 1961; Carriker. 1961; Bayne. 1976: Amor,
1981; Fitt el til., 1984; Gustufson and Lutz. 1991). In most
cases the cilia appear at the earliest stages of embryonic
development (Gallardo. 1989). The few studies that have
been undertaken on brooded embryos or larvae have shown
that cilia first appear at later stages of development: Ostreu
liiriiln. trochophore stage (Hopkins, 1936): O. edulis. tro-
chophore stage (Horst 1883-1884, in Waller, 1981). How-
ever, the present study shows that in the Chilean oyster all
embryonic stages, together with the trochophore and early
veliger. are totally devoid of cilia. This is one of the few
108
O. R. CHAPARRO ET AL.
cases known in which cilia are totally absent at such a late
stage of development in a bivalve. From the illustrations in
Beauchamp (1986). it can be inferred that advanced, shelled
veligers of the brooding clam Lasaeu subviridis are also
naked. This species exhibits direct development, and no
pelagic phase has been detected (Beauchamp, 1986), an
observation that would explain the absence of cilia during
the larval stages. Oldfield (1964) demonstrated that the area
normally occupied by the ciliated velum is replaced in L
ntbra by an unciliated structure she termed the "cephalic
mass," implying a specialization for brooding more extreme
than is seen in the Chilean oyster. Thus loss or modification
of the velar ciliature represents one of the most important
and visible adaptations for brooding in a bivalve mollusc.
Cilia begin to develop when the shell length of the
Chilean oyster larva is about 290 /urn. By the time the larva
reaches about 300 ju,m, the cilia have developed completely
and remain throughout the rest of the larval phase. The
present study supports the contention of Winter et al. ( 1984)
and Toro and Chaparro (1990) that the brooding period in
O. chilensis is the longest of any Ostrea species for which
information is available. There is little necessity for swim-
ming because the larva spends only a few hours in the water
column and is competent to settle immediately after being
released (Soli's, 1973: Cranfield. 1979). According to Millar
and Hollis ( 1963), the shortened pelagic phase in the larva
of O. chilensis is an adaptation for survival in a habitat
characterized by strong currents.
The absence of cilia during much of larval life may be
considered an adaptation to brooding. The encapsulated
embryos of many marine invertebrate species lacking pe-
lagic larvae bear structures that appear to be functionally
significant only in free-swimming larval stages. In some
encapsulated embryos, those cilia normally associated with
swimming in pelagic larvae serve to rotate the embryo
within its capsule, presumably aiding the larva in the inges-
tion of fluid albumen and in gas exchange (Fretter and
Graham, 1962). Hadfield and laea (1989) reported an ex-
treme case in which encapsulated larvae of the gastropod
Petaloconchus montere\ensis showed an absence or reduc-
tion of some velar structures that are very important in
closely related species with a pelagic larva. On the other
hand, in another encapsulated gastropod (Turritella commu-
nis), cilia develop in the very earliest embryonic stages,
even though these cilia are not required for swimming
(Kennedy and Keegan, 1992). The velar lobes of many
encapsulated gastropod veligers are known to participate in
the breakdown and ingestion of nurse eggs (Fioroni. 1966).
and in others the velum is greatly modified for aiding in the
ingestion and perhaps in the breakdown of external nurse
yolk (Hadfield and laea. 1989).
In Chilean oyster veligers. ciliary development is well-
synchronized within a brood. Immediately after the cilia
have completely developed, the larvae start to ingest parti-
cles. Thus the cilia are required for feeding more than for
swimming, although data from endoscopy show that the
larvae are not completely immobile, but exhibit a specific
circulation pattern inside the mantle cavity of the female
(Chaparro et al., 1993). The larval circulation is driven by
water currents produced by the female rather than by the
larval velum. Furthermore, although the velar cilia are very
active when the female has stopped pumping, the larvae
move very little, and it is not clear whether they are capable
of swimming at this stage.
The composition of the ciliary bands on the velum is
similar, but not identical, to that of the closely related
species Ostrea edulis, described by Waller (1981). Both
these species have a short apical ciliary (AC) ring and no
apical tuft, unlike the pelagic larvae of many other bivalves
(Allen, 1961; Carriker, 1961; Ansell, 1962: Gruffydd and
Beaumont, 1972; Bayne. 1976; Boyle and Turner, 1976;
Chanley and Chanley, 1980; Amor, 1981). The reduced
development of the AC ring in the Chilean oyster larva may
be explained by a reduced sensory function during the
brooding phase, and also by the short larval pelagic phase.
A sensory function has been proposed for the AC because
they are very short, appear to be unsuitable for locomotion
and food-gathering, and are underlain by the cerebral gan-
glion (Hickman and Gruffydd, 1971). According to Hodg-
son and Burke ( 1988), the apical tuft remains in the larva of
Chlaniys hastata until the earliest veliger stage, but in the
Chilean oyster larva the AC never develop into a tuft.
A ring composed of single cilia (inner preoral cilia, IPC)
has been identified between the AC and the OPC in the
Chilean oyster veliger. A similar structure has also been
described by Waller (1981) for O. edulis, by Hodgson and
Burke ( 1988) for Cliliunyx hashihi, and by Elston ( 1980) for
Crassostrea virginica. No clear function has been identified
for this band (Waller. 1981). Although the IPC ring is
situated in such a position that it could entrain food parti-
cles, it lies far from the mouth and the AOC and is separated
from the nearest ciliated pathway to the mouth by a non-
ciliated zone. Waller (1981) therefore concluded that the
IPC probably do not play a role in food capture and are
more likely to function as an upcurrent tactile receptor.
The outer preoral cilia (OPC) form the most prominent
ciliated ring in the velum of O. chilensis, as they do in
several other bivalve larvae including O. edulis (Waller,
1981), Clilainvs hastata (Hodgson and Burke, 1988). and
Crassostrea virginica (Elston, 1980). In some species the
ring is composed of a single row of cilia in the early larval
stages (e.g., the D-stage veliger of C. hastata). but more
developed larvae of C. hastata have two rows (Hodgson and
Burke. 1988), as do all stages of the veliger in O. edulis
(Waller, 1981). The OPC ring is believed to function in
locomotion and feeding (Strathmann et al., 1972; Strath-
mann and Leise, 1979; Waller, 1981 ). and it is normally the
most prominent ciliated structure on the velum (Waller.
VELUM OF OSTREA CHILENS1S
109
1981). Furthermore, Bayne (1971) showed that long cilia,
presumably the OPC, on the velum of the pediveliger of the
mussel Mytilus edulis provide the main force for swimming
and also create the feeding currents.
In O. chilensis, a wide band of short adoral cilia (AOC)
covers an area of the velum limited in the uppermost part by
the OPC ring and in the lowest part by the shell. In the
middle of this band lies the food groove. The ciliature is
uniform throughout the band, although the cilia in the floor
of the food groove are a little shorter. The cilia of the upper
and lower regions of the AOC band are in close contact with
the groove. These cilia are probably responsible for trans-
ferring particles caught by the other ciliary bands to the food
groove. In many specimens of O. chilensis veligers, pieces
of mucous strings or globules could be distinguished in the
food groove, presumably moving towards the mouth. It may
be significant that some descriptions of feeding in lamelli-
branch veligers (e.g., Yonge, 1926) refer to a mucous string
carrying food particles to the mouth, since the efficiency of
a system that lacks postoral cilia may be improved by the
presence of mucus (Bayne, 1976). Waller (1981) indicated
that the AOC are in close contact with the compound cilia
of the OPC when the latter are at the bottom of their
effective beat; this is probably the mechanism by which the
OPC transfer the entrained particles to the AOC band to be
moved to the mouth.
The velar bands are almost identical in O. chilensis and
O. edulis, the principal difference being that in the latter the
postoral cilia (POC) represent a single cirral ring located at
the base of the velum, in contact with the shell edge (Erd-
mann. 1935; Waller. 1981), whereas the POC were not
visible in this study on the Chilean oyster and are probably
not present. On a cautionary note, however. Strathmann et
al. (1972) pointed out that some authors have not mentioned
the POC when describing mollusc larvae that feed and have
a well-developed preoral band. These authors suggested that
in many cases this may have been an oversight, or a result
of confusing the shorter cilia of the postoral band with the
cilia of the food groove. However, owing to the central
position of the food groove on the velum of the Chilean
oyster larva, it would be easy to distinguish between food
groove cilia and POC, were the latter present.
Waller (1981) associated the POC band in O. edulis with
both swimming and particle capture. The latter has been
described by Strathmann et al. (1972), who showed that
many marine invertebrate larvae can continue swimming
without feeding, presumably by stopping the beat of the
POC. This band appears to be very important in filter-
feeding, especially in the larvae of taxa which employ the
opposing band mechanism proposed by Strathmann et al.
(1972) and Strathmann (1978) bivalves, annelids, echiu-
rids, sipunculids, and entoprocts. In this system both preoral
and postoral rings are essential for filter-feeding by the larva
(Strathmann et al., 1972), and provide an efficient mecha-
nism to capture particles. In this context, the POC ring
identified by Waller ( 1981 ) in O. edulis may serve to catch
particles passing the tips of the cirri of the preoral band, and
may also play a more direct role in particle retention and
rejection (Strathmann et al., 1972).
The food collected by the cirri is moved to the adoral ring
and then to the mouth, where oral compound cilia are
present. These may function in selecting or rejecting food,
particles before they enter the mouth (Hodgson and Burke,
1988).
Whatever the characteristics of the POC band, Hodgson
and Burke (1988) have suggested that it may play a role in
particle capture, although Strathmann (1987) has shown that
the larvae of other invertebrate taxa catch particles by using
only one cirral ring. In the Chilean oyster, the particle-
catching mechanism was not identified in the present study,
but the apparent absence of the second (POC) ring may
imply that only one ciliary band is involved, probably
because the brooded larva does not need to concentrate
particles since the brooding female is performing this func-
tion. Furthermore, endoscopic observations have shown the
larval velum to be in close contact with mucous strings from
the food grooves on the gills of the female (Chaparro et al.,
1993). The resolution of the endoscope was insufficient to
determine whether larvae were ingesting the mucous string,
but the presence of larvae in the food groove, their orien-
tation, and their behavior suggested that this was probable;
furthermore, marker particles introduced into the ambient
seawater were later observed in the gut of the larva. Thus
the absence of the POC may represent another adaptation of
the Chilean oyster larva for brooding. Hodgson and Burke
( 1988) identified secretory cells among the velar cilia of the
pectinid Chlam\s hastata, but such cells have not been
described in other bivalve larvae, although several authors
have suggested or assumed that mucus is involved in the
collection of particles (Yonge, 1926; Erdmann. 1935;
Strathmann et al.. 1972; Waller, 1981). Hodgson and Burke
( 1988) suggested that mucus produced by the velum serves
principally to bind entrained particles into a string, which
travels along the food groove, thereby ensuring the retention
of the particles. Pieces of mucus were detected in the food
groove of the larva of the Chilean oyster during the present
study. The origin of this material could not be clearly
ascertained, but two possibilities may be suggested: first,
that pieces of the mucous string are taken from the food
grooves of the female's gill; and second, that mucus is
produced by the larva, as described by Hodgson and Burke
(1988) in C. hastata.
The absence of the POC band is consistent with the short
pelagic phase of the pediveliger in O. chilensis because
there is no requirement to filter food particles from the water
column and no necessity to swim for a long time as a
dispersive strategy, since the population is confined to its
own estuary. The pediveliger is competent to settle on the
110
O. R. CHAPARRO ET AL.
first hard substrate that it encounters after release. Typical
settlement distances are variously given as 10 cm (Padilla et
al., 1969) and 40 cm (Soli's, 1973) from the female parent.
Morphological adaptations of marine invertebrate larvae
have been described by Strathmann (1978). The larvae of
some oligomeric taxa (e.g., Bryozoa, Phoronida, Bra-
chiopoda. Hemichordata) have a single band system and
have eliminated the planktotrophic stage. These taxa have
lost or modified some larval structures, such as the band of
cilia that captures particles. The gut is often incomplete, and
the mouth, anus, or both may be absent. In some mollusc
species with nonfeeding larvae, the metatroch and food
groove have been lost; in contrast, other gastropod larvae,
which are also not filter-feeders, retain the opposing band
system, even when the larvae are not planktotrophic (Strath-
mann, 1978). It is clear that many species have modified
some larval structures, allowing the larva to adapt more
completely to the environment in which it is developing.
The Chilean oyster is one such example: the morphological
modifications of the velum are essential for the adaptation
by the species to brooding the larva inside the mantle cavity
of the female a very different environment from that ex-
perienced by a planktonic larva. Furthermore, in O. chilen-
sis and O. lutaria, which have the longest incubation peri-
ods of all the ostreids, the larval shells differ structurally
from those of other oysters (Chanley and Dinamani, 1980).
In particular, the shells of the two larvae are equivalve and
edentulous, but it is not clear whether these features repre-
sent the ancestral condition or are adaptations to brooding
(Chanley and Dinamani, 1980).
Acknowledgments
A large part of the field research was carried out in the
Estacion Experimental de Quempillen, Ancud, Chile, and in
the Institute de Biologfa Marina de la Universidad Austral
de Chile, to whose staff we extend our appreciation. Finan-
cial help came from operating grants to ORC by the Fondo
Nacional de Investigacion Cientifica y Tecnologica-Chile
(Fondecyt 1930364 and 1980984), by the International
Foundation for Sciences-Sweden (IFS A/0846), and by the
Direccion de Investigacion of the Universidad Austral de
Chile, and from a research grant to RJT from the Natural
Sciences and Engineering Research Council-Canada
(NSERC). ORC's stay in Canada was made possible by
fellowships from the International Development Research
Centre-Canada (IDRC) and NSERC (through a Networks of
Centres of Excellence programme, the Ocean Production
Enhancement Network). We also thank the Canadian Inter-
national Development Agency (CIDA) for support during
the preparation of the manuscript.
Literature Cited
Allen, J. A. 1961. The development of Pandora inaequivalvis (Linne). /.
Embryol Exp. Morphol. 92: 252-268.
Amor, A. 1981. Observaciones sobre el desarrollo embrionario y larval
de Mytilus platensis D'Orbigny, del sector Bonaerense (Mollusca.
Bivalvia). Physis (Buenos Aires). Secc. A., 39(97): 33-39.
Ansel), A. 1962. The functional morphology of the larva, and the post-
larval development of Venus striatula (Da Costa). /. Mar. Biol. Assoc.
U.K. 42: 419-443.
Bayne, B. L. 1971. Some morphological changes that occur at the
metamorphosis of the larvae of Mytilus edulis. Pp. 259-280 in Euro-
pean Marine Biology Symposium. D. J. Crisp, ed. Cambridge Univer-
sity Press, London.
Bayne, B. L. 1976. The biology of mussel larvae. Pp. 81-120 in Marine
Mussels: Their Ecology and Physiology. B. L. Bayne, ed. Cambridge
University Press.
Beauchamp, K. A. 1986. Reproductive ecology of the brooding, her-
maphroditic clam Lasaea subviridis. Mar. Biol. 93: 225-235.
Boyle, P. J., and R. D. Turner. 1976. The larval development of the
wood boring piddock Martensia striala (1.) (Mollusca: Bivalvia: Pho-
ladidae). /. Exp. Mar. Biol. Ecol. 22: 55-68.
Buroker, N. E. 1985. Evolutionary patterns in the family Ostreidae:
larviparity vs. ovipanty. J. Exp. Mar. Biol. Ecol. 90: 233-247.
Carriker, M. R. 1961. Interrelation of functional morphology, behavior,
and autecology in early stages of the bivalve Mercenaria mercenaria.
J. Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 77: 168-242.
Chanley, P., and M. Chanley. 1980. Reproductive biology ofArthritica
crassiformis and A. bifurca, two commensal bivalve molluscs (Lep-
tonacea). N. Z. J. Mar. Freshwater Res. 14: 31-43.
Chanley, P., and P. Dinamani. 1980. Comparative descriptions of some
oyster larvae from New Zealand and Chile, and a description of a new
genus of oyster, Tiostrea. N. Z. J. Mar. Freshwater Res. 14: 103-120.
Chaparro, O. R., R. J. Thompson, and J. E. Ward. 1993. In vivo
observations of larval brooding in the Chilean oyster, Ostrea chilensis
Philippi, 1845. Biol. Bull. 185: 365-372.
Cragg, S. M. 1985. The adductor and retractor muscles of the veliger of
Pecten maximus (L.) (Bivalvia). J. Molluscan Stud. 51: 276-283.
Cragg, S. M. 1989. The ciliated rim of the velum of larvae of Pecten
maximus (Bivalvia: Pectinidae). /. Molluscan Stud. 55: 497-508.
Cranfield, H. J. 1979. The biology of the oyster, Ostrea lutaria and the
oyster fishery of Foveaux Strait. Rapp. P. V. Reun. Cons. Int. Explor.
Mer. 175: 44-49.
Cranfield, H. J., and K. P. Michael. 1989. Larvae of the incubatory
oyster Tiostrea chilensis (Bivalvia: Ostreidae) in the plankton of central
and southern New Zealand. N. Z. J. Mar. Freshwater Res. 23: 51-60.
Elston, R. 1980. Functional anatomy, histology and ultrastructure of the
soft tissues of the larval American oyster, Crassostrea virginica. Proc.
Natl. Shellfish Assoc. 70: 65-93.
Erdmann, W. 1935. Uber die Entwicklung und die Anatomie der 'An-
satzreifen' Larvae von Ostrea edulis mil Bemerkungen uber die Leb-
engeschichte der Auster. Helgol. Wiss. Meeresunters. 19(6): 1-25.
Fernandez Castro, N., and M. Le Pennec. 1988. Modalities of brood-
ing and morphogenesis of larvae in Ostrea puelchana (D'Orbigny)
under experimental rearing. J. Mar. Biol. Assoc. U. K. 68: 399-407.
Fioroni, P. 1966. Zur Morphologic und Embryogenese des Darmtraktes
und der Transitorischen Organe bei Prosobranchiern (Mollusca, Gas-
tropoda). Rev. Suisse Zool. 73: 621-876.
Fitt, W. K., C. R. Fisher, and R. K. Trench. 1984. Larval biology of
tridacnid clams. Aquaculture 39: 181-195.
Franz, D. R. 1973. Ecology and reproduction of a marine bivalve
Mysella planulala. Biol. Bull. 144: 93-106.
Fretter, V., and A. Graham. 1962. British Prosohranch Molluscs. Ray
Society London. 755 pp.
Gallardo, C. S. 1989. Patrones de reproducci6n y ciclo vital en moluscos
VELUM OF OSTREA CH1LENS1S
111
marines benticos: Una aproximacion ecologica evolutivu. Mcdio Am-
biente 10(2): 25-35.
Gallardo, C. S. 1993. Reproductive habits and life cycle of the small
clam Kingiella chilenica (Bivalvia: Cyamiidae) in an estuarine sand Hat
from the South of Chile. Mar. Bio/. 115: 595-603.
Galtsoff. P. S. 1964. The American Oyster Crassostrea virginica Gmelin.
U. S. Fish Wildl. Sen: Fish. Bull. 64: 480 pp.
Gruffydd, LI. D., and A. R. Beaumont. 1972. A method for rearing
Pecten maximus larvae in the laboratory. Mar. Bioi 15: 350-355.
Gustafson, R. G., and R. A. Lutz. 1991. Larval and early post-larval
development of the protobranch bivalve Solemya velum (Mollusca:
Bivalvia). J. Mar. Biol. Assoc. U. K. 72: 383-402.
Hadlield, M. G., and D. K. laea. 1989. Velum of encapsulated veligers
of Peta/oconc/uts (Gastropoda), and the problem of re-evolution of
planklotrophic larvae. Bull. Mar. Sci. 45: 377-386.
Harry, H. W. 1985. Synopsis of the supraspecific classification of living
oysters (Bivalvia: Gryphaeidae and Ostreidae). Veliger 28: 121-158.
Heard, W. H. 1977. Reproduction of fingernail clams (Sphaendae:
Sphaerium and Musculum). Malaccilogia 16: 421-455.
1 1 irk 111:111. R. W., and LI. D. Gruffydd. 1971. The histology of the larva
of Ostrea edulis during metamorphosis. Pp. 281-294 in European
Marine Biology Symposium. D. J. Crisp, ed. Cambridge University
Press, London.
Hodgson, C. A., and R. D. Burke. 1988. Development and larval
morphology of the spiny scallop, Chlamys hastata. Biol. Bui/. 174:
303-318.
Hopkins, A. E. 1936. Ecological observations on spawning and early
larval development in the Olympia oyster (Ostrea lurida). Ecologv
17(4): 551-566.
Kennedy, J. J., and B. F. Keegan. 1992. The encapsular developmental
sequence of the mesogastropod Turritella communis (Gastropoda: Tur-
ritellidae). J. Mar. Biol. Assoc. U. K. 72: 783-805.
Mackie, G. L. 1979. Dispersal mechanisms in Sphaenidae (Mollusca:
Bivalvia). Bull. Am. Malacol. Union 1979: 17-21.
Mackie, G. L. 1984. Bivalves. Pp. 351-418 in The Mollusca. Vol 7.
Reproduction. A. S. Tompa, N. H. Verdonk, and J. Van Den Bigger-
laar, eds. Academic Press, Orlando, Florida.
Mackie, G. L., S. U. Qadri, and H. Clarke. 1974. Development of
brood sacs in Musculium securis (Bivalvia: Sphaeriidae). Nautilus 88:
109-111.
Millar, R. H., and P. J. Hollis. 1963. Abbreviated pelagic life of Chilean
and New Zealand oysters. Nature 197: 512-513.
Morriconi, E., and J. Calvo. 1980. Fertihdad y periodicidad del desove
en Ostrea puelchana. Rev. Invest. Desarrollo Pesi/. 2: 5762.
Ockelmann, K. W. 1964. Turlonui nuinilii (Fahncus), a neotenous
veneracean bivalve. Ophelia 1: 121-146.
Padilla, M., M. Mendez, and F. Casanova. 1969. Observaciones sobre
el comportamiento de la Ostrea c/iilensis en Apiao. Bol. Inst. Fomemo
Pesquero. Sainiiign de Chile. 10: 1-28.
Pechenik, J. A. 1979. Role of encapsulation in invertebrate life histories.
Am. Nat. 114: 859-870.
Pechenik, J. A. 1986. The encapsulation of eggs and embryos by mol-
luscs: an overview. Am. Malacol. Bull. 4: 165-172.
Soli's, I. 1967. Observaciones hiologicas en ostras (Ostrea chilensis
Philippi) de Pullinque. Biol. /Y.vt/. 2: 51-82.
Soli's, I. 1973. Valoracion de colectores de larvas de ostras Ostrea chil-
ensis Philippi en Pullinque. Biol. Pesq. 6: 1-23.
Strathmann, R. R. 1978. The evolution and loss of feeding larval stages
in marine invertebrates. Evolution 32: 894-906.
Strathmann, R. R., and E. Leise. 1979. On feeding mechanisms and
clearance rates of molluscan veligers. Biol. Bull. 157: 524-535.
Strathmann, R. R., T. L. Jahn, and J. R. C. Fonseca. 1972. Suspen-
sion feeding by marine invertebrate larvae: clearance of particles by
ciliated bands of a rotifer, pluteus, and trochophore. Biol. Bull. 142:
505-519.
Tankersley, R. A., and R. V. Dimock. 1992. Quantitative analysis of
the structure and function of the marsupial gills of the freshwater
mussel Anodonta cataracta. Biol. Bull. 182: 145-154.
Tankersley, R. A., and R. V. Dimock. 1993. Endoscopic visualization
of the functional morphology of the ctenidia of the unionid mussel
Pyganodon cataracta. Can. J. Zool. 71: 811-819.
Toro, J. E., and O. R. Chaparro. 1990. Conocimiento biologico de
Ostrea chi/ensis Philippi 1845. Impacto y perspectivas en el desarrollo
de la ostricultura en Chile. Pp. 231-264 in Cultiva de Moluscos en
America Latino. Memorial Segunda Reunion Grupo Trabajo Tecnico,
Ancud, Chile. Noviembre 1989. A. Hernandez, ed. Special publication,
Canadian International Development Agency. Bogota, Colombia.
Waller, T. R. 1981. Functional morphology and development of veliger
larvae of the European oyster, Ostrea edulis Linne. Smithson. Contrib.
Zool. 328: 1-70.
Winter, J. E., J. E. Toro, J. M. Navarro, G. S. Valenzuela, and O. R.
Chaparro. 1984. Recent developments, status, and prospects of mol-
luscan aquaculture on the Pacific coast of South America. Aquacit/ture
39: 95-134.
Yonge, C. M. 1926. Structure and physiology of the organs of feeding
and digestion in Ostrea edulis. J. Mar. Biol. Assoc. U. K. 14: 295-386.
Marine
Biological
Laboratory
Woods Hole
Massachusetts
One Hundred and First Report
for the Year 1998
One-Hundred and Tenth Year
Officers of the Corporation
Sheldon J. Segal, Chairman of the Board of Trustees
Frederick Bay, Co-Vice Chair
Mary J. Greer, Co-Vice Chair
John E. Dowling, President of the Corporation
John E. Burris, Director and Chief Executive Officer
Mary B. Conrad, Treasurer
Neil Jacobs, Clerk of the Corporation
Contents
Report of the Director and CEO Rl
Report of the Treasurer R7
Financial Statements R8
Report of the Library Director RH>
Educational Programs
Summer Courses R21
Special Topics Courses R25
Other Programs R31
Summer Research Programs
Principal Investigators R33
Other Research Personnel R34
Library Readers R35
Institutions Represented R36
Year-Round Research Programs R41
Honors R53
Board of Trustees and Committees R60
Administrative Support Staff R64
Members of the Corporation
Life Members R67
Members R68
Associate Members R78
Certificate of Organization R82
Articles of Amendment R82
Bylaws R82
Photo credits:
Beth Armstrong, R4 (bottom), R5 (bottom). R7.
R2I, R33. R67
Jelle Ateina, R45
Ken Foreman, R32
Linda Colder, R24, R64
Roger Hanlon, R60
Diedtra Henderson, R47
Jan Hinsch. R53
Richard Howard, R2(top), R4(top), R5(top)
Alan Ku/.irian, R2(bottom), R34. R49. R50
Lisa Ken- Lobel, Rl
Chris Pauk, R22
P.A. Shave, RS2
James Shreeve, R35
Sam Sweezy. R5 1
Report of the Director
and Chief Executive Officer
The Marine Biological Laboratory remains a
remarkable place as we approach the end of the 20th
Century. At every turn there are feelings of pride and
satisfaction, of excitement, curiosity, determination and
anticipation of things to be discovered. These feelings are
shared by both resident and visiting scientists and by
students for whom time spent at MBL is an experience
never to be matched. That spirit of scientific adventure
and achievement is alive and thriving here, as it has been
for more than a century.
The MBL continues to build on its solid history, to add
programs in research and education, to recruit new
scientists and to raise funds for vital improvements to this
place that is like no other. After establishing research and
education priorities, we were able to define funding
requirements and a timeframe enabling us in August of
1997 to launch Discovery: The Campaign for Science at
the Marine Biological Laboratory. The goal is to reach
$25 million by December 31, 2000. We are gratified by
the response to this fundraising effort and are grateful to
many of you who have already made generous
contributions to this Campaign. I'm pleased to say that,
by the end of 1998, we had raised $20.6 million, which is
good news indeed.
Education at the MBL
The MBL's education program is growing both in
numbers of students and faculty and in courses offered.
During the summer of 1998 we hosted 594 faculty for
416 students from around the world. We were able to
award more than $600,000 in scholarship support for
those students, making it possible for the best and the
brightest to continue to come to the MBL. Even as we
grow, we have retained the high quality, intensive courses
that have long set the MBL apart from other educational
institutions. As Purnell Choppin, president of the Howard
Hughes Medical Institute, stated in announcing a $2.2
million award to support education at the MBL in April
of 1999, "The Marine Biological Laboratory serves as an
international schoolhouse for the biomedical research
community. Young scientists and established researchers
alike gather there to learn the latest developments at the
cutting edges of their fields." In 1998 we continued to
attract international students with over 307c of our
applications from students from 68 different foreign
countries.
We take great pride in maintaining the quality and
dynamics of the courses and continue to be responsive to
the changing face of biological research as demonstrated
by our ability and interest in adding new courses to our
roster of exceptional offerings. Two new courses were
introduced in 1998: Frontiers in Reproduction: Molecular
and Cellular Concepts and Neural Development and
Genetics of Zebrafish. These were in addition to the
Molecular Mycology: Current Approaches to Fungal
Pathogenesis course and the Semester in Environmental
Sciences, both of which were offered for the first time in
1997.
Not only have we added new courses, but we have
continued to change our long-standing courses through
the planned turnover in course directors. For example, in
1999 David Garbers and Randy Reed will be the co-
directors of the over 100-year-old Physiology course.
They will succeed Kerry Bloom and Mark Moosekar who
did a superb job in leading the course for the past four
years.
Our Semester in Environmental Sciences program was
a great success again this year. Undergraduate students
selected from a consortium of 34 liberal arts colleges
were in residence for 14 weeks during the fall to learn
about environmental sciences. The curriculum covered
aquatic and terrestrial ecosystems and included electives
in computational modeling and microbial ecology.
Students gained a basic understanding of ecosystem
structure and dynamics through intensive hands-on
fieldwork at two local sites on Cape Cod. Major
biogeochemical processes were studied and general
problems concerning the global carbon cycle, fossil fuel
emissions, increased concentrations of greenhouse gases
Rl
R2 Annual Report
in the atmosphere, estuarine eutrophication, deforestation,
and over-exploitation of fisheries were considered. Special
emphasis was given to how changes in biodiversity affect
ecosystem function.
The MBL's Science Writing Fellowships Program, now
about to enter its fourteenth summer, added a new hands-
on laboratory course in environmental science during the
summer of 1998. Co-directed by John Hobble and Jerry
Melillo of the Ecosystems Center, this new component of
the program was a great success, attracting environment
writers from around the country.
Research at the MBL
The Marine Resources Center
While John Glenn was the most famous traveler in
space late last fall, two other passengers aboard the
shuttle were of considerable importance to scientific
experiments conducted during that mission. Two oyster
toad fish participated in an experiment overseen by Steve
Highstein that was designed to provide a better
understanding of the effects of microgravity on our
balance system. The fish, collected from the waters off
Woods Hole, traveled more than three million miles in
what was a follow-up to studies conducted during the
Neurolab space mission in April of 1998. Balance,
location and movement are so crucial to animals that the
vestibular system was one of the first sensory systems to
evolve. The toadfish has become a well-known
experimental model for learning more about balance
disorders, such as Meniere's disease and vertigo. It also is
a good model for studying motion sickness, including that
experienced by astronauts during space flight.
Thanks to a $1 million challenge grant, the MBL has
an exciting opportunity to build on its existing strengths
as a developer of aquatic models for biomedical research.
The technologically sophisticated Marine Resources
Center is an ideal venue for this program. And MRC
Director Roger Hanlon's expertise in the culturing of
marine organisms such as Hawaiian squid and cuttlefish
provides a great foundation for the expansion of
aquaculture activities at MBL. Dr. Hanlon contributed his
expertise in this area as a member of a National Research
Council/National Academy of Sciences committee that
published in 1998 a report titled "Biomedical Models and
Resources: Current Needs and Future Opportunities." This
paper is expected to help the National Institutes of Health
structure research funding for model organisms, including
many aquatic ones.
The MRC challenge grant, which stipulates that two
dollars must be raised for every one dollar awarded, will
enable the MBL to establish a scientific aquaculture
program in the Marine Resources Center. This
exceptional gift will allow scientists to develop novel
research techniques and to address problems being faced
by scientific and commercial aquaculture interests alike.
Studies will address problems such as disease diagnosis
and management, water quality requirements for specific
life stages, nutrition research for optimal diets and
numerous aspects of reproductive biology. For many
Report of the Director and CKO R3
years, commercial aquaculture companies have sought the
MBL's expertise in addressing all of these issues. In
recent years, we successfully maintained 95,000 juvenile
flounder bound for the Japanese sushi industry and raised
seedling scallops for the local shellfish trade. Now we
will be in an even better position to provide advice and
develop appropriate aquaculture techniques in the future.
The Ecos\stems Center
The Ecosystems Center recently launched a new
tropical ecology program that focuses on the
consequences of land-cover and land-use changes in the
tropics. The possibility of a new joint research project
with Brazilian scientists is being explored. The program
is based on a challenge put to ecologists: "Now that you
think you know how ecosystems work, why don't you try
to fix some broken ones?" Perhaps we can test our
understanding of ecosystem structure by working to
rebuild a damaged one. The joint project would focus on
large tracts of coastal forests northeast of Sao Paulo.
The Ecosystems Center also received the only Long-
Term Ecological Research Site award made in 1998. The
MBL is now the only place in the country responsible for
the oversight of two LTER sites the new one at Plum
Island Sound, located north of Boston, and the long-time
Arctic Toolik Lake site, located on the North Slope of the
Brooks Range in Alaska and which has major
involvement in a third (Harvard Forest in Petersham.
Massachusetts).
All of this research activity has resulted in remarkable
growth over the past few years. Since 1979, Center staff
has increased sixfold. The resulting demand for additional
laboratories, offices, and staging areas for equipment and
supplies used in field research has led to a severe
shortage of space. And the MBL's new Semester in
Environmental Sciences program for undergraduate liberal
arts students is putting an additional squeeze on the
Center's already over-taxed facilities.
In November, the MBL Board of Trustees approved the
architectural plans for a new facility to house research
and education activities of the Ecosystems Center. The
proposed three-story building will provide a cutting-edge
GIS (geographic information systems) facility, state-of-
the-art laboratories for plant and soil sample analysis, a
stable isotope laboratory, modern offices, teaching
facilities and a classroom/conference room for the
Semester in Environmental Science program, ample
storage areas for diving gear, field samples, and
equipment, and field staging areas. The 32,000-square-
foot building is designed to meet the needs of Ecosystems
Center scientists for many years to come, as well as serve
the needs of the entire MBL research and education
programs.
Fundraising is now underway, with a much appreciated
$1 million challenge grant from the Clowes Fund leading
the way. With groundbreaking scheduled for the spring of
2000, this new state-of-the-art Environmental Sciences
Building will be a fitting tribute to a quarter century of
excellence in ecological research and provide the
foundation for continued scientific achievements as the
MBL enters the 21st Century.
The Josephine Buy Paul Center
Under the direction of MBL Senior Scientist Dr.
Mitchell Sogin, the Josephine Bay Paul Center for
Comparative Molecular Biology and Evolution, dedicated
in August of 1998, is flourishing. The research pace at the
Center escalated during the past year, thanks to the arrival
of a number of scientists and the receipt of several
important grant awards.
Early in 1998, the Center received a major grant from
the National Institutes of Health, to be used in an
important research initiative to sequence the genome of
the parasitic protist, Giurtlia Unnblia. Giardia is a
waterborne human pathogen that attacks the intestinal
tract and exacts a terrible toll on public health worldwide.
The NIH grant will provide salary support for nine
scientists and technicians and has allowed us to establish
a new automated DNA sequencing facility.
There was still more exciting news at the Bay Paul
Center in 1998, when NASA selected MBL as a member
of the new Virtual Astrobiology Institute. This program
will bring together astrophysicists, biologists, chemists,
physicists, planetologists, and geologists for
interdisciplinary studies on life in the universe and its
cosmic implications. The MBL was one of 1 1 institutions
selected to participate from a field of nearly 70
applicants.
Dr. Michael Cummings joined the Bay Paul Center in
R4 Annual Report
early 1998 as an Assistant Scientist. His work is in the
field of molecular evolutionary genetics. The major focus
of that research is using novel statistical methods to study
relationships between genotype and phenotype. Current
investigations examine how gene sequence data can be
used to understand and predict drug resistance in
tuberculosis, variation in color vision, and basic immune
system functions at the molecular level. Dr. Cummings is
also studying the evolution of pathogenic bacteria by
examining species within the genus Mycobacterium. The
analysis of Mycobacterium DNA sequence data will
reveal evolutionary patterns that demonstrate the
emergence of both new pathogens and drug resistant
strains. This information will assist clinicians with
diagnosis and treatment of diseases such as tuberculosis
and leprosy.
Other Research Initiatives
The MBL is home not only to the above centers, but to
a number of individual laboratories where, for example,
the basis of bioluminescence is being investigated, the
fluxes of ions from individual cells are being measured,
the evolution of heme biosynthesis is being traced, new
antibiotics are being sought, and microscopy is being
developed and used to understand more about the cell.
A remodeled and expanded laboratory is serving Dr.
Carol Reinisch, a recently appointed Senior Scientist at
the MBL and a new year-round resident. She investigates
how environmental factors influence the prevalence of
leukemia using soft shell clams as a research model. She
also studies surf clams to better understand how toxins
such as PCBs disrupt nerve development in embryos that
later influences normal learning and behavior.
Drs. Barbara and Bruce Furie have modernized their
MBL laboratory to accommodate ongoing work on the
study of hemophilia and other blood disorders using the
venomous cone snail. The conotoxins produced by these
invertebrate snails share an amino acid that is found in
mammals. A protein containing this unusual amino acid,
when linked to vitamin K. triggers blood-clotting
mechanisms that are distributed widely throughout
mammalian species.
Summer Research
The MBL as it has for more than a century will
host hundreds of scientists from around the world who
come each summer to the Laboratory to participate in a
unique and intense research experience. Often using
marine and aquatic model organisms, these investigators
study basic processes in the life sciences. Their work
spans research on the protein assemblies that achieve
accurate chromosome segregation in cell division, on the
neural processing of visual information in the brain, and
on how hormones and Pharmaceuticals stimulate the
secretion of insulin from the pancreas.
The MBL's Fellowship Program is an important
element of summer research activities. Nineteen scientists
were awarded summer research fellowships at the MBL
in 1998. Examples of research projects by neurobiologists
Report of the Director and CEO R5
include studies by Dr. Elizabeth Jonas of Yale University
School of Medicine on the intracellular channels that
regulate synaptic function; studies by Dr. Matthew
Halstead of the